《Minecraft: A New Beginning》


 Prologue

    "Hey! The new update is next week. I''m so excited!"


    Said the next-door kid while hugging tightly his plush toy with a mustache.


    That cube toy is a birthday gift from me. I bought it for 7.99. It''s a limited edition.


    "Don''t forget to update your game and the server."


    Aaaah. Again. He keeps reminding me like I''m an old man. I''m only 24.


    "Yeah yeah yeah."


    I replied half halfheartedly.


    Minecraft.


    I''ve been playing it for a year now.


    A sandbox crafting and building game.


    I started playing it since this kid came along.


    The day their family moved in next door, his mom knocks on my door with a freshly baked pie and him tagging along to say hi.


    I thanked them for the pie and welcome them to the neighborhood.


    As I''m about to close the door the kid suddenly asks me:


    "Do you play a video game?"


    "Aah. Yes, I do. I also make them since I''m a video game programmer."


    "Wow. Do you make video games? Then have you played Minecraft?"


    Huh. Minecraft?


    "Minecraft?"


    I unconsciously said which I immediately regretted.


    "A game where you mine stuff, build stuff, ..."


    "Yeah yeah yeah. I know what Minecraft is. Why you suddenly ask me if I play Minecraft?"


    "Do you want to play with me?"


    Aaand. A year later. I''m stuck playing a video game that I neither like or hate.


    This is the only game this kid like and he will never ever want to play another game. Not even board games like monopoly or something.


    He keeps coming to my house while bringing his laptop every weekend or when there is no school asking to play with him.


    But. Today. I''m not in a mood for playing Minecraft.


    These last few weeks. I''ve been programming and testing the new game that my company is working.


    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    I needed some time off playing video games.


    That''s why I immediately said to the kid:


    "Hey. Why don''t do something today aside playing Minecraft? Let''s walk in a park."


    "But I want to play Minecraft."


    "Oh. Did I forget to mention that I''m going to buy you some ice cream?"


    And here we are. Walking in a park. Breathing fresh air.


    Faraway from a computer. Faraway from Minecraft.


    We stop at the ice cream truck and bought a couple of ice cream.


    While we''re sitting in bench enjoying an ice cream.


    The kid suddenly asks me a question.


    "If you ever got the chance to live in another world. What world would that be?"


    Well, kid. If you expect me to answer Minecraft, you will be disappointed.


    "Hmm. I''ve probably wanted to live in a fantasy world like Harry Potter. You know. Shooting laser in my magic wand."


    "Ehh. I thought you''re going to answer Minecraft."


    "That''s your dream kid. But enough of this. We should head home."


    As we are walking towards home. I suddenly in deep thought about the kid''s question.


    If I ever got the chance to live in another world and it''s Minecraft.


    What would I be doing?


    Build a castle. Mine diamonds to craft tools and armor. Kill the ender dragon.


    Well. That would be a little bit of fun.


    I was suddenly snap out of my thoughts when I lose my footing and slip.


    I smack the ground face first.


    It really hurts.


    I immediately stood to let the kid know I''m all right.


    But something strange is happening.


    The road we were walking on is gone and is replaced with dirt.


    The surrounding houses are replaced with trees and mountains.


    And most importantly.


    The kid is gone.


    Oh good heavens. What is happening?


    I''m absolutely certain the world I''m looking right now.


    Is Minecraft.

 Episode 1: New World New Life

    What is going on?


    How did I get here?


    What is happening to me?


    These are the top 3 questions that I keep asking myself.


    The last thing I remember is that I was on my way home together with the next-door kid.


    We went to the park to enjoy a nice sunny day and grab some ice cream.


    Well. That is not entirely true.


    I just want a break from playing Minecraft.


    Then suddenly I lost my footing and smack my face in the ground.


    Wait. Did I hit my head (or face) too hard?


    Am I in a coma?


    Is this a dream world? Because there is no way this could be real.


    No matter how many times I close and opens my eyes. I still can''t believe what I''m seeing.


    This place. No. This world. I''m absolutely certain this is Minecraft.


    I scan myself then find out that my body is different.


    Really different.


    Everything is cuboid.


    I raise my hands to find my fingers is missing.


    WHERE ARE MY FINGERS?!


    I began panicking. I immediately check my hands to figure out what is going on.


    No matter which angle I check. I can''t find my fingers.


    I put my hands in my face out despair then grab my hair out of frustration.


    As I''m about to cry, I realize something.


    Even though I don''t have fingers, I manage to grab my hair.


    I look at my hands again.


    There still no fingers.


    The sensation of able to grab things is weird even though I have no fingers.


    Then I try pinching my checks.


    It hurts. Which means I am not dreaming.


    My panic level rose higher even though it is already sky high.


    Okay. I need to calm myself down.


    Panicking will get us nowhere.


    As my programming instructor said "Don''t tackle the problem as a whole. You need to learn how to divide and conquer".


    Let''s start first with how did I get here.


    Well, obviously that question only God knows the answer.


    Wait a minute.


    God.


    Did God do this? Or any powerful beings?


    You know what. Let''s leave for now.


    What is this place?


    I scan my surroundings.


    All I can see are oak trees, grass, and mountains. There is also a pond.


    Hmm. Pond. Wait. I need to know what I look like. Which brings us to our next problem.


    What do I look like?


    I jog toward the pond.


    I look at my reflection in the water and was surprised to see my avatar in the Minecraft.


    There is no mistaking it. I created my avatar''s skin.


    Blond short hair. Black eyes. Fair skin. Similar to my real-life appearance.


    I''m wearing a green shirt and brown pants. I also have shoes.


    I take off my shoes to know if I have toes and to no one''s surprise I don''t have any.


    I immediately put back on my shoes because the ground is hot.


    I need to find some shade because the heat of the sun is killing me.


    I head to the nearest tree and sit putting my back on the tree.


    Oh my god.


    I can''t believe this is happening to me. What did I do wrong?A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    Well, I don''t know what is going on but if I really going to do this. Might as well be smart about it.


    Okay. What is the first thing you do when you started playing Minecraft?


    ''Press E to open your Inventory.'' is the first objective that the game asks you to do.


    How do I do this here? There is no keyboard that I can press here.


    "Inventory"


    I say out loud but nothing is happening.


    This is a game-like world so there has to be a way to access the inventory.


    I close my eyes. Took a deep breath. Empty my mind and picture the image of inventory in Minecraft.


    Then I muttered while exhaling.


    "Inventory"


    I open my eyes and was slightly surprised to see the GUI inventory of Minecraft.


    Hah! My yoga sessions have not been for naught.


    Though the inventory is slightly different from what I can remember.


    For starters, there is no hot bar. Instead, there is 9x4 storage slots rather than 9x3. Well. This is probably still the same considering that hot bar in the game is still a can be used as storage. There is also no image of my avatar. Rather in its place are the armor slots. Head, chest, legs, and feet. There are also two additional slots. The elytra and I believe a gauntlet. That quite handy to be able to equip both the chest armor and elytra. The gauntlet is useful too. I always ask why in the game all the parts of the body are protected except for the arms. Besides the armor slots, there are 3x3 slots with an arrow pointing right to a slot. There is a word crafting above it. Now, that is super useful. In the game, there is only 2x2 crafting slot and you have to craft a crafting table. Below the crafting slots are two slots with left- and right-hand images. In the game, there is only one and it''s called off hand while the hot bar is what your dominant hand is holding. It does make sense to have two considering there is no hot bar. And most importantly. There is no crafting recipe book. Now that is a problem. Before the game added the crafting recipe book. I always forget the recipe for some items and have to open the Minecraft wiki.


    It is really strange that the GUI of inventory is floating in front of me.


    I tried touching it but my hand went through like it''s not even there.


    How do I interact with this?


    Let''s try to gather some wood first since my inventory is empty.


    I stood up and face the tree I was leaning on.


    In order to gather the wood of this tree, it is to punch it till it breaks.


    Now I think about it. Will it hurt if I do this by hand?


    There is only one way to find out.


    I curl my imaginary fingers into a fist.


    PUNCH!


    Ouch! It really hurts. But I really need wood otherwise I won''t be able to craft tools or items.


    Suck it up. You need wood and build a home before night comes. I keep telling myself this as I keep punching the tree using my two hands. I use both hands to speed things up.


    I really need to build a home before nightfall. Nighttime in Minecraft is the most dangerous time of the day especially if you just started the game. Monsters will start spawning at night. They also spawn in caves or dark areas. Fortunately, there is no cave nearby.


    Come on wood. Break already.


    As the wood break. Something unexpected happened.


    The top of the tree suddenly started falling towards me and I''m about to get crushed.


    I immediately jump sideways to evade the falling tree.


    This is weird.


    In the game, only certain blocks and items are affected by gravity.


    The mechanics of this world is different from the game.


    My heart is beating so fast I have to do breathing exercises to calm myself down.


    Damn. That was close.


    I really don''t want to find out if I have only one life here or I can re-spawn.


    As I am deep in my thoughts, I realize that the wood that I break is missing.


    Where did it go?


    I was walking around the fallen tree looking for the wood.


    When you break or mined things in the game, it usually turns into an item drop. So, where is it?


    Did I punch a tree and have a near death experience for nothing?


    "Inventory"


    I try to open the inventory to check if the wood is there and much to my surprise it is there.


    So, blocks or items you break or mine are immediately stored in the inventory.


    That''s interesting and convenient


    Now how do I turn this into planks? Wait. Got to find some shade first. So hot.


    I quickly run to another tree since the tree that I was on before has fallen down and sat comfortably.


    How do I interact with the inventory?


    Using hands seems impossible.


    I stare at the wood log and imagining it moving to the slot next to it.


    It suddenly disappeared and appeared in the next slot.


    Oh. Okay. It seems I can mentally drag items.


    I try to drag the log to the crafting grid.


    Then after the item disappeared in the storage and appear in the crafting grid, there are 4 planks in the output slot.


    Is the crafting recipe here the same in the game?


    I drag the 4 planks in the storage.


    Hmm. I don''t have enough wood plank to create a wooden ax. I really don''t want to punch another tree again.


    Next, I craft 4 sticks by putting 2 planks separately in vertical then a wooden shovel by putting a plank on top and two sticks below.


    It''s really handy to be able to craft tools without creating a crafting bench first.


    Even though shovel is not a tool for chopping wood at least I''m not going using my bare hands.


    Now, how do I equip the shovel?


    I try putting it in the slot with the hand picture.


    Then suddenly a wooden shovel appears in my right hand.


    I head back to the fallen tree and started striking the trunk with the wooden shovel.


    A moment later.


    I manage to collect 4 oak logs.


    I also break to leaves of the tree and manage to get 2 apples and 3 oak saplings.


    I plant the oak sapling in the place where the tree was.


    Craft all the logs into planks then craft a wooden ax.


    How many logs do I need in order to make a starter house?


    I should probably gather 20 logs.


    Unlike in the game. It is easy to harvest and mined things but here harvesting one tree is already tiresome specially if you are using wooden tools.


    I really want to craft a stone ax but I can''t see any stone nearby and I don''t time to find one. The sun is already on top of my head which means it is already noon.


    I started my wood gathering session.


    I got hungry in the middle of it and try to eat the apple.


    Even though the apple in my hand is flat looking. When I put it in my mouth, it feels like I''m eating a real apple. It feels really strange. And it tastes like a real apple too.


    I crafted a bowl to use as a cup to drink water from the pond. I tried using my hands but remembered that I don''t have fingers to scoop up the water.


    After 5 fallen trees later.


    I managed to collect 20 logs, 11 oak saplings, and 5 apples.


    I replanted the 5 oak saplings so I can have more wood in the future. Though I don''t know how long do the trees grow here.


    I look for a suitable place to build a house.


    My plan is to have 5 blocks wide 4 blocks high house so I can have 3 blocks wide and 3 blocks high space inside it.


    I found a flat area and started digging the dirt in 5 blocks wide area on each side and 1 block deep.


    I turn all my logs into oak planks and started to place down the floor of my home in the area I just dug out. Then I place walls 4 blocks high around the edges of the floor. Then I cover the top. I craft an oak door and place it in one of the walls to make it the front of the house.


    There. The house is finished.


    As I stare at it. It is so flat and ugly but it''s a starter house so it works.


    I don''t want to sleep on a floor but I don''t see any sheep nearby to gather wool to make a bed. I also don''t have iron to craft shears either.


    Now I think about it. I don''t see any animals at all.


    Do animals exist here?


    The sun is almost down. I head inside the house. I don''t have any light source so it so dark inside.


    I started to think that monsters might start spawning inside but my paranoia is quickly defeated by my fatigue.


    I''m really tired of all the work I have done. Even placing blocks is tiresome.


    I also eating nothing but apples today. Even though I don''t feel hungry I really want to eat meat.


    I lie down facing the ceiling.


    I ignored all the horrible noises I hear outside and just close my eyes.


    It didn''t take long for me to fall asleep.

 Episode 2: Learning and Adjustment (1)

    "I hope you can save this world"


    A beautiful female voice woke me up.


    I opened my eyes and see an oak plank ceiling.


    Great. I was hoping to wake up in a hospital. It seems like this is not a dream world at all.


    And who is that voice? It''s like I was having a conversation with her but I can''t remember. No matter how hard I think I can''t seem to remember her. All I can remember are those words.


    Save the world? It seems this world is about to get destroyed. As if the problems I am facing right now is not enough.


    Who is she anyway? Is she the one who put me here? How can I talk to her again? I have to find her.


    I got up and started stretching my body.


    Everything hurts. My back hurts for sleeping on the floor all night. My hands hurt for all the work I have done yesterday and my mind hurts for thinking so much.


    I''m not going to be surprised if I have only 1 heart left in my health bar.


    Wait. Now I think about it. In the game, health and hunger bars are always displayed. But I can''t see them anywhere. They''re not in the inventory.


    "Status"


    I tried picturing in my mind the health and hunger bar as I say that.


    Then a GUI appears in front of me. I was going to try saying ''Character Info'' or ''Health Bar'' if it didn''t work. My experience and knowledge as a game programmer are quite handy here.


    It has a Name with a blank beside it. Well, I have a name. I don''t know why it is blank here. Below the Name is the health bar and status. There is no hunger bar. I can understand having no hunger bar since I know if hungry or not but what is this status? It says I''m healthy. Okay. Glad to know that. It''s kind of redundant to view my status I have to access the status. But I was shocked to see my health bar. Even though the 10 hearts are full I was still surprised and scared to see it. I''m pretty sure this is how the health bar looks like in Hardcore Mode in the game. Which means I have only one life here.


    Damn it. I was hoping to have unlimited lives here. The moment all my heart is gone I''m dead. I have to be very careful.


    I crafted oak stairs and place one in the back corner of the house facing the door and immediately sit on it like a chair.


    This is getting ridiculous.


    First, I suddenly got here for no reason.


    Second, this world is about to get destroyed and some girl suddenly asks me to save it. That is probably a dream but it is so lucid and considering all the things that are happening to me I am not taking any chances.


    And lastly, I have only one life.


    In the world where zombies, skeletons wielding a sword and bow, giant spiders, a green creature that is essentially a suicide bomber, slimes, and even a dragon. I have to do this with one life.


    You know what. Screw this. I have to get back to my world.


    I have to find that woman. She''s most likely to have answers to all of my questions. Hell, maybe she''s responsible for all of this. But I don''t know where to start. I don''t even know what she looks like.


    Traveling around should be a start.


    Maybe there are people like me that got stuck here.


    In order to do that, I need supplies. Lots and lots of supplies like food and water. I need clothes too. The clothes that I''m wearing were drenched with sweat yesterday and now it is starting to smell. I have no idea how to make clothes here. I can probably try making it by using wool or leather.


    I need armor, weapons, and tools. I''m not going to travel around without any protection or means to defend myself. I don''t know how monsters work here or are still the same as in the game. I might encounter a new monster. Tools are useful to gather materials easily. I need to be able to build a house during the nighttime.


    Okay. Food, water, clothes, armor, weapons, and tools. I should start working.


    Food and water are really essential right now. I have a pond nearby so water should not be a problem. I just need to find a way to be able to carry it with me. The food, however, is a big problem. I only have 5 apples in my inventory. I ate 2 yesterday. I''m not going to chop every oak tree here to gather apples. It''s time-consuming and I don''t want to eat anything but apples. I should probably try farming. I don''t know where I can find carrots, potatoes or beetroot but I can gather seeds from grass to grow some wheat.


    I stood up in my chair and head to the door.


    Doors crafted here comes with a knob so unless monster here know how to open the door then there is nothing to worry about. Or they could just destroy the door but nothing happened all night while I was sleeping so it is safe to say that this house is quite secure.


    I was grateful that the oak doors here are different. They don''t have the holes on top like in a game that you will be able to see through. Skeleton archer might come by, peak on the door and see me sleeping and shoot an arrow through the holes. I was worried too if closing everything in the house might stop air circulation and suffocate me to death but the air seems to be able to pass through the closed door. Even a little bit of light can get through so it''s not very dark inside the house. I don''t know how science works here but I''m not complaining.


    Monsters can''t be able to see me through the door. The same goes for me. So, I have no clue what is waiting for me outside.


    I crafted a wooden sword and equip it with my right hand. I checked the sword if it can be able to cut things. Even though the sword is made of wood it is very sharp.


    I slowly open the door. It made creaking sounds which increases the tension.


    I step outside and quickly scan the surroundings for hostile mobs. I also check the sides, the back and the roof of the house for any ninja creepers.


    One creeper explosion will surely send me to heaven.


    But I didn''t see any monsters. I don''t know where all the monster went or how do they spawn here but I definitely hear strange noises last night. They probably didn''t see my house because it is surrounded by densely populated oak trees or they are just stupid. Monsters in the game are not quite smart so maybe it is the same here. Whatever the reason, I''m grateful for not fighting any monsters. I don''t know any fighting skills. One zombie is probably enough to kill me.


    The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    I put away the wooden sword and started punching grass in the vicinity of the house to gather seeds. Thankfully, there are a lot of them so gathering seeds is not so hard.


    I manage to gather 9 seeds. This is probably enough to start a small farm.


    I head south towards the pond. I don''t have buckets to bring water around so I have to build the farm there.


    Then I remembered that I stink a lot. When I reached the pond. I get the bowl that I crafted yesterday from my inventory. I scoop up some water and clean myself in a distance. I really want to take off my clothes and dip in the water but I managed to stop myself. I don''t want to dirty the only water supply that I have.


    After cleaning myself, I opened up the inventory. I''m running low on planks but I still able to craft a wooden hoe.


    I tried to strike the dirt to tilt it but nothing is happening. In the game, one strike is enough to tilt the dirt. I strike the dirt again and again until it changes to farmland.


    That took a while. I didn''t know that it takes a lot of effort to tilt one block of dirt. I have new found respect for all the farmers in the world.


    I continued tilting the ground to create enough farmland to plant the seeds.


    After a while, I finished making 9 farmlands in a 3 by 3 position. I created it north of the pond but if I don''t have any buckets in the future, I''ll probably tilt all the dirt around it. I should also build a fence around it to protect the crops from being trampled. I don''t see any mobs or animals nearby but I''m going to build it anyway just in case.


    I planted the seeds one by one and after I finished planting, I started chopping wood for the fence.


    I am planning to build a 10 by 10 fence. I did quick math in my head to the amount of wood that I need.


    After gathering the necessary amount of wood. I crafted 36 oak fences and 1 oak fence gate. I only need 35 oak fences but the crafting recipe for oak fences is 4 planks and 2 sticks per 3. Well, surplus supplies aren''t bad. I am also proud of myself to be able to remember the crafting recipes for fences and fence gates.


    I began placing the fence around the pond. In the middle of placing the fence, I felt the urge to take a dump. I quickly run deep into the forest and grab some flowers in the way. I don''t know how I''m going to this but I dug 2 blocks deep in the ground. I''m really surprised to know that I need to do this sort of thing in this world. I used the flowers I picked up as toilet paper. I really don''t know what else could I have used to clean myself. After I''m done, I placed an oak plank beside the hole and crafted a trapdoor to cover the hole. I placed the trapdoor in the oak plank so I can open it upwards. Thankfully the oak trapdoor here is different than in the game. Same with the oak door, oak trapdoor doesn''t have holes in it so even though the smell can still pass through at least we can''t see it. I started placing oak planks to build an outhouse. I also placed a door in front of it.


    Now I have a temporary restroom. I didn''t know that I have to this kind of stuff here but I''ll probably build a much secure restroom in the future. I don''t want monsters attacking me while I''m doing my business.


    After building the restroom, I went back to the pond work with the fence and manage to finish it.


    Looking at the finished fence on the outside, I began to wonder if mobs can jump over considering it is only 1 block high. I tried jumping over the fence but I can''t seem to get inside. Even though the fence looks like it is 1 block high, it feels like it is a little bit higher than that. Then I tried climbing over the fence and I manage to get through. This is could be a problem. What if mobs here know how to climb fences? Well, there is no point worrying about it now. At least they''re a little bit of protection for the crops.


    There is a lot of time before the sun goes down so I decided to gather more seeds. After a while, I managed to collect 6 more seeds. I should plant this immediately. I don''t know how fast crops grow here so it''s better to have plenty of them. It''s useful to have a bone meal to hasten the growth of the crops but I need bones to be able to craft bone meal and to gather bones I need to fight some skeletons. I don''t want to fight monsters right now especially if they''re able to attack at long-range.


    I tilted 6 more dirt to turn into farmlands and planted the seeds. I have planted a total of 15 seeds so if all of them managed to grow into wheat, I''ll be able to make 5 bread. That is not quite plenty to feed me for a long time but I''m planning on expanding the farm.


    I was contemplating how fast the crops grow here. The saplings that I planted yesterday didn''t grow so it''s probably not the same in the game. Well, I still have plenty of apples in my inventory that I can eat. If ever crops here takes weeks or even months to grow, I could just cut down all the oak trees here to gather apples.


    As the sun''s about to go down, I leave the farm and started walking towards my house.


    I arrived home and sat down to the oak stair to rest before sleeping.


    After sitting for a while, I lie down on the floor and started to think about what I will be doing tomorrow.


    This house has zero protection so I should probably create a fence or wall around it. I have to survey the nearby surroundings too to see if there are useful things that I can use.


    As I''m thinking about the things I''m going to do tomorrow, I have fallen asleep.

 Episode 3: Learning and Adjustment (2)

    On the next day, I did not have dreams. I was hoping to have more information about that girl but no such luck.


    I head outside and was surprised to see the sun was already quite high up in the sky. It is probably 9 or 10.


    I realized that I woke up quite late.


    This is bad news. I can only work when there is daylight. Even though I am anxious to gather supplies quickly and travel to find a way home, I am not desperate enough to attempt working at night.


    I did a quick look in the surroundings to check for hostile mobs. Even though I wasted a lot of daylight by waking up late, it doesn''t mean I should be careless.


    I quickly head to the farm to see the crops.


    On my way there, I come across three chickens.


    I was so surprised to see other living things aside from me.


    I quickly harvest some seeds by breaking grass in the surroundings to lure the chickens to the farm.


    As I am luring the chicken towards the farm, I suddenly thought that it is not a good idea to let animals roam around inside the fence. They might trample or eat the crops. They also might dirty the only water source that I have.


    I quickly chop some trees in the vicinity and build a temporary coop near the farm.


    The coop that I build is 5 by 5 wide so it has 3 by 3 space inside using fences. I also build a roof using half wood slab to protect the chickens from rain and to have shade from the sun. I used half wood slabs to save on wood.


    I also learn that you can place half slabs here vertically unlike in the game. It is really useful. I can build future temporary houses with fewer resources and among other things.


    I tried to feed the chickens with seeds that I gathered but I don''t know how. In the game, you just have to right click on the chickens to feed them. They also breed if two of them are feed at the same time even though that not how chickens work in real life.


    I tried throwing the seeds inside the coop to see what will happen. They started pecking on the seeds. Though I didn''t see any breeding, I am glad to see that they are eating.


    Now I just have to wait for them to lay some eggs and see how to increase their population. Throwing eggs on the ground is also the other way on getting baby chickens in the game but I am not trying it here. I don''t know how did they get the idea of having baby chicks by breaking eggs but that is not how chicken farming works in real life. I will try laying it on the ground to see if it hatches or build some sort of house to have the mommy chicken sit on them.


    I will also try cooking the eggs. Eggs in Minecraft is used just for crafting cakes and pumpkin pies but this is a different world so it is possible to cook them. I just need to find a way to craft some sort of pan or try cooking it in the furnace.


    After feeding the chickens, I went inside the farm to inspect the crops.


    Interestingly enough, the crops grew a little. I compared it to the height of a block. They are about a sixth or seventh of a block. Which means it takes about a week or so to harvest a wheat. I am so glad about this. I thought it will take a month for the wheat to grow here and I just have to live on apples.


    I am also happy to have some chickens. I was starting to worry that I might be the only living creature in this world. So, this means there are also sheep in here. I should probably find some so I can harvest wool and make a bed. I getting sick of sleeping on the cold floor.This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report.


    I exited the farm and start to find a suitable place to build a mine shaft.


    My plan for today is to start mining stones.


    I am so sick of using wooden tools. I already have broken quite a lot of wooden axes for chopping trees. It takes a lot of time to gather wood or tilting the dirt to turn into farmland using wooden tools. It is time to upgrade to stone tools.


    The broken axes are in my inventory. Typically, in the game, all tools or items when they run out of durability they break and vanish into existence. But here, they went back to the inventory. I don''t know what I''m going to do with broken tools but they are made of wood so I might use them for fuel. I also started to think what will happen to iron or diamond tools if they get broken but I don''t have any iron or diamonds so no point in thinking about it right now.


    I am thinking of building a mine shaft away from my home and farm. I don''t want it close to the house in case something goes wrong and I managed to create a landslide. I don''t know how I''m going to start my mine shaft but seeing how trees fall here if you break its trunk means that blocks don''t typically float here. I also don''t want to break the unwritten law in Minecraft.


    And that is ''Never dig straight down''.


    I don''t want to start digging into the ground and fall into lava or dig straight through to a cave and fall in a great height so mine shaft seems to be a great option right now. Building a quarry is also an option but I don''t have the time and strength for it. If only I have good tools then maybe I can do it. I still also don''t fully understand the physics of this world so I have to be very careful.


    I decided to build a mine shaft in the north of my house. It is about 70 to 80 blocks away.


    There is a tall mountain here. It is about 12 blocks high. Perfect to carve a 3 by 3 hole on its side.


    I started digging on the side of the mountain.


    After digging for about 3 blocks deep, I place 2 fences on each side of the tunnel and place oak planks on top of it. It is used to support the top and sides of the tunnel to prevent from caving. I got the idea from the game though support beams in the game are useless since the game has different physics. I plan to place support beams every 5 blocks.


    After digging for like 6 blocks deep of dirt, I finally found some stones.


    I crafted a wooden pickax and started mining one of the stones. It takes a really long time for the stone to break. It is even harder than chopping wood or tilting dirt. It seems that in this world not only farming is difficult but also is mining.


    After mining 3 stones, I have enough materials to make my first stone tool.


    I crafted a stone pickax. I wield it in my right hand and noticed that it is a little bit heavy than the wooden pickax. I have no qualms about it since stone is heavier than wood so it makes sense.


    I started mining using the stone pickax. It still slow to break stones but it is at least better than the wooden pickax.


    After mining for a while, I noticed that it is getting really dark in the tunnel and hard to see anything. I managed to find an iron ore vein but was hoping to stumble some coal to create some torches but there nothing here. I can craft a furnace and burn the wood into charcoal but I''m saving the cobblestones for something. I also come across some gravel. I gathered some of it since it going to be useful in the future. I also want some flint to craft certain items like arrows or flint and steel.


    The iron ore that I found was at least 8 blocks. I was worried that it will be only less than that considering how much effort I put in mining this tunnel. I wasn''t expecting to find iron ore in this mountain but was happy to find some.


    I was getting really tired of all the mining and the sun is about to go down.


    I exited the mine shaft and head back home.


    The distance of the mine shaft and the house is quite a bit far and there are oak trees and hills in the way. I plan to tear down all the trees in the way and flatten the ground to have easier access to the mine shaft.


    When I reached home, I immediately sat on the oak stair that I use as a chair.


    I open my inventory to see how much cobblestone I mined and how much resources I have.


    I still have a dozen of apples. I eat about 5 to 6 apples a day so I have 2 days'' worth of food. I''m getting tired of eating apples but they''re still a week before I can harvest the wheat. There are also three chickens but I still don''t know how to increase their number so I''m not planning to butcher them yet. I didn''t even know if I can kill a living being but I have to do it in order to survive this world. I can also try searching for more animals but I don''t want to walk far from home considering it is easy to get lost in this world. Maybe I will get lucky tomorrow and some animals will wander in my territory like what happen today.


    I have little wood in my inventory since I keep building fences, coop and support beams. It is nice to have a lot of wood stored. I probably start early morning tomorrow chopping trees to stockpile some wood. I can craft stone ax now so gathering woods should be faster and easier.


    I have 8 iron ores, 2 flints and half a stack of cobblestone. I wasn''t expecting to mine some iron ores but I was hoping to gather a lot more stones. I was planning in upgrading my home today. I plan to build a storage area, a bedroom and a living room. Then I remember that I can place half slabs vertically here but I don''t want to cheap on my house. My house is the only thing protecting me from monsters so I have to build it thick and strong.


    I should try smelting the irons ores into iron ingots but I don''t want to place a furnace inside the house considering it is made of wood. Burning the only living place in the night is not a good idea. I also can''t do it outside considering it is already dark so maybe I should do it tomorrow.


    It is great to have 8 iron ingots. I can craft an iron pickax and an iron ax. I don''t know how rare to find ores here so I should probably save it and just use stone tools for now.


    In my inventory, there is also some junk like flowers I picked up the yesterday and broken tools. I should store them elsewhere.


    I crafted two wooden chests using oak planks. I placed the double chest on the other side of the house. It is getting cramped in here but I ignored it since my house will be upgraded tomorrow or probably in the future.


    I tried opening the chest and a GUI suddenly appear in front of me. It has 54 empty storage slots. It has double the storage capacity than my inventory. I transferred all the unnecessary items in the chest.


    After transferring things and checking my inventory, I lie down to sleep. I hope that I will be able to wake up early tomorrow.

 Episode 4: Learning and Adjustment (3)

    Thankfully I woke up early the next day.


    I was worried that I might overslept again. I should build like an alarm clock or something in the future using Redstone. Clock is also handy to have around to know time.


    Mining should be my priority today. I figured that having the best tools can hasten things like gathering wood, stones and ores. Farming should also be relatively easy if you have the best hoe around.


    I went outside and observe the surroundings. This is becoming a habit which is good. I don''t want to be negligent about my safety.


    I crafted a furnace using 8 cobblestones. It doesn''t make sense that you need 8 blocks of cobblestones to create a 1 block of furnace. It''s quite expensive considering how much work I put in mining these stones but this is a necessity.


    I quit my grumbling and place the furnace on the ground. I make sure that is not near any flammable things like my wooden house or trees. I also cleared all the grass on the surroundings for good measure. Now there is nothing to worry about.


    I stare at the furnace and wondered how to interact with it. There is pop-up GUI when you open a chest but how do you that with a furnace.


    There are two holes in the furnace. The top seems to be where you put what do you want to cook or smelt and the bottom where you place the fuel.


    Should I just shove the items in or there is another way to do this?


    Hmm.


    I put my hand on top of the furnace and imagine the furnace GUI in the game.


    The moment my hand touches the furnace a pop-up appears right in front of me. Similar to what happens when you open up a chest.


    There are slots that labeled input below it there is fuel and arrow pointing to the right which labeled output. It is similar to the game.


    I opened my inventory and tried placing the 8 iron ores in the input slot and a couple of wood in the fuel slot.


    After putting the items, I step back from the furnace and waited for a moment.


    Nothing happened. I was worried about this. In the game, you just need to put fuel and the things you want to cook or smelt in the furnace and it will automatically be lit up. Seems here you need to start a fire in order for the furnace to work.


    This is fantastic. So much realism.


    How am I going to start a fire? Flint and steel are the best options right now since I have iron but I need to smelt the iron ore first. Quite a conundrum that you need fire in order to create an item that can produce fire.


    I opened up the inventory to see what I can use to start a fire. All I got is wood, stones and tools. Should I craft sticks and start rubbing them together? I remember doing it during my boy''s scout camping.


    I crafted some sticks. I also went back to the house to grab some flowers in the chest to see if I can use it as tinder.


    I sat down in front of the furnace under the heat of the sun and start rubbing the sticks. Never knew that I''ll be doing this kind of thing in this world. Well considering that I can poop here so by this point anything is possible.


    Sweat and tears are already flowing in my face because it takes a really long time to light up the tinder and the sun is killing me. I was about to give up when I see smoke in the tinder. I picked up the tinder and started blowing in it. After a while, fire can already be seen and I immediately threw it inside the furnace.This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it.


    The furnace gradually lights up after a while and I quickly stood up to open up the GUI of the furnace. I don''t want to touch a hot furnace but I need to know what is happening. Maybe I can try mentally open the GUI of the furnace but nothing happened. So, I reluctantly touch the top of the furnace. Amazingly, it is not hot. Though it produces a lot of heat, the surface of the furnace is not hot.


    I can see the iron ore being smelt. It is not as quick as I thought it would be. It is really slow and would probably take hours before it can smelt one iron ingot.


    I chuck more wood in the fuel. I am probably going to create some charcoal since I don''t have any coal. Coal and charcoal are better fuel in the game so maybe I can try using it as fuel here. All my wood is already in the furnace so I''m probably have to chop trees to gather more wood but before that I have to check on the crops and the chickens.


    I head to the farm and surprise to see 2 sheep walking around the fence. They seem to be looking for a way to get inside. They probably want to eat the crops. It great that the fence I build is not useless.


    I need to quickly build a barn for the sheep. All of my wood is already in the furnace so I have to chop down some trees.


    While I was chopping down trees, I was constantly watching the sheep in case they wander off. I don''t want to lose them. I''m tired of sleeping on the cold floor. I really need to make a bed. I can also try make some clothes using the wool.


    It is a little bit easier to gather some wood using a stone ax. I manage to gather quickly enough wood to build the barn.


    I immediately build the bar. The barn that I made have similar design to the chicken coop but only larger. There''s two of them so I made it a little bit bigger.


    Now, how do I lure the sheep inside the barn?


    I don''t have any wheat on me and their attention seems to be focused on getting inside the farm.


    I slowly approach them. I don''t want to scare them off.


    Their attention seems to be focused on the crops so it is easy to get close to them.


    I gently touch one of the two sheep. It doesn''t seem to mind.


    I gradually push the sheep towards the barn. It takes a long time but I assure myself that it worth it. I was worried that it might run off or attack me but I manage to get sheep inside the barn.


    After putting the 2 sheep inside, I exited the barn and closed the gate.


    I have no wheat to feed the sheep. The wheat farm is still days away from being harvest. I don''t want them to starve. I should craft a shear and cut some grass. Shear can also be used to gather some wool. Luckily, I have iron that is currently being smelt right now.


    It is great that I finally have a wool supply. It been days since I properly clean myself. The clothes that I was wearing is already really filthy. I can''t wash it since it is the only clothing I have. It is nice to finally have wool. I can also try making some new clothes. They probably have a crafting recipe for clothes here.


    After tending the sheep, I head to the chicken coop to check on the chickens.


    The three chickens seem to be alive and healthy.


    There are also 2 eggs on the ground.


    I went inside and picked up the eggs. I should save it for now in my inventory.


    I threw some seeds to the ground to feed them.


    One of them didn''t lay an egg. There is two possible reason for this. Either they don''t lay an egg every day or one of them is a rooster.


    I have no clue on how to determined their gender if one of them is really a rooster but one of them looks different from the others so it is probably that one. I should probably observe them for a while to see how many eggs they can lay. If one of them is really a rooster then that guy will absolutely be butchered and cooked. It is a waste of seeds to feed an adult chicken that don''t provide eggs and I really want to eat meat. It been a long time that I''ve eaten meat.


    After tending the farm and the animals, I went back to the place where I placed the furnace. I check to see how many irons have been smelted.


    Even after a while, only three iron ingots have been smelted. It really takes a long time to convert ores to ingots here. I estimated that about one ingot is smelted per hour. I spend around three hours building the sheep barn and tending the animals and crops. It also takes 2 woods to smelt an ore.


    There is about half a dozen wood in the fuel of the furnace. I chuck 4 more wood to have enough fuel to smelt the remaining iron ores.


    I crafted a flint and steel and one shear from 3 iron ingots.


    I should have crafted first an iron pickax but I really don''t want to boy scout my way into the furnace again. I also want to gather some wool. There are still 5 iron ingots left so I''ll probably craft an iron pickax after they are done being smelt.


    I head back to the farm to gather some wool.


    I know my plan for today is to mine some stone to upgrade my house but I really wanted a bed and some change of clothes.


    It seems that shearing is also a chore in this world. In the game, you just have to click on the sheep then boom it is done. Here you really have to work on shearing the sheep. It took me a while since I have no experience in shearing a sheep but I manage to collect 4 wool.


    I immediately used 3 wool to craft a bed.


    I head back home to try the bed. I placed it in the middle of the house since it is the only space that I can place it on. My house is already cramped with having a chest and chair on the sides.


    The bed that I crafted has a cover which is great. It means I no longer have to endure cold nights. I can finally sleep comfortably.


    I lift up the cover and lay down on the bed.


    It is really comfortable. I didn''t expect to find sheep today but I''m so glad to find a pair of them. I going to feed them lots of wheat in the future for giving me this much comfort.


    *****


    Okay. I didn''t expect to sleep in during the day.


    Damn. I wasted daylight. I planned to mine stones for the rest of the day but somehow, I didn''t regret sleeping.


    I deserve to have a little bit of rest from all the mining and farming I did for the last few days.


    There still a little bit of time before the sun goes down.


    I head outside and check on the furnace to see if the all the ores have been smelted.


    All of the ores have been smelted which means I slept for about 5 hours or probably more.


    I decided to chop some trees since it is already late to go mining.


    I need to gather some wood to make charcoal to be able to create torches. Torches will be useful in mining tomorrow.


    After gathering about a dozen of wood, I placed half of the wood in the fuel of the furnace and the other half in the input then ignite the furnace using flint and steel. I should have half a dozen charcoal tomorrow.


    I build a little house using stone slabs for the furnace. I don''t know if it going to rain tonight but it is better to be prepared. I also want the furnace to keep working.


    As the sun about to go down, I head back home to sleep. This is the first night since I got here that I managed to sleep comfortably.

 Episode 5: Learning and Adjustment (4)

    I woke up with a huge smile on my face.


    This is the very first time since I got here that I got a good night sleep.


    I head outside to see how much charcoal the furnace made. It takes 2 pieces of wood to smelt one ore but I don''t know if it''s same with burning wood into charcoal.


    I put my hand into the furnace to see how many charcoals are there.


    There are 6 charcoals.


    It seems that all the wood I placed in the furnace turn into charcoal.


    There is also no fuel left so it''s probably safe to assume that it takes 1 wood to convert a single charcoal. There is also a possibility that the furnace keeps using up the fuel even though there is nothing left to smelt, cook or burn. I should try and light up the furnace with nothing to smelt to see if it uses fuel.


    I put the broken axes in the fuel of the furnace and take out my flint and steel to light it up. I don''t have a single wood in me so I tried using broken tools. This way I can also find out if broken wooden tools can be used as a fuel.


    After striking the flint and steel together in the furnace, it suddenly lights up even though I didn''t put anything to smelt or cook.


    I don''t know if this is good or not to be able to use the furnace like this.


    I can''t just put loads of fuel in the furnace if I''m only going to smelt a small number of ores. I have to do some calculations to see how much fuel is needed for the item to smelt or cook.


    But it has some perks too.


    I can use the furnace for source of heat during cold days or nights. I don''t know if biomes exist in this world or it''s just one huge oak forest but if it did exist, it will be useful in the winter regions. There is also a possibility that this world might have 4 seasons.


    I crafted 16 torches using 4 charcoal and 4 sticks. Thankfully I still have left over planks in my inventory to turn into sticks.


    This is probably enough to light up the mine shaft. I should place torches in support beam of the tunnel like in the game. I save up the other 2 charcoals just in case I find more ores during mining and needed to smelt them.


    I left the furnace house and head to the farm to check on the crops and the animals.


    The wheat crops are already one block tall but they still green in color so it probably needs a couple more days to be able to farm them.


    Luckily, the chickens still lay eggs today. I managed to collect 2 eggs. It seems one of them is really a rooster. That guy will definitely be cooked today. Maybe after mining in the mine shaft, I could cook the chicken for supper.


    I now have a total of 4 eggs in my inventory. I could try and cook these eggs in the furnace but I should first think of a way to increase the population of chickens so I should just save it for now.


    I should also start remodeling the chicken coop. Make it bigger so it can accommodate more chickens but mining is my priority today so maybe I can do it tomorrow.


    The sheep however, didn''t grow their wool. It seems it takes a while for their wool to grow back. In the game, they only need to eat one grass to grow back their wool in an instant. I hope it doesn''t take weeks or months for them to grow back their wool.


    Well, at least they are healthy and seems to be eating the grass I put yesterday.


    I should also think of a way to increase the sheep''s population.


    I know having lots of animals in the future will be troublesome to take care of them but I really need another source of food and other materials.


    After tending the animals, I head towards the mine shaft but realize that I don''t have any wood to use as a support beam for the tunnel.


    I quickly chop down some trees to gather enough wood to use for the mine shaft.


    It is getting really spacious around here for constantly chopping trees every day. All the oak saplings that I replant didn''t grow into a tree yet. It will probably take months for them to grow or even a year.This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.


    After gathering enough wood, I crafted all of them into planks and also crafted some fences.


    I head to the mine shaft to finally do some mining.


    My plan is to gather as much stone as possible and also try to find some iron or coal.


    I want to upgrade my house. My home is so cramped inside. I also need to build it entirely out of stones. I don''t want my house get burned down after getting hit by a lightning strike. I don''t know how lucky I am if that really happen but considering I managed to get here to this world without any reason whatsoever so anything is possible. Better be prepared for anything.


    I don''t know how big I''m going to build my house. I just have to work with the materials that I got.


    I remember the days when I was playing Minecraft with the next-door kid.


    He enjoyed building stuff but was too lazy to gather the materials for it. I suggested that we play in Creative mode but he just said ''Where is the fun in that?'' so I ended up as a gatherer for him.


    But I''m the only one here so I just have to gather the materials and build stuff by myself.


    When I get to the entrance of the mine shaft, I take out one of the torches in my inventory.


    I''m not even surprised that it doesn''t automatically lit up after placing it.


    I placed the torch on the ground and lit it up using flint and steel.


    After lighting up the torch, I grab it and head inside the mine shaft.


    I assume that torches in this world is not a permanent light source and will probably be burnt out after a while. I need to find a better light source.


    I could try building a portal in the future and head to the nether world to gather some glowstone or kill a blaze to get a blaze rod and head into the End dimension to harvest chorus fruits to craft some end rods.


    However, I don''t have any obsidian to build a portal. I don''t even have a diamond pickax to gather the obsidian or a lava source I can pour water to turn into obsidian. I also don''t know if End portals exist here so I just have to make do with torches for now. I know there are other things I can use as a light source but glowstones and end rods are relatively simple to gather or craft in the game. Though I don''t know if it is similar here in this world.


    I went past the entrance of the mine shaft and suddenly stop.


    I can hear something moving inside the tunnel.


    I lift up the torch to light up what in front of me and was surprised to see someone.


    I didn''t have time to see who or what it was because it started to swing something at me.


    I managed to block the attack using the torch but I still got hit in the left shoulder.


    "Aah!" I screamed loudly.


    I don''t know how I still got hurt even after blocking the attack but I can clearly see now my assailant.


    It''s a zombie with a stone hoe.


    That''s why I still got hit even though I blocked the attack. I only blocked the handle of the hoe but the curve stone on top managed to hit me.


    The zombie''s hoe buries deep in my left shoulder. It really hurts and I''m starting to bleed.


    I kicked the zombie in the mid-region out of reflex and managed to fall him to the ground. I screamed loudly once again when the hoe was ripped out in my shoulder.


    I drop the torch I was holding and immediately equip a stone sword.


    I can only use my right hand since my left hand is hurt.


    The zombie is trying to get back on his feet.


    I thrust my sword forward with everything I got right before the zombie got up.


    The zombie didn''t have time to block or dodge or its just didn''t care.


    My sword went through zombie''s chest and it stops moving.


    I push the zombie forward and let go of my sword that still stuck in the zombie''s chest. It went down flat on the ground.


    My knees suddenly gave up and I fall down on my butt.


    Blood is dripping in my left shoulder but I didn''t care.


    I am still shocked and was still processing what happened.


    After a while, I stood up and picked up the torch that I drop and slowly approach the body.


    I don''t know if it still alive but it stopped moving so it''s probably dead.


    I moved the torch over the body to have a clear look.


    It looks like a normal person like me but the color of its skin is green. It is wearing a brown shirt and a brown pants. It also has shoes on. The eyes are still wide open and its color is black. It is definitely a zombie.


    The stone hoe is still in its hand.


    I kicked away the stone hoe it''s holding just in case it starts moving again.


    When you kill a hostile mob in the game, it will disappear and drop an item. I don''t know why it is still here but it is definitely dead. It has a stone sword stuck in its chest.


    I remembered that I''m bleeding hard and have to take care of the wound.


    I opened my inventory to see what I can use to cover up the wound.


    There is only wood, charcoal, stones and tools in here. I also got single wool.


    I tried putting the wool in the crafting grid to see if I can craft something with a single wool. There are 2 carpets in the output slot. It seems that I can craft carpets here with using only one wool.


    I turn the wool into carpets and grab one in my inventory. It is really big so I rip it into two to use as a bandage.


    I remembered my first-aid training in my company I was working on. I carefully covered the wound with the makeshift bandage to stop the bleeding.


    After taking care of my wound, I opened my status to see how many hearts I still have left in my health bar.


    I still have 6 hearts left so I received 4 hearts of damage. The zombie probably dealt only two or three hearts of damage and my health only went down to 6 because I didn''t take care of my wound early.


    I tried eating some apples to see if it will increase my health but nothing happened.


    There is also something else besides my Name.


    1 (1 up) 25%


    This is probably my level since I killed a hostile mob and gained experience points. I didn''t see any glowing orbs though after killing the zombie. It seems that you automatically gained experience here. The percentage is probably my progress towards next level. It looks like you gain a lot more experience killing a zombie than in the game.


    There also something different with the status. It usually says healthy but now it says ''Damage: Left shoulder''. Great. Thanks, status, for letting me know I got hurt on my left shoulder as if it is not already obvious.


    I closed the status and stared at the zombie.


    I know in the future that I might have to fight some monsters but I didn''t expect it to be today.


    God dammit. I didn''t expect my day to go like this.

 Episode 6: Learning and Adjustment (5)

    After tending my wound on my left shoulder that I managed to get from a zombie attack, I quickly light up the entire tunnel using torches. I don''t want any more monsters popping around here.


    I should go back home and lie down to recover my health but I was curious about the zombie.


    How did it get here? Did it just pop up out of nowhere like in the game? That doesn''t make sense considering my home has no light on the inside, it should be filled up with monsters when I''m away but I didn''t see any since the day I built my house.


    The body also didn''t disappear. It is quite hard to imagine that when every time a monster spawn like in the game and you managed to slay it, the bodies will just keep piling up on the ground. This zombie must come from somewhere.


    I''m lucky that my first fight with a monster is a zombie. Zombies are kind of slow and dumb. It will be a disaster if my first monster encounter is a skeleton archer or a creeper.


    I picked up the stone hoe that I kicked away from the zombie''s hand. I only have a wooden hoe so it is really useful to have. It is glowing a little bit. It is probably enchanted. I put it in my inventory and see what enchantments it has. It has a Unbreaking I and Efficiency I enchantments. It quite weird to see a stone an enchanted stone tool but it is really nice to have one.


    I also tried putting the other half of the carpet that I didn''t use for a bandage in my inventory to see if I can store other things aside from blocks and items that is already in the game. Surprisingly, it did store. It doesn''t have a name though when you look at it in the inventory but at least I know I can store other things in my inventory.


    I approach the zombie that still lay in the ground.


    I tried pulling the stone sword in its chest with only my right hand since my left hand is injured.


    It made a very horrible sound when I pulled it out and blood started to flow out on the zombie. Great. Now we have a puddle of blood on the ground. The tunnel is also starting to smell like a morgue because of the odor reeking from the zombie blood.


    Blood can also be seen in the stone sword. I pulled out the cut carpet in my inventory to thoroughly clean the stone sword. I don''t want to put a bloodied weapon in my inventory where I store my food. I also cleaned the stone hoe since it has a little blood in it that I didn''t notice when I picked it up.


    After cleaning the sword and hoe, I put it away in my inventory. I also went ahead and organize my inventory so that food will be safely stored away at a distance of my weapons and tools. I don''t know what I''m going to do with bloodied rag that I''m holding so I just put it back in my inventory. I know this is pretty stupid but I don''t want to throw away items that might be useful in the future and I only have apples in my inventory so I''m not too worried about contaminating it. It also might be that every slot in my inventory is stored separately in whatever dimension that it is put in and cannot affect each.


    I leaned on the dead body to check if there are things, I can find useful. I endured the blood and the smell and started to search the body but I didn''t find any. The zombie is wearing clothes but I am not going to strip a dead body so that I can have spare clothes.


    I wondered if zombies have an inventory. They were once human beings after all before they turn into one.


    I tried putting my hand on top of the head of the zombie and imagine its inventory like what I did to make the GUI of the furnace appear.


    An inventory suddenly appeared on top of the zombie. It is very similar to my inventory but instead of having a crafting grid on top beside the armor slots, it is displaying the status.


    Apparently, this guy has a name. The status says his name is Rolf. His status also says that his dead. Well, he is already a zombie so how much dead can he be.


    The inventory is half-filled with items and blocks. I was surprised to see other things that stored here that didn''t exist in the game.


    I quickly transferred all the items and blocks in my inventory. I was going to immediately examine the items that I got because I''m really curious about them but I can no longer stand the smell of the dead zombie.


    I should get rid of the dead body and clean the tunnel. I don''t want my mine shaft to be plagued with diseases.You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    I picked the arms of the zombie and began to drag the body outside the mine shaft. It is really heavy and hard to do since my left hand is injured.


    I suddenly remembered that zombies are undead creatures and, in the game, all undead creatures set on fire when they come in contact with sunlight.


    As I reach the exit of the tunnel, the zombie suddenly caught fire when the sunlight touches its skin and began to disintegrate. I quickly let go of the zombie''s arms and distance myself.


    I watch as the zombie is starting to disappear.


    I don''t know if this guy was a normal person that suddenly got here same as me or he was a resident of this world but I''m sorry this happen to him. I pray that the same thing will not happen to me.


    I went back inside the tunnel and clean the blood on the ground using the remaining carpet that I have.


    I removed all the torches in the mine shaft and put them back in my inventory. I can''t mine today since I''m heavily injured so I need to save up the torches.


    I blocked the entrance of the mine shaft just in case there''s another monster spawn inside but I was thinking that the zombie might not be originated from here and just went inside the tunnel to avoid the sunlight. It was probably wandering around the forest at night and just happen to find the mine shaft.


    The journey back home is really difficult. It is a little bit far and I''m still at 6 hearts of health. I was starting to regret building the mine shaft 70-80 blocks of distance from home but I''m glad that I did. I don''t want the first thing that I see in the morning when I get out of the house is a tunnel full of monsters.


    I immediately lie down on the bed when I got home.


    I no longer have the strength to do anything. My plan to mine stones today was sabotage by a zombie.


    I don''t even know if I can recover my health but I quickly dismiss that thought since I don''t want to die.


    Recovery potions should be useful right now but I don''t have a brewing stand or any brewing materials.


    I open my inventory to see if they are medicines or anything, I can use in the items I picked up from the zombie.


    Unfortunately, there is none but there is apparently a bottle of water so I take it out and drink it since I''m a little bit thirsty.


    Most of the items I picked up are related to farming. Rolf was probably a farmer. Which makes sense since he was carrying a stone hoe. He likely died while holding it. There are plenty of seeds, potatoes and carrots too. He was probably farming at that time. There is also an item called fertilizer. I don''t see any bone meal so it is likely categorized as fertilizer here or it has a different use. Bone meal is quite magical in the game since it can able to grow crops instantly.


    There is also a lantern. I take it out. It appears to be candle inside of it. I light it up using flint and steel. I got up and attach it on the middle of the ceiling.


    Finally, there is a light inside the house.


    I don''t know how long will the lantern last but I have half a stack of candles in my inventory so I don''t have to worry for a while.


    There are two sets of clothes in the inventory which I quickly change to since my clothes are soaked in blood and sweat. Luckily, they fit.


    There are also cooking utensils and a stove.


    Cooking utensils comprise of a pan, pot and a ladle.


    The stove looks similar to the furnace but the holes are on top and on one side. The hole on the side is probably where you put the fuel and the top is where to put the pot or pan. I could try cooking the eggs using the pan with this stove.


    I wonder how to craft this stove. I tried placing cobblestones in the crafting grid.


    I tried many patterns until I got it right. You have to place the cobblestones like an upside down leggings. It is great that there are other crafting recipes here. I should try to experiment with the crafting.


    Well, now I have a way to cook food but the items I''m really curious about are these books and a satchel.


    I sat up in the bed and since there is no headboard, I just put my back on the wall.


    I take out the satchel to see what is inside. There are letters here. It is written in a language I do not know but surprisingly I can manage to read it. I don''t know what is happening here but I read all of them one by one.


    Apparently, Rolf has a family and was exchanging letter with them. He was sent to a farm to help because of the food shortage of the city. While his wife named Maria is a librarian. They have one daughter and the way they talk about her in the letters it seems that she is very young in age. Her name is Thea.


    Rolf''s wife and daughter were left in the city. His wife helps with the enchantments of the weapons and armors of the kingdom''s soldiers. She also helps with the enchanting of tools for farming, mining, and fishing. She personally enchants a stone hoe to send for his husband.


    The shortage of food started when the Kingdom of Xaerin started invading the Astikuviel Kingdom that Rolf and his family was living on. The Astikuviel Kingdom managed to repel the invaders but most of the farming villages were burned down so there in a process of rebuilding it. There are also monster hordes attacking in the east from the Forest of Monsters.


    There is a lot of information I learned from these letters. I''m also surprised that even though it is written in another language, I can read it.


    From what I could gather. The Astikuviel Kingdom is located west of the Forest of Monsters and the Xaerin Kingdom is located west of Astikuviel Kingdom.


    I don''t know where is this Forest of Monster so I have no idea where are these kingdoms are but they are probably close since I found Rolf here.


    I''m really surprised for the information I learned.


    There are apparently other people living in this world. There even have kingdoms. Well, it is not great that they are trying to kill each other but at least I know there are other living human beings aside from me here. Though I don''t know if the Astikuviel Kingdom is still around since it is being attacked on both sides by humans and monsters but still it is good to know that I''m not alone in this world.


    The pain in my shoulder was suddenly gone and I was filled up with hope.

 Episode 7: Improvements (1)

    Three weeks have passed since I got injured by a zombie.


    I was bedridden for one week and only go out of the house to use the restroom. I also got a fever for a couple of days but I managed to recover and survived.


    The wound left a huge scar but I didn''t care about my appearance since I already look like a walking popsicle with my cuboid body.


    I got quite a lot of food in my inventory so I managed to stay in bed until I fully recovered.


    All of my hearts are now full.


    For two weeks after I recovered, I did a lot of improvements in my territory. I was excited to travel and find other people but I don''t know how long the journey is what direction I''m going so I decided to thoroughly prepare.


    I greatly expanded my farm. It is 3 times bigger than it was before. It was easier to tilt the dirt now that I have an enchanted stone hoe. I also reshape the pond so that it can hydrate the farm lands more efficiently.


    My first harvest yielded 15 pieces of wheat and 40 seeds which is fantastic. I didn''t consume the wheat though but I turned them all into hay bales and feed them to the sheep and cows.


    The water level of the pond though became a problem after a few days since I planted the new crops. It is starting to get low but luckily it started raining for a couple of days so if filled up again. Probably because there are a lot of crops now to hydrate that it needed a lot more water. I need to find another water source or else the crops are going to die and I''m going to die by dehydration.


    The animal farms are also upgraded. I keep finding new animals every day like chickens, sheep, cows and I even found some pigs.


    The chicken coop is a lot larger now to accommodate more chickens. I found out that you need to build some sort of hen house for the chicken to tend their eggs for it to hatch. It takes one week for the eggs to hatch into chicks. I have around 20 chickens now. Feeding them is hard since almost all the grass in vicinity is gone but I gained a lot of seeds since the first harvest so I can still feed them for a little while.


    Some of the eggs that I gathered in the coop are stored in the inventory and are used for consumption. Thankfully, inventory keep the state of the item when you stored it so no food will expire if all of them are kept there. I tried this with storing pot full of hot water in the inventory and see if it cooled down but even after a few days it is still hot. The outside storage though like chest doesn''t have the same property like the inventory when you put something in there. So, I put all of my food in my inventory. I don''t know the properties of the ender chests and shulker boxes since I don''t have them but I have hope they have the same cheat like my inventory.


    The barn was also greatly enlarged. The space inside the barn was equally divided into four for the sheep, cows, pigs and the other one is reserved in case I find other animals.


    There 6 sheep and 2 of them are pregnant. I don''t know how long to wait for them to give birth but at least I''m can shear them once a week so I got about 12 wools per week.


    Most of my wools in my inventory is already crafted into clothes. I learned the crafting recipe of clothes are similar with crafting an armor. I now have plenty of clothes to change into. I also dyed some of them using flower dyes to have a variety. I don''t want them to be all white. My original clothes were also washed and repair.


    There are five cows on the other quarter of the barn and only one of them is pregnant. To tell you honestly, I''m having trouble determining the gender of the animals at first but now I''m getting the hang of it. I can gather a bottle of milk per female cow every day. Sadly, I don''t have any more containers I can put the milk on and I don''t see any sand to smelt into glass to craft into bottles. I also don''t want to craft lots of buckets because I don''t have a lot of iron and I been saving them for a set of armor.


    The pigs on the other side only have 3. I didn''t see plenty of them for the last couples of weeks and there are really troublesome to handle. Unlike sheep and cows when you approach them, they are cautious but they don''t immediately attack you but pigs on the other hand will brutally tackle you the moment you make eye contact on them. Thankfully, I have carrots on me that time when I found them and managed to calm them down and lure them into the barn.You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    Pigs in this world really love carrots and they consume a lot of carrots and I mean A LOT. They keep making noises when they still hungry and I keep feeding them to keep them quiet. I was planning on butchering all of them since there not really worth it since they consume quite a bit of carrot but I decided to keep them. They might be useful in the future.


    All of the animals are well fed and healthy except for the roosters. I cooked every rooster I can find. I was quite nervous when I butchered the first rooster. They don''t just magically skin themselves and ready to cook when you kill them. You have to do it manually. One chicken can give you lots of meat and feathers.


    I also have done lots and lots of mining and improvements in the mine shaft.


    The mine shaft has now a door in the entrance. This is to make sure that no monsters will get inside like what happened last time. There still a problem of lighting up the tunnel but at least it''s safe from being a monster house. I still have candles to use for the lantern so I still can see while I''m mining. I don''t often use torches because they really wasteful. It only takes 2 hours for a torch to burnt out. I don''t want my wood supply to be waste on torches.


    Candles seems to be the most useful source of light here in this world though I don''t know how to craft one. I still have all the melted wax from all the used candles but I don''t know how repurpose this. Maybe I need some strings to be able to craft candles but the only way I know to gather strings is by hunting spiders. I still have nightmares about the zombie incident so monster hunting right now is not yet an option.


    All of my tools are now made of iron. For two weeks of slowly digging down in the mine shaft, I finally have enough iron to craft all the iron tools. I still don''t have enough to craft an entire armor but I''m getting there. I have to be ready the next time I encounter another monster.


    I don''t have any way to know how deep am I in the ground so I just labeled the walls with signs. Every time I go down a block, I just put a sign saying B-1 then the number increases every block I went down. I''m in B-30 right now. I still don''t see any diamonds or any ores except iron. It is nice to be have diamonds at this time but in the game, diamonds are usually found below B-60 so it is probably the same here. I found lots of coal though. I use some of them for torches but I save most of them for fuel.


    Coal and charcoal are really efficient fuel. It only takes one piece of coal or charcoal to smelt a single ore. They also burn hotter than other fuel you use in the furnace. You can smelt 2 iron ingots an hour if you use coal or charcoal as fuel. They are the most efficient fuel so far that I used.


    And lastly, the improvement of my house or shall I say castle.


    I mined quite a lot of cobblestones and I have no idea what I''m going to do with all of them so I decided to smelt them into stone to craft them into stone bricks to build a castle. Stone bricks are a lot harder and stronger than regular stones or cobblestones. I knew this when I tried mining stone bricks with a pickaxe to compare them with stones and cobblestone.


    I have problem of building the castle though. The higher I build the harder it is to keep it stable. I dug a really deep foundation for the castle just to keep it steady. It really easy to build things in the game where physics is not well established but it is really hard here. You have to be really careful placing blocks so you don''t get crushed when it starts to fall down. Maybe I can try using adhesive like slime balls between the blocks to strengthen it but I don''t have any smile balls with me so maybe in the future I can try this when I slay some slimes.


    I know I can just build a small home since I''m going to travel anyway but I have lots of time since I don''t have lots of food and just waiting for the crops to grow. I also don''t have enough materials to craft an entire armor. I learned the hard way that armor is really needed in this world. I know that I can just use my time mining in the mine shaft but I''m getting sick and tired of mining. I needed to do something else.


    The castle design is a little bit square. I want to build complex designs for this castle but I''m having the trouble of building its foundation so I just build it square to keep it simple. I added some decorations on the outside and inside though so it is not ugly to look at. I don''t really care what people think of my build but I just want it to be as beautiful as possible.


    The castle I build is really big and has a lot of space inside of it. The roof is kind of flat. I was worried that water might pass through the roof since it is built with stone bricks but when it rained for two days, none of the water seems to get through. I just need to make sure that water don''t fill up the roof and build a proper rain diverter. The entrance for now is oak doors but in the future, I might try using iron doors for increase protection.


    The castle has three floors. I build a master bedroom on the top floor of the castle. Most of my torch consumptions were spent on this floor since I kind of want to keep it bright. I want also to rest with ease knowing that I can see the surroundings. The second floor is only used for storage for the things I mined and gathered. I don''t have lots of resources to store so I only used a small amount of space in the second floor. The first floor doesn''t have anything in it. Just a large space with stones pillars and giant staircases leading to the second floor and basement. I built the restroom of this castle in the basement so I can store the waste in a really big hole I made in the ground.


    I realized that I overdid building my home but I kind of like it having a really big house to sleep in.


    I spend most of the time mining looking for ores and possibly diamonds.


    Once I have enough materials to craft armor, I''m going to do something crazy. Something I will never think of doing since I got here in this world.

 Episode 8: Improvements (2)

    I have been very busy with mining.


    I spend an entire week solely to mining.


    It is relatively easy now to mine since all my tools are now made of iron. I managed to reach B-60 and luckily found 6 diamond ores. I also found some other ores like redstone and lapis. I even found some gold ores which is nice.


    I made a clock using gold ingots and a piece of redstone dust so I can keep track of time. It is really hard to tell time when you are mining underground. I even got trap inside the mine shaft for one night because I lost track of time and decided to craft another bed and sleep inside.


    I tried on digging even deeper to the ground but since I found some diamonds and other ores on B-60 level, I decided to just keep on mining here. I don''t know how deep this world goes but I think the deeper you go, the more ores you can find. I just need to hit bedrock and stop on that level since I can''t break a bedrock.


    All the resources that I mined in the mine shaft were used in increasing the security of my territory.


    Since I already have a castle keep, I decided to build a wall surrounding it. I even include the farm, the barn and the chicken coop inside the wall.


    The wall is 5 blocks high and 3 blocks thick. It used quite a lot of stone bricks but since I have a ton of them it doesn''t matter. It has two towers on each side of the entrances on the north, east, south, and west and there are also towers on each corner of the wall. There are a total of 12 towers.


    The towers are useful for surveying the surroundings and attacking the enemies if necessary. I also built a roof on it in case there is rain.


    The ramparts of the wall are 2 blocks wide so it is easy to move around. They are also merlons to protect from range attacks and embrasure to be able to fire back.


    I placed oak doors in entrances for now. I can craft some iron doors since I have a lot of iron right now but I have only enough to build armor. My territory is already safe with the castle and the walls and everything. It is time for me to have protection for my body.


    I should also build a moat. I don''t see any water nearby like a lake, river or ocean so maybe in the future when I find a water source, I can just redirect some of it to the moat. It is also useful too since the water supply will be relatively close.


    The castle keep was also once again upgraded. There are battlements on top of it now so in case enemies managed to breach the wall I can just fire arrows at them on top of the castle. The only problem is I don''t have a bow and arrows.


    *******


    I am on the third floor of the castle right now.


    It is still dark outside but the sun is about to go up.


    I crafted a set of iron armor. A helmet, chest plate, leggings, shoes, and a gauntlet. The gauntlet recipe is just putting two 3 iron ingots on a straight line parallel to one another. This cost me a total of 30 iron ingots. This is equivalent of 3 weeks of non-stop mining which is crazy considering in the game, 2 hours of mining will get you a set of diamond gear.


    I equip all of the armor. When I dragged them into the armor slot, they suddenly appeared in my body which is really weird but super convenient. This is useful when the armor run out of durability you can switch to another one in an instant.


    The armor is a little bit heavy but you can still move freely. I crafted a diamond sword since I have 6 diamonds in my inventory and equip it in my right hand. It is better to have the best sword around. I''ve been practicing how to use the sword since the day I recovered from the zombie attack. I don''t want to be caught off guard again.


    I tried crafting a wooden shield but stop. There must a better shield here in this world. I replaced all the wood planks on the crafting recipe of the wooden shield with iron ingots to see if I can craft something else. Surprisingly, I managed to craft an iron shield.


    The iron shield has the same size and image of a wooden shield but the only difference is it is made of iron. So, this means I can craft different types of shield here. I should build a diamond shield if ever I find more diamonds in the mine.


    I tried swinging my sword while fully geared up. It takes time to get used to but I''m starting to get accustomed to it.


    After double checking my inventory to see if I miss something, I head outside the castle keep to see that the sun is already up.Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.


    I''m about to do what is the craziest thing ever and that is monster hunting.


    I need more information on this world and the only way I can think of is by hunting monsters and taking their loot.


    I got quite a lot of information from Rolf the zombie but it is not enough. First, I need to know where I am. There are also other things that this world is capable of compared to the game that I didn''t know. I need to collect as much of information as possible before I head to my journey.


    I started walking south.


    My original plan for monster hunting is by waiting till night comes but I don''t know how many monsters come out at night. I might be overwhelmed by the numbers and die so I decided to find some sort of narrow caves. I know zombies burn in sunlight so they must be hiding in there somewhere. There are also other monsters to watch out for but it should be easy enough to kill them if the passage is tight and make sure they don''t get behind me.


    But if ever I encounter some creepers, I''m just going to run away at full speed. I''m not in a mood on fighting suicide bombers inside a narrow cave but if ever I have a bow, I should be able to kill them.


    Maybe I should find some spiders first. I don''t have any way of attacking a distance so it really must be a priority but I don''t know where to find them. I should just stick to finding some caves and maybe I find some string on the monster loot.


    I was walking in the forest with vigilance.


    This is my first time walking really far away from my home. I need to be ready for anything.


    I placed some sign posts using fences and signs every time I take a turn so I can find my way home. I used a small piece of charcoal to use as a pen. I wrote directions to my home and the rough distances of each turn. This is should be enough to make sure I don''t get lost.


    A map is useful right now but I don''t have the materials to craft one. I also tried crafting a compass but it only points north which would make sense since that how compasses work. In the game, compass points to the place you spawn in so I was hoping to have a convenient thing around but no such luck. At least the compass is useful underground since you can''t see the sun.


    After walking for about 300 blocks, I finally found what I was looking for.


    A cave.


    The entrance is about 4 blocks wide. I hope it is narrow inside for me to fight in otherwise I''m in trouble if they surround me.


    I take out a torch and hold it on my right hand while I tighten my grip on my shield. Lantern should be useful right now but I want to place torches on the cave so I can see more of the surroundings.


    Torches should also be useful for finding my way out. I don''t have the luxury of writing signs while exploring a dark cave so if I place some torches on the right of the cave wall then I can use it as a guide. Though they only last for about 2 hours so I should do this quickly.


    Luckily, they don''t seem to be monsters near the entrance so I slowly enter the cave.


    My heart is beating so fast right now.


    As I go deeper into the cave, I constantly place torches on the right side of the cave. I place quite a lot of them to make sure that it is bright enough to see everything. I hope this mission of mine will be successful and produced a lot of loot otherwise the resources I spent in it will go to waste.


    The caves have lots and lots of branches and every time I hit a dead end I just head back to where I was before and try the other pathway. I didn''t collect back the torches just to leave something behind to indicate it is already explored.


    It is about 10 minutes of walking in a cave and I didn''t see any monster. I continued exploring this cave since there still a lot of places that haven''t been explored.


    Suddenly I hear something.


    I immediately placed torches all around me to brighten up the place.


    I equip the diamond sword and ready myself.


    The sounds of the footsteps are nerve-wracking.


    A moment later, I see a white skeleton that is holding a stone sword and a wooden shield appeared. It also has a leather armor on.


    I didn''t know that white skeletons can use swords here since in the game they only are known for attacking at a distance using a bow and arrows. It seems everything goes in this world.


    I snap out of my thought when the skeleton sees me and started charging.


    I started to swing my diamond sword at the skeleton.


    The skeleton sees my move and raises its shield to block the attack but my sword managed to cut everything and I mean everything. The shield was cut in half along with the skeleton then it fell on the ground.


    I was so astonished to what happened.


    I didn''t know that a diamond sword will be this sharp. How sharp will this sword be once it has enchantments?


    Another monster popped up. It is another skeleton.


    "Aaah!" It suddenly screamed like it was calling for help.


    Then suddenly I can hear lots of footsteps in front of me.


    I readied myself and stood my ground for what''s about to come.


    There are five of them now.


    There are holding the same equipment with the first skeleton I encountered except for the two holding bows.


    Three of them started to charge at me.


    Luckily, the cave is only 4 blocks wide so only two people can fit side by side.


    I swing my sword wide horizontally. The two skeletons on front tried to block my attack but I already know how sharp my sword and both of their heads had been cut off.


    The skeleton on the back push passed the two dead skeletons in the front right before they hit the ground and tried to attack me with a sword.


    I raised my shield to block the attack.


    The sword immediately shattered when it hit the shield. It is probably low on durability.


    I used this opportunity to kill him since he no longer has a weapon and cut off his head.


    Suddenly, the two skeletons holding a bow fired arrows at me and I raised my shield to cover myself.


    None of the arrows seems to be penetrating my shield or armor. They only bounce off when they hit and some of them even break the tip into pieces.


    I charged at one of the skeletons while holding my shield high and bashed him to the ground. I swing my sword at the other skeleton killing him in one sword stroke then stab the one on the ground on its head.


    Multiple footsteps can be heard in the distance and they are all coming here.


    I pulled out the sword out of the skull of the skeleton and prepare myself.


    "Come on here and get some!" I screamed at the darkness in front of me.


    I didn''t expect to be this heated up and it seems that adrenaline is starting to fuel my body.

 Episode 9: Improvements (3)

    I killed about 15 skeletons.


    I started to panic that they might be still quite a lot of them but I just keep swinging my sword to whoever comes to me.


    I am not retreating and leave this cave empty-handed.


    The ground is now littered with skeletons in pieces.


    "Oooh!" I suddenly hear a loud and deep voice.


    A giant skeleton appeared holding a really big stone mace.


    It is about 2 meters tall. He is about to hit his head in the ceiling of the cave.


    How tall is this guy when he was alive? I assumed even skeletons come from dead humans like zombies and they don''t just pop out in the ground.


    Even though he is menacing in look, I don''t feel afraid. My fears and anxieties went down with the last skeleton I killed. There are only me and him now.


    The giant skeleton charged and started to swing his mace.


    There is no room to evade so I just raised my shield to block it.


    The force of the swing was so strong that I managed to fly for about 10 blocks and rolled over the ground.


    It hurts but I only receive 1 heart of damage. Thank god for the armor.


    I quickly got up on my feet and readied my sword.


    I have no idea how to kill this guy but I just charge him head on.


    He started to swing his mace again but this time instead of blocking with the shield, I tried to block it with a swing of the sword. My plan is to lower the durability of his weapon until it gets destroyed.


    The stone mace was suddenly cut into two pieces. I was surprised that I have this kind of strength.


    I thrust my sword to his chest. He tried to block it with the remaining piece of his mace but the sword still went through.


    I pulled back my sword and he suddenly went down. I approach the giant skeleton and stab my sword on his skull. I need to be thorough about this. He might still be alive and attack me from the back when I turn around.


    As a moment passed, there nothing but silence in this cave.


    I look around and see tons of dead skeletons on the ground.


    I pulled my sword out on the head of the skeleton and resumed my exploration. I know I need a little bit of rest but I don''t know if this is the last of them so I need to make sure.


    After exploring the entire cave, I didn''t see any more monsters.


    I went back to the place where I fought all the skeletons.


    Damn. As I stare at the carnage, I realized that I''m the one who did this.


    I didn''t expect to fight these many monsters. I was hoping to fight a couple of monsters but I''m glad that I managed to defeat them all.


    I only received 1 heart of damage so it probably takes only one day for me to recover.


    I''m lucky that there are only skeletons here and there were no zombies. Otherwise, there will be lots and lots of blood all around here. I was lucky too that there were no other types of monsters.


    I should start inspecting my loot though I don''t know if the skeleton inventory can be accessed if there are in pieces.


    I picked up the nearest skull and tried to open his inventory but nothing happens. It seems you can''t access them if there are not whole or skeletons don''t have inventories. I hope it''s the former.


    I began looking for the body of this head but I don''t know which one is it since all of them looks the same so I just put it down and tried accessing the giant skeleton''s inventory since he is still in one piece.


    Luckily, I managed to open the inventory of the giant skeleton. There a lot of useful things here like journals, research documents, and other things. This guy seems to be a researcher of some kind but how did he get big like this. Is he already like this or did he get big for other reasons? I don''t really know the answer so I just empty his inventory and proceed on assembling the other bodies.Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!


    It took a little while of collecting my loot because I have to trial and error which body parts belong to whom. I learned that they don''t need to be whole to access their inventory but you have to make sure that majority of their body is still intact. I wonder if undead monsters burn in the sunlight, where will the items they are holding go?


    The loot was quite a lot and I''m not leaving anything behind no matter how useless it is so I just built a chest outside the cave to store the items and just have to make trips on transferring them to the storage back home. It is really great to have shulker boxes right about now or an ender chest though I wonder how ender chest works here.


    I saw lots of iron ores and coals in the cave so I quickly mined them too. Some of the torches that I placed burnt out so I just used my lantern to see while mining.


    I also picked up all the weapons and armors of the dead. They are a lot of variety of weapons. Most of the skeletons I fought used swords or bows but some of them have spears, axes and the giant one has a mace.


    It is good to know that you can build different types of weapons here than in the game. I need to find a way to craft this type of weapons. It also nice to finally have a bow. Now I can attack monsters at a distance. I just need to practice so I can use it properly.


    I learned that all of them except the giant whose name is Oliver Cromwell were soldiers. He is the only one here that has two words in his name so his probably a noble of some kind. I did a quick read of Oliver''s journal and it seems they went to the forest of monsters to do some research and that Oliver brought a lot of guards with him. He is curious to know why the forest of monsters contains lots of monsters. He also wants to discover new monsters.


    This Oliver guy is probably obsessed with monsters. Why would he personally come to a dangerous place? I feel sorry for the guards who went with him.


    It seems that he is unsuccessful with his research since he is dead but he managed to gather a lot of information.


    I''m starting to suspect that I might be in this so-called forest of monsters. That would be really ridiculous. Someone just dumped me in this forest filled with monsters.


    I tried on dissembling one of the skeletons to see if I can store bones in the inventory and it did.


    I managed to gather a lot of bones. I should try crafting them into bone meal and use it to the crops.


    I didn''t expect gathered this much loot but I managed to store all of them in my castle.


    *******


    I am in my bedroom right now resting.


    My plan was to hit as many caves as possible today but I didn''t expect to have this much loot so I just went back home and started reading all of Oliver''s research to see if there are useful information here. The language is the same as the letters that I found from Rolf but I can still fluently read it. It really weird but I didn''t mind.


    I learned quite a lot about monsters.


    Most of the monsters that exist in the overworld of the game are still here but there they have a different set of behaviors like zombies will always travel in hordes. But so far, I only found one zombie so probably I just got lucky.


    Skeleton armies will always have a leader. Once a leader has been chosen by the group, the leader will suddenly change and become stronger or smarter and sometimes both. I wonder if Oliver is the leader of that skeleton group since he is really big and strong. And how is this monster vote for their leader? It didn''t say in the research documents. I really want to know.


    I also learned that creepers are born when a person dies with immeasurable hatred against their kind and was buried in a grassy area. No wonder those guys want to blow up every human being they see.


    Giant spiders live in caves. They cover their caves with cobwebs to protect themselves and at the same time to trap anyone who dares to enter their lair. I wonder if I could find a spider cave to collect some strings. Strings can be useful for a lot of things.


    Slimes are found in swamps. There is no mention here that slimes can be found underground so I''m glad to know that. It would be quite problematic when you are busy mining then suddenly giant slimes started attacking you.


    I didn''t see any mention of witches or mobs that exist in Nether or End dimensions. These dimensions probably don''t exist here or none of the people here managed to get there.


    Witches are probably not considered as a monster here or they don''t exist. They are probably classified as criminals if they do exist and they harm people.


    It is bizarre to know this information. Monsters in the game don''t have backstory whatsoever, they just appeared out of nowhere and attack you.


    After resting for the rest of the morning, I decided to go back to mining. My plan to gather information was a success and I know quite a lot of this world. I also know my current location, I think. I really don''t want to believe that I ended in this world in the middle of Forest of Monsters. Why can''t someone send me to a place where there are humans?


    I continued mining while cursing the one who is responsible for sending me in this world.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    "We can''t be in here, Arthur." said the elder of our village.


    "I know but we don''t have anywhere to go. Enemy soldiers are rounding up all the civilians and some of them are chasing us right now. We rather be inside this forest than to be caught. We don''t know what they will do to us." I answered him back.


    I make sure to raise my voice a little bit so that everyone on the group can hear me.


    They are having second thoughts about this and they even think about surrendering themselves but I will never let that happen.


    They will kill us or turn us into slaves or even worse once they caught us.


    "I rather face the monsters here than to face those humans," I said after a short silence to make sure they don''t change their minds about my plan.


    There are about 30 of us in here. We got women, children, elderly and two men who got injured fighting off some soldiers. They used to be more than a hundred of us but most of the group got caught and we are the only ones who managed to escape.


    All of us are tired of walking but I keep pushing them. We need to go much deeper into the forest so that the people chasing us call off the hunt. They might be good of terrorizing innocent people but they are afraid of fighting monsters.


    When we are sure that they stop chasing us, we just need to go back and find a way to sneakily past them. We can also wait for them to leave but this forest is really dangerous if you stay for too long so we are running out of options.


    I have no idea what I''m going to do with my people. We no longer have our village since they burnt it down. We are also running out of food and water.


    ''Goddess of all creation please save these people. I beg of you. Please send a savior.''


    I prayed from the bottom of my heart.

 Episode 10: Improvements (4)

    It took me a month to have a full set of diamond armor and tools.


    Even though I used a diamond pickaxe and mined as fast as possible in the mine shaft, it still took me awhile to find some diamonds.


    I managed to hit bedrock with my mining. The bedrock formation of this world is different than in the game. They formed like a wave and they are clumped up together unlike in the game that you can see them scattered all over the place and some of them float when you mined all the other blocks around it.


    Bedrock started to appear in B-80 and the deepest that I dug is B-100. I have to dig my mine shaft around them since they can''t be mined. Believe me, I tried.


    This world is deeper than I thought. I didn''t expect to get far this down in this world.


    I was having trouble in transporting the items that I mined so I decided to create a tunnel in the basement of the castle and connect it to the mineshaft. I also place rails so I can travel faster between them. I have a lot of iron and gold now so I spent some of them into crafting rails and powered rails.


    I was starting to worry about breathing since I''m so far underground so I made the entrance of the mine shaft a lot bigger and the tunnel a lot wider. I used iron bars to cover the entire entrance since I already have another way to get into the mine shaft.


    I also continued my monster hunting.


    I already have enough information I need to know for my travels from my first hunt but I decided to gather more. I might learn other things like if there are other people like me that got drag into this world.


    I didn''t find any information about other people like me but I did learn a lot of things from the multiple profession of my victims.


    I learned how to craft doors with a lock and a corresponding key. It is really useful for iron doors since I no longer need to put a button to open it or used a lever or any other redstone component. It defeats the purpose of placing a door if it can be easily open by someone else if they have redstone items.


    I also learned how to craft better helmet. You can craft a helmet that can cover your entire head but still have small holes in them to breath and see. It is really useful since you no longer have to worry of getting shot by an arrow in the mouth.


    You can design an armor using an anvil, chisel and hammer. Designs for armors is not really important but I don''t want them to be plain so I put some of them. I also put some designs on my sword and tools.


    Enchanting was the most important thing that I learned.


    I learned how to make an enchantment table. I crafted one when I have the necessary materials but found out that it won''t work if the book on top of the enchantment table don''t have the proper writings. You have to write all the enchantments you can placed in an armor and tools and their corresponding level and lapis lazuli they consumed.


    For example:


    Efficiency


    Can improve the speed and effectiveness of the item


    Level 1 ¨C consumes 3 levels and 1 lapis lazuli


    Level 2 ¨C consumes 5 levels and 2 lapis lazuli


    Level 3 ¨C consumes 8 levels and 3 lapis lazuli


    Level 4 ¨C consumes 10 levels and 4 lapis lazuli


    Level 5 ¨C consumes 12 levels and 5 lapis lazuli


    I wrote every enchantment I know in the book. I tried modifying it a little bit to make it better and cheaper but it doesn''t work. Enchantments have minimum requirements and they also have a limit. You also have to write them in a different alphabet that you see in the game like those hieroglyphics'' kind. Luckily, I can read and write a lot of languages. I don''t know why I have this kind of ability but I''m lucky to have it.


    Some of the enchantments in the game don''t exist here like fortune enchantment for tools, infinity for the bow and looting for the weapons. I was hoping to have fortune enchantment in my tools to increase my loot and looting for my weapons.


    Enchantment curses also don''t exist here. I don''t know what''s the point of putting curses in your equipment in the game than to give it to someone to troll them but I''m glad that they don''t exist here. Though I''m not sure exactly if they don''t really exist since I only gather the information about enchanting from corpses that I killed. They might be existing enchantments that I didn''t know.


    Enchantment tables here don''t necessarily need to be surrounded with bookshelves for you get a high-level enchantment. The enchantment table alone is enough for you to get all of the enchantments.


    You also don''t need to be above level 30 for you to start enchanting. You just need to have the necessary amount of level for the desired enchantment.


    Enchanted items can also be enchanted again. This is handy since you don''t need to craft multiple items and put different enchantments to combined them.


    Enchantments also can be stacked together like my sword having Sharpness V, Smite V and Bane of Arthropods V. This is not possible in the game and you have to only choose one. This sword can kill anything and can cut monsters like they are made of butter. Though, I didn''t put a fire aspect enchantment to my sword since I don''t want to lose my loot.Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there.


    My armor enchantments too have multiple enchantments stacked together that you can''t do in the game. For example, my chest armor has Blast Protection IV, Fire Protection IV, Projectile Protection IV, and Protection IV. It is quite overpowered but I''m not complaining. I no longer received any damage from any monster attack unless I encounter a really powerful one or someone wielding a powerful weapon but up until now, I didn''t see anyone like that.


    I have plenty of levels from my hunting and managed to enchant my entire armor and tools to the best enchantments they could possibly have. I don''t know how many monsters I killed to be able to do this since I lost count but there''s nothing that could hurt me now. Except of course if there are people or monsters out there that have similar equipment.


    I placed the enchantment table on one of the rooms on the third floor of the castle.


    I divided the third floor into four rooms since it is really big for it to be my bedroom.


    The first room is my bedroom. It has a comfy bed and permanent place lanterns to light up. A crafted chair and not some oak stair that I used when I got here and a table.


    I know now how to repurpose the used candles and how to make them so entire castle is now properly lit up. I also place lanterns in the farm, the barn and the wall. It is pretty bright now in my territory.


    The second room is the enchantment room. It has the enchantment table in it and bookshelves. I put all the books, papers and documents I found in my hunting in this room.


    The third room is the map room. I made this room because I''m starting to have trouble with keeping track of the places I''ve been in and using a map is much better than following the sign posts.


    There are two types of map in this world. The regular one and the one called magical map. The regular one is you have to manually draw the map like a real-life cartographer and the magical one is you just need travel in the area of the map in order to fill it up like what you do in the game. It is really useful. I wasn''t expecting to have this kind of thing here but I''m happy that it did. The magical one is quite expensive though since you need a compass and papers to create and compass uses redstone dust and redstone ores are rare to find here.


    I found some sugar canes in my travels and managed to create a sugar cane farm so I have now supply of paper to craft plenty of maps. It is also automated too since I almost figured the redstone mechanics of this world. Though this is the only redstone farm I have since redstone ores are really rare in this world. Even rarer than diamonds. So, I''m just saving the redstone ores just in case.


    The fourth and final room is my personal storage. I build this room as a personal storage for the ores and other important things that I managed to find. I got tired of going up and down the stairs to get to the storage room so I separated and transferred the important items to my personal storage.


    The castle has a moat now.


    The castle was suddenly attack by giant spiders one night. They climbed over the wall and tried to eat all of my animals but I managed to kill them all.


    I found a really big lake in the east so I managed to dig a pathway to form an artificial river and direct the water around the castle walls to avoid future invasions.


    The castle walls are also redesigned to only have one entrance and a retractable bridge.


    There was a zombie invasion and they managed swim across the moat and break down all the oak doors that I placed on all four entrances and attack on all sides. It was not a fun night. Not a single space in the ground that didn''t get soaked with blood.


    The entrance is now 4 by 4 blocks and I crafted two 2 by 4 blocks iron doors. I learned to craft really big iron doors from all the undead blacksmith I encountered. The doors can only be opened by hand. It has a complicated lock on it to make sure no intruders will get easily get inside if they don''t have the proper key. I was planning on making the doors operated by a redstone but I decided to use the redstone on the bridge.


    The bridge is 6 blocks wide with cobblestone wall on the sides so it has 4 blocks of space to walk to.


    The bridge is made of stones bricks and can be operated using a lever.


    I was having trouble on creating the retractable bridge with only pistons, repeaters and redstone dust but I managed to do it in the end. Redstone and water don''t mix well so I was really careful on building this bridge.


    It will be easier if I have a sticky piston to use to push and pull the bridge but since the bridge is quite heavy, I just let gravity do the work.


    *******


    I am walking back to my territory right now.


    I didn''t see any more caves today.


    My monster hunting is still going since I plan to gather as many levels as possible.


    You can mend your tools and armors if you have enough level and the mending enchantments. It is really useful because I''m starting to wonder what I''m going to do with my remaining level. Unlike in the game, you have to kill monsters to gather experience orbs to mend your items but here you immediately gained experience points after you kill a monster so the only way to mend items is by spending your levels.


    I suddenly stop on my tracks when I see something.


    It''s a horse.


    Goodness, gracious. It is a horse.


    I was starting to get sick of walking long distances. I''m glad to see this handsome beast.


    I pulled an apple and held it high in my hand.


    I slowly approach him. I don''t want to scare him off.


    He is starting to walk towards me after seeing the apple.


    He stops in front of me and I feed him the whole apple.


    I gradually went to his side and slowly pet him.


    After a while, I pulled a horse saddle in my inventory that I got from my monster hunting and put it on his back. I also put a rein on him.


    I keep feeding him apples until his full.


    After feeding him, I tried to get on his back to see if I can use him as a mount.


    He tried to kick me off on his back but after a while, he managed to calm down.


    I have no experience of riding a horse but I tried my best.


    I managed to get home so fast and the sun is still high up in the sky. If I was walking, it will be sundown when I got back home.


    I build him a stable and placed some hay bales inside.


    There is still a lot of time before sundown so I decided to craft a diamond armor for my newly acquired horse and enchant them.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    "Why are we following this sign posts, Arthur? We can''t even read them." said by the village elder.


    We have been traveling for three weeks and we run out of food.


    Soldiers are still chasing us though I don''t know why. I thought they go back if we go deeper in this forest.


    After weeks of traveling, we suddenly encountered some sign posts with written language in them that I don''t know.


    "We didn''t encounter any monsters when we see this sign posts. All of the caves we found has also been blocked off by cobblestones so it means they are someone around here. We need to look for them." I answered back.


    We encountered some monsters during our journey but there is not a lot of them and I managed to kill them all by myself. I''m the only in the group that has experience in dealing with monsters.


    I started to wonder if we really are in the Forest of Monsters because of the number of monsters we encountered.


    "Let''s just hope that the people we find are humans and not some intelligent monsters."

 Episode 11: First Human Encounter (1)

    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    Me and my people been following the signposts for a while. They starting to appear more often so it easy to follow them.


    We have been walking for the whole day and the sun is about to go down.


    I started giving orders to set up camp but I noticed something in the distance.


    I quickly climbed the highest hill to see what it is.


    There is a structure nearby that is made out of stone. I can''t fully identify what it is but it is close.


    "Break up camp! We have to keep walking!" I shouted to my people from atop the hill.


    "What are you talking about?! We''re tired and the sun is about to go down!" One of them shouted back.


    "I can see something in the distance. We have to go there." I said quickly to them after coming down the hill.


    I pointed my finger in the direction of the structure.


    "It''s there and it is close."


    "Are you sure that you want everyone to go there?" said the village elder.


    "Yeah. What if there nothing but monsters inside?" one of the people interjected.


    "We no longer have food and we have nowhere to go. Is there anyone here have a better idea?" I ask them.


    I waited for an answer but none of them spoke.


    All of us are hungry and tired.


    We have to constantly move since we are being chased so we can''t forage for food.


    We also have to stay alert at night in case of a monster attack.


    The two injured men are slowly dying. I''m even surprised they can even walk in their conditions. They say they still got 5 hearts of health but I''m not buying it. There probably want to say that to not make everyone worry about them.


    "What if we go there and there are only monsters?" said the elder after a short while.


    "I will handle it," I said proudly.


    I still got the weapon that is passed down in my family. It still has high durability so it is not going to break soon.


    "Are you sure about that? I know you are strong. I saw you handle those monsters back then but you are tired and hungry right now." The village elder said to me while staring with his eyes that says ''We will all going to die''.


    I''m not tired of walking and fighting monsters. I''m tired of looking at those eyes. Everyone here is starting to have that kind of eyes.


    "Don''t worry about it and let''s just go."


    It is breaking my heart that I can''t do more for my people but I still urged them to move.


    I turn around and started walking.


    All of them is hesitant to follow me but after a moment they quickly gathered their things and started following me.


    ******* *******


    "I WILL KILL YOU ALL!"


    "I SWEAR TO GOD I WILL SLAUGHTER ALL OF YOU IF YOU DON''T SHUT UP!"


    It is not a good sign when you come back home and started shouting at pigs.


    They keep making loud noises even though I already fed them.


    Spoiled brats.


    They are lucky I didn''t butcher them yet since I still have plenty of food in my inventory and storage in the castle. My inventory is starting to get full so I transferred some of the food that I think will not expire for a long time in the storage room.


    I''m also starting to become a vegetarian.


    I decided to eat only the crops that I harvested right now since I have plenty of bone meal to instantly grow them. I''m just saving the animals for emergencies.


    I got out of the barn after scolding the pigs and notice it is almost night time.


    I should return to my bedroom and rest.


    As I''m walking towards the castle keep, I suddenly heard a voice coming from outside.


    "Is there anybody in there!?"If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    I quickly equip my armor and sword and run up on top of the wall to see who is it.


    I looked down on top of the wall and see a bunch of people standing in front of the moat.


    They are humans.


    There are about 30 of them. Men, women, old people, and even children.


    They look tired. They are really dirty too. I also see two people who appear to be injured.


    This is my first-time seeing humans in this world. I only met nothing but monsters for the entire time I was here in this world.


    I''m really excited to talk to them. I have been talking to my animals lately due to lack of human interactions so this is an exciting moment.


    They''re not talking though. They just keep staring at me.


    "Who are you?" I asked them to start a conversation.


    I was surprised at how rude my tone was like I''m talking to a bunch of monsters.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    We are standing in front of what appears to be a wall surrounding an area. We can''t really see what''s behind this wall since it is quite tall.


    The wall is beautifully made and looks really sturdy. There is not a single moss on them like it been made recently.


    It has a moat surrounding it and a really big iron doors with intricate designs. The gate is really sturdy looking like it is screaming ''Intruders are not allowed!''.


    We are surprised to see this kind of thing in the middle of this forest.


    We are really cautious about approaching this place. This might be a skeleton fortress of some sort. I don''t know if those things actually exist but this is the Forest of Monsters so anything is possible.


    I don''t see anyone on top of the wall.


    There also no bridges of any kind to cross the moat so I don''t really know how to knock on the door.


    "Is anybody in there!?" I shouted as loud as possible.


    After a while, a man showed up.


    He is wearing a beautiful blue colored armor. It has carvings and designs on them like they been made by the best craftsmen of the world.


    He is also holding a blue sword with the same beauty as his armor.


    I haven''t seen this type of weapon and armor before. What are they made of? They also shimmer which means they are enchanted.


    Everyone is awed on what we are seeing.


    Nobody was talking or anything. We just keep staring on the man.


    "Who are you?" we heard him speak after a while and snap everyone out of their bewilderment.


    His tone suggested that he is irritated.


    "I apologized for bothering you, my good sir." I tried to speak as formally as possible.


    "I and my people are nothing but refugees from a small village."


    "Refugees?"


    "Yes. Our village was attacked and we managed to escape to this forest."


    "Escape to this forest? Don''t you know that this forest is filled with monsters?"


    "We have nowhere to run. May I talk to the person in charge of this place about letting me and my people stay? We can pay." I quickly got straight to the point and pulled a small bag filled with 20 emeralds in my inventory and lift it up to let the man see.


    "In charge? If you mean the person who owns this place then you are talking to that person."


    What? He own a place inside the Forest of Monsters? Who would want to own a place inside this forest?


    "I''m sorry, my lord. I didn''t know. Can you help us?"


    I regretted showing him the small bag with only 20 emeralds in it since he is probably a lot richer than me but I still beg him for help.


    He didn''t answer.


    He just stared at us. He scanned everyone one by one until his eyes settle on the children.


    Then he just walks back and disappeared.


    No! Don''t go! Please help my people.


    My people are suddenly gone into despair after seeing the man walked away.


    I was about to start shouting to beg for his help when suddenly the water in front me starts shaking.


    Everyone was so surprised and took a step back.


    A beautiful bridge that is made out of stones suddenly appeared from the moat.


    Then, the big iron door slowly opened wide and we can see a man standing in the middle.


    "What are you waiting for?" He quickly spoke after seeing that no one is moving.


    He is no longer wearing armor and holding a weapon.


    Everyone was once again in bewilderment of the appearance of the man. He has an appearance that makes you think that the Goddess herself went down from heaven to this world and crafted this being.


    "Come on everyone." I quickly urged everyone.


    I started walking and everyone followed closely behind me.


    The man steps aside to let everyone through.


    When I get inside, I was shocked to see how beautiful this is place is.


    The ground is all made out of stone. Most of the stones here have patterns I have never seen in my entire life.


    I can see a farm nearby and also what appears to be a barn. There is also a horse stable beside the gate.


    The place is also fully lit up. There is not a single block here that doesn''t get touch by a light. I wonder how much they have spent keeping this place bright.


    But what really caught my attention is the castle.


    It is the most beautiful looking castle I have ever seen.


    "Arthur"


    It is really tall. It probably has about 3 or 4 floors in them.


    "Arthur"


    It is sturdy looking too same as the gate and wall. Like any projectiles launch from a catapult can''t even scratch it.


    "Arthur!"


    "What?" I suddenly snap out from my admiration of the castle by the voice of the village elder.


    "His lord is saying something to you." He quickly added.


    The man is staring at me and I was really embarrassed that I''m not paying attention.


    "Take this keys and head to the second floor. There are food and water in there." He ordered.


    I grab the keys then he added something.


    "I''m going to head south to collect some strings. I don''t have enough wool to make beds and clothes for all of you."


    He is saying strange things but I ignored it since I heard about food, water, beds, and clothes.


    He quickly headed to the horse stable and got out wearing an armor. He is also holding a shield and a weapon. The horse is also wearing a shimmering blue armor.


    He looks like a warrior from the legends that my mother used to tell me when I was a kid.


    "Do you see that lever?" He asked me while pointing his finger into something.


    I followed my eyes to the direction he was pointing and can see a wooden lever on the ground.


    I nodded my head after seeing it.


    "Lock the gate and pulled that lever after I got out. That lever controls the bridge and it is going to retract it. You will all be safe from rogue spiders since they hate water and zombies can''t break through that gate. There is still a problem with skeletons since their a little smart but you''ll be safe inside the keep."


    "It is already night time, my lord. Are you sure you want to go out alone? Where are your guards?" I asked him worriedly.


    I noticed something. There is no one here beside him. There are probably inside the keep.


    "I lived alone and you don''t have to worry about me." He just casually replied.


    Wait. He lived alone in this forest? The way he is also talking about going out at night is like he''s been doing it for a long time.


    "Make sure you also lock the castle keep front door and Arthur." He paused for a moment then stared straight to my eyes.


    "Don''t let anyone go to the basement till I get back."


    After saying those words, he kicked his horse to make it run and head outside then turn left towards the south.


    He is gone.


    There are a lot of things I don''t understand. There are also a lot of questions I want to ask him.


    I turned around and look at the castle.


    ''What is in the basement of that castle?''

 Episode 12: First Human Encounter (2)

    This is my first time traveling at night.


    I''m not scared though. Probably because I''m all geared up and nothing can hurt me.


    I''m heading south right now to request strings from someone to make beds and clothes.


    I have plenty of clothing I gathered from my hunting but most of them are worn out and cannot be used. The inventory of the monsters is probably not the same as mine or mine is special. I have to ask those people back home about this. I also don''t want them to be wearing the clothing of dead people especially the children.


    This is the first time I met them so I have to make a great first impression.


    I just hope they don''t go to the basement. I have someone in there that might give those people a misunderstanding.


    I also hope that they are eating and nobody is bothering them while I''m gone.


    I didn''t expect to see human beings coming to my territory. They said they are refugees and they have nowhere to go so I will probably just ask them about their situation once I get back.


    There are all in rough shape. Especially those two.


    My plan to travel in the overworld will be halted if those two worsen their condition. I can''t have anyone dying inside my castle.


    As I''m heading farther away from my territory and deeper in the south, I finally reach my destination.


    The territory of Arachne. Queen of the giant spiders.


    There are three places I really avoid in this forest. I managed to find these places since I can travel now long distances with a horse.


    The Skeleton Fortress in the north, the zombie tunnels in the east and this place.


    I discovered the Skeleton Fortress from a distance when I was walking around the north and decided to check on it. The gate was closed up with stones and I can''t see any entrances that can get me inside so I just mined my way through. I was immediately showered with arrows and spears the moment I got inside. I fought for a while until I saw a really big skeleton about 12 blocks height. He is wielding a huge iron sword. He was probably the leader. He was speaking something to me but I just ignored him and run back home.


    The zombie tunnels are just a series of tunnels connecting to each other like an ant hive. The tunnels go all the way down to bedrock and I just managed to stumble upon it while mining for diamonds. My mine shaft was suddenly flooded with zombies and it took me a while to get rid of the ones that managed to get inside. After killing all of them, I was planning on sealing off the tunnel but decided to see what is inside these tunnels. I murdered my way into these tunnels and managed to get to the center of it. There is a really big space and saw a really big zombie in it. He is about the size of the giant skeleton. I just run like what I did in the skeleton fortress and blocked off the tunnels.


    There are just too many monsters in those places for me to handle. Especially, the north and south since both of their leaders have intelligence and can talk.


    I slowly moved my horse forward then after a moment, I can hear something moving.


    I can''t see anything since it is so dark.


    I put away my shield and sword and pulled a lantern in my inventory.


    I light it up and was shocked to see that I''m surrounded.


    There are so many giant spiders.


    Lots of them are on the ground and they are even some on top of the trees.


    After a while, I can hear really big footsteps.


    It is coming towards me and it is getting closer.


    "What this? Why is the ''lonely king living in a beautiful castle'' doing here?" I heard a screeching voice and now can see who it is.


    A really ginormous spider. Ten times bigger than a regular giant spider.


    She looks the same as the regular giant spider but has distinguishable features. Her color is black and has red colored patterns in her body. If I have to say, she is a really well-drawn character if this is a game.


    "I''m surprised to see you walking at night. I don''t know why you are here but I believe I have already told you, lonely king, that any spiders that attack your castle are not my doing or any of my children." She said after seeing me equip a sword in my right hand while holding a lantern on my left.If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    We have a little bit of history.


    We had a battle a day after giant spiders invaded my castle.


    I was minding my own business looking for caves when suddenly I stumbled into this place and was attacked by a bunch of giant spiders for no reason even though it is still day time. It seems that spider here are vicious whether it is day or night time.


    After killing a lot of them, she suddenly appeared and saw the carnage. She was really furious and attacked me.


    We fought for a while until she asked me a question to what I am doing in here.


    There was no clear winner since she can''t scratch me with my unenchanted diamond armor and I can''t kill her since she keeps on healing.


    I was really surprised at that time and accidentally told her about the spider invasion incident in my castle.


    She misunderstood me and thought that I came here for revenge and to kill them all.


    She begged me to stop killing her children and swore that it wasn''t her doing. Told me that it was probably rogue spiders.


    We chatted for a moment and after telling her where I lived, she suddenly starts calling me ''the lonely king living in a beautiful castle''. Her children were actually observing me when I built my castle and told her about it.


    I don''t know why everyone is calling the king or my lord. Probably because I lived in a castle.


    "That is not the reason why I''m here Queen Arachne" I spoke after observing that no one is going to attack me.


    I''m really cautious since it is night time and giant spiders in the game are really aggressive in the dark. I really hope it is not the same here.


    "I would like to request some strings."


    "Of course. Anything for the lonely king. How much do you want?" She quickly answered.


    I''m really surprised at how compliant she is like anything I requested will be granted. I was about to say I''m going to give them some of my animals for the strings.


    "Quite compliant of you," I said to her since I''m really curious to why she is behaving this way.


    "I rather give it to you voluntarily than to let you kill all of my children and harvest the strings from their corpses."


    I see. She thought I will start killing if I don''t get what I want. I''m not that type of person though but I don''t have time to correct her misunderstanding since there are people waiting for me and I''m not about to complain if there is someone who is giving free things for me.


    "16 stacks should be enough," I told her after doing some calculation in my head.


    I should have plenty of space in my inventory since I empty most of my items in the chest in the barn. I placed a new chest in the barn so I can transfer items and have enough space to store strings. Only my armor, tools and weapon are in the inventory.


    After receiving the strings, I thanked them and quickly head back to my territory.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    My people are now well fed and well hydrated.


    We are now resting. I told everyone not to be complacent but they just ignored me. Some of them even sleep especially the injured and the children. They are probably really tired.


    When we reached the second floor in the castle, we found lots and lots of food enough to feed us for an entire year.


    My people are really happy that they are finally safe but I still have my suspicions.


    I opened every chest in the storage room to see what is inside.


    I saw a lot of things.


    There is an enormous number of blocks. I was really surprised to see this amount. I never see this quantity in my entire life. With this amount, he can build an entire city. He said he lived alone. He can''t possibly mine these many blocks all by himself. So, where did he get these?


    There is also a tremendous amount of emeralds. He has enough wealth to buy an entire small kingdom. How can someone like him give access to a bunch of strangers to the place where he stores his money?


    There is also a lot of iron here. He has enough iron to craft weapons and armors for an entire army. What is he going to do with all this iron and how did he also get these amount?


    There still a lot of things here but what really caught my attention is the amount of clothing stored here. He said that he doesn''t have enough clothes to provide me and my people but he has plenty of them here. Why did he say that and why did he leave?


    I need to know what is really happening here.


    As I''m about to head to the stairs, somebody suddenly blocked my way.


    It is the village elder.


    "Where are you going Arthur?" he asked with a worried expression in his face.


    "There is a lot of strange things happening here," I answered him.


    "His lord is a benevolent man. He gave us food, water, and shelter. I suggest you don''t do something stupid." He warned me but I''m not listening.


    There is no one in this world who is this kind and giving.


    "Get out of my way," I said as I got passed him to run into the stairs.


    "Arthur!"


    He keeps shouting my name but I ignored him and I ran like all of our lives depending on it.


    I need to find out what he is hiding in the basement. He said not to go there but I really need to know what is in there.


    After reaching the first floor, I''m now standing in front of the stairs that lead towards the basement.


    He specifically said not to go in there but that only triggered my suspicion more.


    I walked slowly on the stairs until I reached the bottom.


    I saw quite a lot of rooms here with irons doors on them.


    I plan to check all of them one by one but I noticed a noise coming from one of the rooms.


    I cautiously approach the door where the noise is coming from and tried to open it.


    It is locked.


    I grab the keys in my inventory and quickly tried one by one on the lock until it opened.


    I slowly opened the door.


    My heart is beating so fast since I don''t know what I''m about to see.


    After opening it wide, I was really shocked at what I am seeing.


    It is a prison made out iron bars. This is my first time seeing someone use an iron like this. Iron in this world is really expensive but what really shocked me is that there is someone inside of it.


    A zombie.


    "Didn''t I tell you not to go to the basement."


    I was surprised to hear a voice behind me and quickly turn around to see who it is.


    It is the man who gave us food, water, and shelter.


    He is wearing his blue armor, sword, and shield.


    How did he get here? The gate is still locked and the bridge is down.


    Is there another way to get into this place?


    I immediately equipped my iron spear and prepared to fight.


    I don''t know what is going on but I''m not letting anyone hurt my people.

 Episode 13: First Human Encounter (3)

    ******* Captain''s POV *******


    "We should head back, captain. We are already really deep in the forest. Why can''t we just let them go?"


    "Shut up, soldier! The general wants them so we are going to capture them no matter what it takes." I hissed at the soldier who asked me a stupid question.


    We are in the middle of the night right now camping deep into the forest.


    We are in pursuit of some village folk that managed to escape.


    We believed that they may have been following these signposts we started seeing since yesterday.


    The general wants them to be captured but nobody wants to enter this forest so the general just suddenly picked me and my group to go after them.


    He probably thought that I and my people are expendable.


    Selfish bastard.


    If he really wants to capture these people, why can''t he just do it himself? He got like thousands of people in his command.


    Just you wait. I''m going to rack up many achievements in this conquest and I''m going to outrank him.


    If only that person didn''t interfere.


    While we are raiding a small village near the Forest of Monsters, one of them suddenly fought back with his iron spear and managed to kill a dozen soldiers. He then tried to evacuate his people into the forest but we managed to capture most of them.


    How can someone from a backwater village have an iron weapon? It is really well made and enchanted too.


    But it doesn''t matter what tricks he has on his sleeves.


    He cannot fight on 50 people all by himself.


    I got 10 mounted soldiers, 10 archers and the rest are foot soldiers.


    All of them are equipped with the highest possible grade of leather armor and stone weapons. Weapons and armors are enchanted to the best enchantments an enchanter can put it. I paid all of my army''s equipment with the money I loot from the war to make sure they don''t die easy and to help me raked up quite a lot of achievements.


    I''m also an anointed knight which means I am equipped with iron armor and an iron weapon.


    Once I captured those people, I''m going to make sure they suffer a lot for making us follow them into the forest.


    I just hope that most of them are still alive and monsters didn''t get to them.


    Now I think about, where are the monsters in this forest? We didn''t encounter any since we entered this forest.


    ******** ********


    This is the type of situation that I really wanted to avoid.


    After gathering the strings, I make my horse ran as fast as he can to get back quickly here. The bridge is down and the gate is locked so I just went to the north towards the mine shaft and used the tunnel to get inside the castle basement.


    I was surprised to see someone in here.


    I should have known that someone will go to the basement even with my warning.


    Why did I just give him all the keys? I wasn''t thinking straight at the time since I''m so excited about meeting them.


    Damn. Now, how will I explain this?


    "Answer me! What are you? What are you going to do with my people?" This Arthur guy keeps repeating these questions.


    What is he talking about? I just went outside at night and went to one of the most dangerous places in this forest to gather strings for you.


    He is a lot more ungrateful than my pigs.


    After screaming for a while, he suddenly charged at me and thrust his iron spear towards my chest.


    This is not good.


    I don''t know what enchantments that iron spear has but my diamond armor is maxed out with enchantments so it is just going to break. It is pretty well made so it must be an important item to him. I have to make sure it doesn''t break.


    I just twist my body to avoid the spear and slightly push him with my right hand. I also put away my sword to make sure not to accidentally use it.


    He suddenly flew across the room and hit the wall.


    He then laid face flat on the ground.If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Damn. I haven''t fully figured out how to control my strength.


    This past month, I suddenly noticed that my strength and speed is getting stronger the more monsters I killed.


    I don''t know why it is happening but it is not related to levels since it keeps getting deducted every time, I enchant an item.


    There are also no changes in my status when I looked it up.


    Maybe I could ask this guy about this if only he stops attacking me.


    "Have you calmed down yet?" I ask him since he suddenly stops moving. I hope I didn''t manage to kill him.


    He looked up as he was reaching his hand towards me while begging.


    "Please don''t hurt my people."


    "What makes you think I''m going to hurt your people?" I genuinely asked since I really want to know how did he reach that conclusion.


    He got up on his feet and once again preparing to attack.


    Calm down already and let''s talk this out.


    "Explain to me, why are you keeping a zombie locked up? Where is everybody in this castle? Who are you?" a barrage of questions suddenly came out of his mouth.


    Okay. We are getting somewhere.


    "I believe I already told you that I lived alone andˇ­"


    "Liar! There is a lot of belongings of other peopleˇ­"


    "LET ME FINISH TALKING!" I suddenly shouted.


    I''m getting pissed off and wanted to clear up the misunderstanding quickly.


    It is already quite late and I wanted to craft beds so the people upstairs can sleep comfortably. I don''t want them to sleep on the floor.


    He still looks like he is about to attack me but at least he quiets down and will start listening to me.


    I started explaining things to him about living alone in this castle I just recently built, the things I gathered in the storage room and most importantly the zombie.


    "He can be cured?" he asked after listening to my explanations for a while.


    "Yes. He still has clear eyes and not black and his skin is not as green as the other zombies so I think he still can be cured."


    I found this zombie during my one of my zombie tunnels expeditions and decided to bring him home.


    I really don''t know if there is a cure for zombies here but there no harm in trying.


    But I don''t have any materials to craft a brewing stand so I can''t craft potions. In the game, the way you cure a zombie villager is to splash him with the potion of weakness and let him eat a golden apple.


    I have plenty of gold to craft a golden apple. All I need right now is a blaze rod to craft a brewing stand and materials to make a potion of weakness


    "Look. Arthur. It is up to you if you believe me or not. I''m going upstairs to help your people so you do what you have to do." I said to him after a while since he didn''t talk back.


    He looks like he still has a lot of question but I just ignored him.


    I took off my armor and put them in my inventory.


    I turn around and head outside the room.


    ''Please don''t stab me in the back.''


    This is a brave move I''ve done to make him trust me but I''m really scared.


    I just keep on walking towards my horse I left behind outside the room.


    After a while, I see him following behind me without saying a word.


    Thank god it worked and he also put away his spear.


    "Did you lock the door?" I asked him after getting on the horse.


    "ˇ­Yes." he reluctantly answered me.


    He still has doubts about me but at least he is no longer attacking me.


    "Good. Give me the keys and wait for me on the second floor. I''m going outside the keep to tie this horse in the stables. Make sure you don''t tell anyone about the zombie."


    He gave me the keys and I quickly head outside.


    After tying the horse in the stables, I quickly head to the second floor to start crafting the beds and clothes.


    When I got to the second floor, I was really surprised to see that almost all of them are already asleep. They must be really tired from their journey.


    Luckily, Arthur didn''t say anything about what happened in the basement to his people since the mood is still calm.


    I quickly crafted enough beds and clothes for them.


    There still a lot of space unused on the second floor so I have plenty of space to place the beds.


    I ask the old man to wake them all up to change their clothes and sleep in the bed since they are sleeping in the floor. I wonder why the old man is still awake? He also looks really worried when I got here.


    I also checked on the two injured men.


    I was really surprised to see that they are really hurt. By the looks of things, they got about 2 to 3 hearts left. I''m not even surprised if they only have 1 heart left.


    They even worse than me when I got hurt by the zombie.


    I quickly feed them each with golden apples since I don''t have any potions on me to heal them.


    At first, they refuse to eat the golden apples since they thought these are really expensive items so I just shove them into their mouth to force them to eat it.


    Golden apples give you instant health of 1 heart and regeneration status when you eat them.


    I tried this when I managed to gather a lot of gold and I don''t know what I''m going to do with them but you can only eat one golden apple a week or else it will overdose you and turn the regeneration status into poison. I learned this the hard way. The regeneration status also lasts for only an hour just enough to heal you additional 1 heart so, in total, one golden apple can heal 2 hearts of damage.


    The golden apples seem to be really effective.


    All of their wounds are quickly healing but I don''t know if they are already safe since I can''t see their status.


    They said they already good as new but still sound hurt and just acting tough. I should head to the nether to hunt some blaze so I can craft a brewing stand. I can brew them some health potions.


    The problem is I don''t have any obsidian to build a portal.


    I managed to find a ton of lavas in the mine shaft but I just cover them up since they only heat up the tunnel.


    I should start mining obsidian tomorrow.


    After tending the wounded, I head to my room to plan my trip to the nether.


    I was sitting in my chair re-reading research books I gathered from the dead to see if there are any mention of nether that I missed when suddenly I hear someone is knocking on my door.


    "Come in."


    Arthur opened the door and slowly bow his head like he is facing a royalty.


    Okay. This is becoming really weird having people look up to you like you are a king. I should tell them that I''m just an ordinary person but how I''m going to do that? I freaking live in a castle. I regret building my home as big as this.


    "Sit down. What is it?" I told him since he just keeps on standing just waiting for me to talk.


    "I want to say I''m sorry my lord about what happened on the basement and to thankˇ­"


    "Don''t worry about it." I interrupted him since it will be troublesome to hear him apologize and thank me and I really need to prepare for my journey.


    "And stop calling me ''my lord'' and just call meˇ­" I paused for a moment.


    I realized that I don''t have a name in this world. I can just ask him to call me by my real name but I don''t want to leave any trace of me here once I get back home.


    Hmm. Name. Maybe I could just name myself from a famous artist or celebrity.


    No. I don''t want that.


    Historical leaders then like Genghis Khan. No. He committed genocide if I remember correctly. Alexander the Great. Oda Nobunaga. King Charles. Wait.


    I know a name.


    "Carolus. Carolus Rex." I told him after a while.


    I also checked my status if there are any changes and surprised to see the name is no longer empty.

 Episode 14: First Human Battle (1)

    ******** Arthur''s POV *******


    "No. I can''t do that my lord. Even if you ordered me to." I quickly answered him.


    I don''t want to be rude to him and just call him by his name. Especially when he just allowed us to stay in his castle, give us food and water and even gave really expensive items to the injured.


    I also want to kneel and apologize to him for what I have done but before I can do that, he just asked me to sit down and casually let it go.


    I never met a man as forgiving as him. If it is another royalty or high-class person, I will be immediately executed for my crime.


    There is also about the healing item he gave to my injured people.


    Healing items in this world are really expensive. Only a really rich person can afford one but he just gave two to my people without asking for anything. I also haven''t seen a healing item before in a form of an apple.


    I haven''t seen golden apples in my life. I only knew about them from my mother''s story.


    ''There is once a really tall beautiful tree about ten blocks in height that suddenly appeared in the center of the world.


    Its leaves are really beautiful and said that once a day it drops a golden apple.


    It is believed that the golden apple can heal any injury known to man.


    Instead of sharing this wonderful gift, mankind decided to fight each other to decide who will own the tree.


    Some of them even said that the tree is a curse since if you ate too much of its fruit you will get poisoned and want it to chop down.


    Until one day, everyone notices that the tree vanishes without a trace.''


    I don''t really believe my mother''s story but now I have seen a golden apple I''m not really sure.


    Did the tree really exist? If so then, did the tree come back to give mankind another chance? His lord was probably been there since he said he has plenty of them.


    Now I think about it. He said that he just recently built this place so he must come from somewhere.


    "I see." He just said and judging by his tone he is disappointed.


    I really want to ask him a lot of questions about himself and where did he come from but he is reading something and I don''t want to bother him further.


    I was about to excuse myself to leave him in his business when I suddenly remembered something.


    "There is also something I want to tell you, my lord."


    "What is it?" he said and I noticed that he is now back on reading his book.


    "I believe I already told you, my lord, that I and my people are being chased. There is an army chasing me and people and we are barely a day ahead of them."


    "How do you know you are being chased?" he asked me while his eyes still on the book.


    "By seeing smokes from their camp. We tried to shake them off on our trail but yesterday, we found out that they are still chasing us."


    Now I''m really angry at myself.


    Not only we asked him to help us but we also brought enemies unto his territory.


    "You are a day ahead you say? If there only traveling by day and by foot then there still about 30 thousand blocks distance between us. Maybe even more since the road is not straight."


    I was awed on how easy for him to estimate the distance and how he is still calm after hearing there are enemies coming.


    "Equipment?" he casually asked.


    "All of them have leather armor and stone weapons but the leader will probably have an iron armor and iron weapon."


    "I see. Then those people are not a problem. If you don''t have anything else to say, you can leave and sleep."


    I was starting to say my protest but remembered what happened in the basement.


    It only took him one punch to knock me off my feet and he is not even trying at that time.


    I also learned that his lord is wise so he probably knows what he is doing.


    I just excuse myself after a while and leave his room.Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    After seeing Arthur leave, I started to panic.


    I can''t believe that there are armed people chasing them.


    He said that there are only equipped with leather armor and stone tools so I can just take them all by myself but I haven''t killed a human being before.


    It is easy to kill monsters since you know they are monsters but killing a human being? I don''t know if I can do that.


    But there are coming for Arthur and his people. I can''t just let anyone take them or hurt them.


    I just hope the monsters get the soldiers first or they never find this place.


    Let''s just sleep.


    There is no point in worrying about it now.


    I quickly closed my book and lie down on the bed.


    ''The problem of tomorrow is tomorrow''s problem.'' I just said to myself to clear my mind so I can quickly sleep.


    *******


    I woke early like any other day.


    I got up on top of the castle to see the surroundings.


    I see no army heading here and there was no monster incident during the night.


    Another beautiful and peaceful day.


    I told Arthur that I''m going to the mine shaft to collect some obsidian since even though the two injured people are recovering fast, I''m still worried about them and decided to go to the nether.


    The people suddenly suggested to do some work around here like tending the animals, crops, and cleaning but I told them no since there are guests in my home and they are still tired from their journey. They really insisted and will not take no for an answer so I just let them. It is great that I no longer have to worry about the animals and crops. I can just now focus on mining.


    I left Arthur in charge of the castle since he is quite smart and dependable among all of his people.


    I quickly head to the basement to go to the mine shaft.


    I did a quick check on the zombie in the basement in case there are any changes but he still has clear eyes so we are still good.


    After reaching the deep side of the mineshaft, I started to think on how to do this.


    I don''t want to be careless and end up swimming deep into lava.


    Maybe I could build like a basin using blocks where I put a single block of lava and pour water on top of it to turn it into obsidian.


    After trying to turn a block into obsidian, I learned that you need one bucket of water to turn a block of lava. This is quite hectic since I can''t carry plenty of water but luckily, there is a water pocket nearby the lava pool that I discovered so it easy to convert obsidian.


    The problem is that it really takes a long time to break one block of obsidian even with my tremendous strength and enchanted pickaxe.


    It is great to have a beacon right about now. I wonder if beacons exist in this world? I don''t even know if the nether dimension exists so I''m not sure where to hunt for black skeleton heads to summon the wither.


    I guess I''ll find out when I finish collecting enough obsidian and build the portal.


    After busy mining for about half a day, Arthur suddenly came running towards me in the tunnel.


    I''m surprised he managed to find me here since the mine shaft is like a maze. I''m glad that he didn''t get lost.


    He looks worried and I can see the fear in his eyes.


    I started to worry.


    "My lord, there is an army approaching in the west." He quickly said to me after bowing.


    What? Army? They managed to get here?


    Damn.


    I quickly ran back to the castle leaving behind Arthur who is trying to catch up to me.


    I got up on the west wall to see that there is really an army heading towards here.


    There is got about 50 of them and I can also see people riding on horses on the back.


    They march in formation and stop until they reach about 10 blocks away from the moat.


    "I am captain Merek of Xaerin Kingdom. The leader of this army. I want to speak to the person in charge of this place." I can hear someone talking in the back.


    His voice is loud enough to be heard all over my territory.


    What? They came from the Xaerin Kingdom?


    I thought they still at war with the Astikuviel Kingdom.


    Did the Kingdom of Astikuviel lose?


    I should have asked Arthur about the situation in their place last night.


    I can see Arthur running towards me and he looks like he is running out of breath.


    "Arthur, take everyone and go inside the castle keep." I quickly told him after he is close enough to hear me.


    "What? No! I can fight my lord."


    "Just do it." I quickly dismissed his protest.


    "Peyton. Bring everyone inside the keep and lock it." He said to the old man who is on the ground looking up to us.


    Arthur just stayed and looks like he is not planning on leaving.


    Damn. We don''t have time playing tough guy here.


    I just ignored him and I get closed to the wall to let the people below see me.


    "I am in charge of this place. What do you want?" I said as loudly as I can so the person called Merek can hear me.


    "I don''t know what is this place or who you are but you need to hand over our prisoners." He demanded.


    Their prisoners? This idiot is already considering them as prisoners even though they haven''t caught them yet.


    "And what if I refuse?" I tried to play tough and challenged him to see his reaction.


    "Ha! You are willing to die for these people? You don''t have an army. I have this place scouted in the distance. Just hand them over so you don''t get hurt."


    This is not getting good.


    I look around the castle grounds to see if there are people still not inside the keep.


    I didn''t see anyone.


    Good. At least the people are safe.


    "Open the gates or we will be going to attack." He said after a while since I didn''t say anything.


    ''Don''t do it.'' I started praying to myself that they will not attack. I thought I was ready for this but I was wrong.


    "This is your final warning!" His voice is getting louder.


    ''Go away. I don''t want to hurt you'' I keep pleading them but I didn''t voice out my cries.


    "Fine! Foot soldiers! Prepare to storm the castle!" The soldiers in front equipped with stone swords and wooden shields started to move forward for about 1 block.


    ''No!''


    "Start placing planks so you can cross over the moat and get on the wall! Make sure to prioritize that spear guy since he is a threat. Just ignore that other guy."


    ''Stop!''


    "Go!"


    I can see people on the front of the army started moving. About half of them started charging and they raised their shields high.


    They are already 7 blocks away to reach the moat.


    6 blocks


    5 blocks


    Time seems to go slow since I can hear their every step and see their every movement.


    "What should we do, my lord?" I can hear Arthur asking me a question but I can barely hear him since I''m so focused on the people running towards here.


    4 blocksˇ­ 3 blocksˇ­ 2 blocks


    ''GODDAMMIT!''


    I quickly equip my armor, shield, and sword then jump off the wall.

 Episode 15: First Human Battle (2)

    ******* Captain Merek''s POV *******


    Stupid idiot.


    Did he really think that I will not attack this castle?


    We arrived here a couple of hours ago and was so surprised to see a really well-built castle.


    We don''t know what it is but it is really beautiful so it is probably owned by a rich person.


    I don''t know what to do if ever the people we are chasing is inside that castle since I don''t have enough soldiers for a siege but my worry is unnecessary.


    I have this place thoroughly scouted from a distance and was surprised to know that there was no one manning the walls and towers. It even only has a single entrance though I don''t see any bridge to get to the gate.


    It is really weird.


    I organized my army into battle position and slowly moved them forward to see if I can get a reaction from the castle.


    After a while, I see only see two people standing on top of the wall.


    I see the spearman and a person that I haven''t seen before.


    He is probably the owner of this place.


    My plan is if ever the people I''m chasing is not here is I''m just going to ask the people in this place if there are any sightings but I suddenly I saw the spearman and immediately show hostility.


    I don''t know what the owner of this place is thinking of living in this forest. He probably doesn''t fear the monster in here but he never met me. I will show him what will happen to the people who get in my way.


    There is still a problem with that spearman but he is so outnumbered. He probably will kill about a dozen or so of my people before he goes down but I don''t care about them.


    There is no hope for these people. They got nowhere to run.


    There are about 2 blocks away before the foot soldiers reach the moat when suddenly the other man jumps off the wall.


    He is now wearing blue armor, a shield, and a sword.


    He swings his sword down towards a soldier who is in the very front and cut him into two before his feet touch the ground.


    "What just happened?" I can hear someone beside me saying something but I ignored him since I am in shock of what just happened.


    He just cut a person in half with a single swing.


    I haven''t seen anything like that.


    He is also fine even jumping from a great height.


    Who is he? Is he even human?


    No. He is human and only just one man. How can he stop my entire army?


    "Don''t be intimidated! He is stupid enough to come to us! Surround him and kill him!" I shouted to all of my soldiers since they stop moving and just keep staring on the person.


    They just keep standing for a while even though I have given them orders but after a moment they charge him together.


    ''Why did you have to leave your castle and come to us? You are dead now.'' I said to myself proudly.


    But contrary to my belief, he just chopped off three of my soldier''s head in one swing then go on killing them one by one.


    I can''t believe what I''m seeing.


    Every person that gets near him will be cut into two along with their armor and weapon.


    Those armors and weapons have the best enchantments. How can they break easily like that?


    None of their weapons even managed to touch him and they just get killed immediately.


    "That is not possible." I suddenly said out loud.


    I didn''t notice that I said something stupid and I can see my soldiers around me starting to panic.


    I have to do something.


    He already killed about half of my foot soldiers and he still keeps on going.


    "Archers! Nock your arrows!" I ordered my archers but they didn''t move and I can see in their eyes that they are questioning my command.


    "But captain, our foot soldiers are still fighting. We will hit them if we fire our arrows." The vice-captain suddenly protested.The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.


    "I don''t care! I said NOCK YOUR ARROWS!" I shouted as loud as I can and even though they still reluctant on following my order, they ready their bows.


    "DRAW!" They pulled back the strings of their bows.


    I can hear someone in the archers muttering ''Forgive me'' but I ignored him. I don''t care about your lives. I only care about mine.


    "LOOSE!"


    A volley of arrows was seen flying towards the general direction of the target but he didn''t even bother to cover himself with his shield.


    All the arrows managed to hit someone but the person I want to get hit didn''t even have a scratch. The arrows that managed to hit him just bounce off his armor.


    I can see most of my foot soldiers died because of the arrows. I can also see some of them managed to survive and now on the ground crying for help.


    I started to panic.


    "FIRE AT WILL! FIRE AT WILL!" I quickly shouted to my archers.


    This is not a human being we are facing.


    This is a monster.


    I can see arrows being fired but he just keeps on standing still and just let the arrow hit him.


    He is still unhurt and some of the arrows being shot managed to finish off the injured foot soldiers.


    All of my foot soldiers are now dead on the ground. All 30 of them.


    I can see him starting to walk here.


    He just casually keeps walking and the arrows didn''t even slow him down like they are just slow breeze of air touching his body.


    "Who is that!? That is not a human! That is a monster! I don''t want to die here!" I can hear my vice-captain saying this and he is starting to turn around and run.


    All of my mounted soldiers also started to follow him.


    "TRAITORS! I WILL GET YOU PUNISHED FOR THIS!" I shouted at them but they didn''t listen.


    I turn my head back front and see him already in front of us.


    How did he get here so quick? I also didn''t hear any footsteps like his feet is not even touching the ground.


    He started killing my archers and it didn''t take long before all them are dead.


    I steered my horse around to also start running but my horse suddenly falls down.


    I hit the ground pretty hard and rolled for about 4 blocks.


    I quickly get back on my feet and see that my horse has an arrow on his head.


    I can also the blue man who is no longer holding a sword and shield but a blue bow on his hand.


    He is starting to walk towards me.


    ''I''m going to die''


    "Stop! I can pay you tons of emeralds!" I quickly said to him.


    There is no one in this world who doesn''t like money but he didn''t answer me and just keeps on walking.


    I have an iron sword but I don''t think it will work against this monster. I also don''t think my iron armor will protect me from him.


    "Don''t you know who I am? If you hurt me, you will face the wrath of the Xaerin Kingdom!" I suddenly started saying some nonsense things to him.


    I''m a nobody in the Kingdom of Xaerin. I didn''t even get to see the king the day I was knighted since they said that he has a lot of things to do but I know that was a lie. The king probably doesn''t want to waste time on likes of me.


    But this person didn''t know that. I can just bluff my way into this.


    But I can still see him walking towards me with a bow in his hand like my words mean nothing to him.


    ''I should start running.'' I said to myself.


    As I''m about to turn around to start running, he suddenly appeared in front of me.


    ''He is still 5 blocks away from me!''


    ''How did he get here so fast?!''


    But before I can find an answer to my question, I can see him raising his right hand to punch me.


    "NO!" I shouted as I tried to cover myself with my hands for the coming attack.


    ''Stop! I''m not supposed to die here!''


    ******* Queen Arachne''s POV *******


    ''He is as ruthless as the day I met him.'' I said this to myself while watching things from a distance.


    I heard from one of my children that there is an army approaching the castle of the lonely king and quickly run to see what he will do.


    He didn''t disappoint me.


    I thought he gone soft since I heard he help a lot of people that recently stumbled in his territory.


    Good.


    This is the Forest of Monsters. Only monsters are allowed to live here.


    I turn around and started running back to my territory.


    The world is starting to get interesting.


    I lived for centuries and has already forgotten my exact age but this person managed to grab my attention.


    I wonder what he will do in the future?


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    ''This is not a battle. This is a massacre.'' I said this to myself as I stared at the dead bodies on the ground.


    He is like the embodiment of death. He doesn''t discriminate. He killed everybody even the one who tried to surrendered.


    They didn''t get the chance to hit him with their weapons.


    I was worried when I see that they about to shoot arrows at him but they didn''t even scratch him.


    There is nothing but silence now.


    Quite a moment has already passed that the smell of the blood has already managed to get to the place I''m standing.


    I can see Lord Carolus just standing in the middle of the battlefield.


    "ARTHUR! MY HORSE!" I suddenly heard him shouting at me while still staring at the direction where the routed enemies went.


    What? Horse?


    Oh. Right.


    It took me a while to understand what he meant.


    I started running down the stairs and quickly headed towards the stables.


    I see the horse here and immediate ride on back and moved towards the gate.


    I got down the horse and run towards the lever that controls the bridge to pull it and quickly open the gate.


    I immediate got back on the horse after opening the gate and quickly moved forward.


    I was having trouble concentrating on controlling the horse since I keep seeing dead people in pieces around me but the horse just keeps moving forward like he is already used to this kind of scene.


    "Your horse, my lord." I quickly said to him after getting down the horse and offer him the reins.


    He quickly grabbed the rein from my hand and got on the horse.


    "I didn''t kill that guy so grab him and lock him up in the dungeon." He said while pointing on the guy who is on the ground.


    I can no longer see the caring lord I know. I can only see a man who wants his enemies dead.


    I didn''t answer him and just nod my head.


    "Also call your people to clean this place up and make sure to burn the bodies. I don''t want the blood to attract monsters and make sure to loot everything in their inventory first. Just store the items you gathered in the storage room." He just casually ordered to me.


    I didn''t answer him and just started to look around the area.


    I''m used to seeing dead bodies and I even killed plenty of people but this is my first time seeing them in pieces.


    He wants me and my people to clean this?


    "Arthur?" he asked me after a while since I didn''t answer his question.


    "Yes, Lord Carolus," I answered him while bowing my head after a moment.


    I raised my head and continue staring at the bodies.


    After a while, I turn my head towards him and see that the horse is already wearing a blue armor.


    ''I wonder what his armor and weapon made of? None of the enemies'' weapons managed to hurt him and he killed them so swiftly.'' I suddenly asked myself.


    He stared his eyes towards me for a moment then he kicked his horse to move it forward.


    The horse started running and I was surprised to see that the horse can move that fast.


    With that speed, I''m pretty sure they can''t outrun him.

 Episode 16: First Human Battle (3)

    ******* Carolus'' POV ********


    Never thought in my entire life that I will become a murderer.


    I follow all the laws back in my world. Paid my taxes. Do everything I can to help society.


    But right now, I''m chasing down some people who are trying to run away from me to kill them.


    There no turning back now.


    Killing is inevitable in this world. I learned that from all the monster I killed just to survive.


    I have to take care of the people that are running away since I heard from that guy that I will face the wrath of Xaerin Kingdom if I hurt him. Can''t have any of them escape to tell what happened here.


    ''Come on. Where are they?'' I ask myself after a while since I still don''t see any of them.


    They can''t be far.


    It is really hard to see anything since the forest is so thick.


    ''There! I see one.'' I told myself after seeing one of the soldiers who is riding his horse and started chasing him.


    I also began to see other soldiers in front of him.


    They are all running in the same direction.


    Luckily, they didn''t decide to split up otherwise it will be hard to track them all down.


    I pulled an arrow in the inventory and ready to shoot my bow.


    I pulled the string and aim at the last person on the back.


    Then I fired.


    The arrow hit the head of the soldier and immediately fall down in his horse.


    Other soldiers suddenly noticed what is happening and they began screaming and frantically kicking their horses to move them faster.


    But they can''t outrun my horse.


    I noticed that my horse can run twice as fast as theirs. I believe the reason for this is this horse lives in the middle of Forest of Monsters and learned to adapt to survive.


    I decided to put away my bow and just used my sword since it is really hard to aim while riding a speeding horse.


    I began to get closer to the soldiers.


    They didn''t even bother to look behind them or tried to defend themselves. They are probably so afraid of dying and just focused on escaping.


    I can hear their plea and cries but I ignored them and just swing my sword to the nearest person.


    It is instant death.


    Their cries are getting louder but I just keep on swinging my sword.


    It took a while to kill the rest of them since they started running away in different directions but I still managed to catch them one by one except for the last one.


    He managed to stay quiet ahead of me and I didn''t notice since I''m too busy with the other soldiers.


    The last soldier is screaming something about a ''blue monster'' but I ignored him and just halted my horse to stop.


    I put away my sword and ready my bow.


    Space ahead doesn''t have a lot of trees and the target is quite clear.


    I practice my bow every day so I''m confident that I can hit this guy in this distance.


    I pulled an arrow from my inventory and ready to fire.


    As I pulled the string of the bow and aim, I suddenly think of something.


    ''Maybe I should let this guy go and let him tell the story.''


    Sooner or later, problems will occur if I decided to let Arthur and his people stay in my place. The people after them are desperate enough that they send someone to chase them inside this forest.


    This way, they will start to think otherwise to send another group.


    I put away my bow and arrow and just watch the last survivor galloping away in the field.


    Arthur said that they took 3 weeks to reach my territory so it will probably take that guy about 2 to 3 days to get out of this forest since he is on horseback.Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    I turn around the horse and started to go back.


    I also have to clean the bodies and loot their belongings though I don''t have enough space in my inventory if ever I want to take all their loot.


    I just have to make a chest and place it here somewhere and just make trips to store the items.


    I can also just use lava to destroy the bodies since I have lava buckets in my inventory from my obsidian mining. I just have to dig a hole, place the lava and throw the bodies in.


    After a while, the looting is unsuccessful since they don''t have anything useful in them so I didn''t even bother to collect the items. Even though I like hoarding things even how useless they are, I just don''t feel like doing it today.


    After destroying the bodies, I didn''t collect back the lava and just covered up the hole. The lava will probably turn into obsidian after awhile even without pouring water on them.


    I also decided to gather the horses that are left behind by their masters to bring them back home. They are about 8 of them so they will be very useful.


    ''I wonder how Arthur and his people feel about the things I''ve done?'' This is what I''m thinking while I''m starting to travel home.


    ******** Arthur''s POV ********


    I''m staring at the "unconscious" man in front of me.


    Lord Carolus said that he didn''t kill him but I highly doubt it since he looks like he is already dead.


    I crouch on the body and put my ear on his chest to see if I can hear a heartbeat.


    Even with the armor on, I can faintly hear a steady thumping.


    He is still alive.


    I put him on my shoulder to carry him and began walking towards the castle.


    I didn''t have problems carrying him even though he is quite heavy since he is still wearing his armor.


    I didn''t lower the bridge or closed the gate since we still have to clean the bodies.


    Lord Carolus said that the blood will attract the monsters but there still a lot of time before the sun goes down so there is nothing to worry about.


    I tried opening the castle keep door but it locked.


    I started knocking but there was no answer.


    I began to worry and was about to use the key to open the door when suddenly it opened.


    "Oh! It is just you Arthur. I thought you were someone else." I see Peyton with a huge relief on his face.


    "What happened Arthur and who is that man you are carrying?" He asked me while staring at the man I was carrying.


    I didn''t answer him and just look past him to look for the others.


    "They are fine. There on the second floor." He said after seeing me looking around the first floor.


    "Tell everyone that it is already safe and they can come out now," I said to him after walking past him and started heading towards the stairs of the basement.


    "What? What do you mean it is already safe? What happened to the army?" He asked me and I can see his mouth turning into a frown.


    "You can all see for yourself," I answered him without turning to face him.


    I suddenly remembered what happened a while ago.


    I still can''t believe the things that happened but I dismissed it in my mind since the most important thing right now is that my people are safe.


    I can see Peyton still have a lot of questions but thankfully, he started walking up the stairs to tell everyone.


    I managed to reach the basement but started to think about where to put this guy.


    Most of the rooms here are empty so I can just put him anywhere in these rooms but Lord Carolus said to put him in the dungeon so he is probably meant the prison cells but there is a zombie in one of those cells.


    I don''t want to put this guy near a monster but I suddenly remembered that this man I''m carrying is here to hurt my people and started walking towards the prison room.


    I opened the door of the prison room and see the zombie is laying on the ground on his cell.


    He saw us and quickly got up and started banging on the bars.


    I ignored him and just went to the cell beside him and opened the door.


    I didn''t bother to put the man down on the ground carefully and just toss him in his cell.


    I managed to remove all of his armor and take his items in his inventory since he is still unconscious.


    I remembered that this guy name is Merek and just stared at him for a moment.


    ''What did my people do for him to chase us all the way here?'' I asked myself about this.


    After a while, I locked the cell door and double checked the lock. I don''t want this guy to escape. The cell door is meticulously made so he can''t probably open the door by picking the lock though I doubt this guy knows about picking locks.


    I also locked the prison door room and started to walk back outside.


    I see most of my people standing near the gate.


    I can see them staring at the carnage and their faces are full of horror.


    Thankfully, I didn''t see any of the children here. They are probably left behind on the second floor.


    "Did you do this Arthur?" Peyton quickly asked me the moment I reach him.


    "Do you really think I''m capable of this?" I didn''t answer his question and just asked him.


    ''Did the old man really think that I''m the one who did this?''


    He stared at me for a moment and return his eyes on the dead bodies littered on the ground.


    He probably already guessed what happened here.


    "Lord Carolus said that we need to clean these bodies otherwise we will attract monsters." The moment I said this, I can all of their face turn from horror to disgust.


    "Look. I understand your reactions but we need to get rid of the bodies and I can''t do it alone." I said to them while started walking to the nearest corpse.


    All of them still have a lot of questions about what happened but thankfully, they started moving.


    Lord Carolus said to burn the bodies so we started placing oak logs on the ground and started piling up the bodies on top.


    Most of my people are still disgusted on touching the bodies and even some of them managed to puke but they still keep on working. They are probably motivated since they heard that monsters will start coming if we don''t clean this.


    We also cleaned the blood on the ground using water from the moat.


    After gathering the bodies, I light up the logs using flint and steel and watched the bodies slowly burn away.


    I can see Lord Carolus in the distance slowly coming here with ropes in his hand and a lot of horses towing on his back.


    I quickly ordered my people to help him with the horses.


    He then built a larger stable beside the small one to put the horses in.


    We are all surprised by how quick he built it.


    I didn''t actually believe him when he said that he built this castle all by himself but now I do.


    "Are you a soldier Arthur?" He suddenly asked me after building the horse stable.


    "ˇ­ Yes. A long time ago, my lord." I don''t know why he suddenly asked me this question but I still answered him.


    "I see. Then have you experienced on interrogating a prisoner?"


    "You want me to interrogate the prisoner?" I was surprised that he suddenly asked me this.


    "Ask him about what happened with the Kingdom of Astikuviel and why there are soldiers of Xaerin Kingdom here. You can also ask him any other questions. I leave the interrogation to you." He ordered me and he started walking towards the keep.


    "Yes, Lord Carolus."


    "I''ll be in my room if you need me."


    I stared at him while he is walking.


    ''He knows about the two of the Five Great Kingdoms.''


    I started to wonder what other things he knows.

 Episode 17: First Human Battle (4)

    ******* Carolus'' POV ********


    I''m in my room right now cleaning the blood off my armor and weapon.


    I still can hear their cries and screams but I just keep on cleaning.


    I remember that it is really easy to kill things in the game but it is quite different when the people you are killing beg for mercy.


    Damn.


    I''m sure I will be having nightmares from now on but I have to get past this since I still have a lot of things to do.


    I still haven''t found that woman ask her to send me home though I''m not sure where to start looking for her.


    I also have to go to the nether quickly and gather the necessary materials for health potions.


    The two injured people are still fine but it is better to make sure.


    I''m not sure what I''m going to face once I''m finished building the portal but I have to do it. There are also other things I want to gather in the nether.


    I take off my shirt to see if there is any blood on it. Thankfully, there is none.


    I threw my shirt on the bed and take out a bucket of water to start cleaning myself when suddenly I heard someone knocking on the door.


    It is probably Arthur since he is the only one here that is talking to me. All of the other people are hesitant to approach me.


    "Come in." I didn''t bother putting my shirt back on and just continue cleaning myself.


    ******** Arthur''s POV ********


    "Come in." I heard Lord Carolus voice and quickly opened the door.


    I saw him with his shirt off and he is busy cleaning himself.


    "Sorry, my lord. I''m just going to leave and be back later once you are done." I said while slightly bowing my head.


    "No. Come inside." I was about to close the door when he suddenly stopped me.


    I went inside and noticed something on his left shoulder.


    A scar.


    It is very big. About the size of a spearhead.


    I''m not believing what I''m seeing.


    What kind of monster that managed to hurt Lord Carolus?


    I can''t imagine anything that can touch him since I witnessed him do those things just a while ago.


    "You curious about this?" He asked me while pointing at his left shoulder since he saw me keep staring at his scar.


    I was a loss for words and just nodded my head.


    He stopped cleaning himself and put down his towel.


    He was silent for a moment.


    "You don''t have to tell me, my lord." I quickly said to him since it is none of my business even though I''m really curious.


    "Stupidity." He said after a while.


    What? Stupidity?


    "This happened because of my stupidity." He sounded hurt and he looks like he is remembering a really painful memory.


    I was about to ask him what happened but I stopped myself.


    I started to see him as an invincible being but he is still a human and all humans have a bad dream they want to wake up to.


    "How are your people doing Arthur?"


    "What? Oh. They are doing just fine, my lord." I was suddenly snapped out of my thought by his question.


    "I''m surprised you are all still here after what just happened."


    I was silent for a moment.


    All of my people saw the bodies but they didn''t say anything. Probably because they thought that Lord Carolus did those things to protect us or they just don''t want to complain since they got nowhere to go.


    "Why are you here Arthur?" He suddenly asked me since I just remain quiet.


    "I''m here to ask about the prisoner, my lord. How do you want me to handle the interrogation?"


    "I believe I already told you to handle it yourself."


    "You mean I can do whatever I want to get the information?"


    "Yes." His straight answer and unwavering tone flinched me for a moment.This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    I''m bowed my head and leave his room.


    I started heading to the basement to begin my interrogation.


    I have plenty of experience interrogating a prisoner though I wonder how Lord Carolus know about it.


    He also seems to know that I was a soldier. He probably thought about it since he saw my iron spear.


    I reached the prison room and opened the door.


    I can see that the prisoner is still unconscious and I can also see the zombie beside his cell is trying to break the bars that separate them to attack him.


    I take out a bottle of water in my inventory and started splashing water in the prisoner''s face.


    ******* Captain Merek''s POV ********


    I can feel the water splashing on my face.


    I started to open my eyes and saw a stone ceiling.


    I realized that I''m no longer in a grassy field.


    I immediately got up and started looking around to know where I am.


    "There you are. Took you a lot of water to wake you up." I suddenly heard a voice coming from behind me and quickly turn around.


    I saw the spearman.


    After seeing him, I suddenly remembered what happened.


    "Where is he?"


    I remembered how that blue man killed all of my people. The way he chopped them all into pieces.


    I started shaking.


    "Oh. Do you mean Lord Carolus? He is in his room cleaning the blood of your people off of his body." He just casually said.


    I started panicking and quickly look around to find a way out of here but I realized that I''m in a prison cell.


    I also heard a banging sound and saw someone on the other side of the bars.


    It is a zombie.


    My panic rose even higher and I started screaming.


    I quickly run to the door and started banging to escape.


    "Don''t worry. The bars separating you are made of iron so it will be near impossible to break unless you have an iron pickaxe." He just said to me probably to calm me down but I''m still panicking.


    I''m still banging on the door until I realized something.


    The door is strangely really sturdy.


    "Yes. The door is also made of iron. How about you calm down now so I can begin asking questions."


    "Calm down? How can a commoner like you order me around?" I quickly said to him while pointing my hand at him.


    "Did you really still not realized where you are and what just happened to you?" He asked me a question while starting to get closer to the cell.


    I didn''t answer and just keep staring at him.


    "Good. You finally stayed silent. Lord Carolus kept you alive so he can ask you some questions."


    "Lord Carolus? You mean that blue monster!?"


    "Careful with your words. He might hear you." He said to me in an intimidating tone.


    I stayed silent again.


    "He said to me that I can do anything I want to extract the information from you but I don''t want to hurt you." He said this while I see him constantly switching items holding in his hand.


    All of the items I saw are used for farming and tending animals but the way he is handling them is terrifying.


    "You will answer all of my questions, right?" He asked while staring at me with his scary eyes.


    He is now holding shears in his hand.


    I quickly nodded my head.


    "Good. Now. Why are you and your people here?"


    "The general ordered me and my people to capture all of you."


    "What? Your general sent you even into this forest? He probably thinks you and your people are disposable." He said to me in a mocking tone.


    My emotions quickly flared up and I was about to start screaming at him but I managed to stop myself. He is actually right.


    He keeps asking me more questions and I just answered all of them.


    ******* Arthur''s POV ********


    Well. Thankfully this guy is cooperative and I managed to get the information Lord Carolus wants otherwise I have to resort on much meaner method.


    I was about to leave but I remembered what Lord Carolus said.


    ''You can ask him anything you want.''


    "There is also something else I want to know, Merek."


    He looked at me and he looks like he is annoyed that I''m not done questioning him.


    "I want to know about what did you do with my people that you captured."


    He didn''t answer and just keeps on staring at me.


    "Merek?" I asked him since he still not talking.


    I was starting to lose patience and was about to open the cell door when suddenly he started to speak.


    "I don''t know about your people but all of the prisoners captured by the kingdom is immediately sold to a slaver in the southern kingdom."


    "What!?" I suddenly shouted at him.


    He was so surprised and quickly took a step back.


    "Even the women and children?" I ask him and was hoping he will say no.


    "...Yes."


    ''No. This can''t be happening.''


    They sold my people to a slaver and worse of all it is a slaver in the southern kingdom.


    ''What have they done? Goddess, please help them. Don''t turn your back onto us.'' I prayed to the only being I know that will listen to me.


    My anger is now uncontainable.


    I keep thinking about the horrible things that are happening to my people at the hands of the slavers.


    I started walking to the cell beside Merek.


    "Wait. What are you doing?" I suddenly heard Merek asking me a question but I ignored him.


    I opened the door of the cell of the zombie.


    I also opened the door of Merek''s cell.


    Then, I started walking to the exit.


    "Wait! It is not my fault! It was the order of the king! War is expensive and he can''t think of a better way to profit!" I can hear him shouting things at me but I just keep on walking.


    I opened the prison door and slowly stepped outside.


    Once outside, I locked the prison door and I can hear Merek''s screams.


    I ignored it since it is nothing compared to was is happening to my people right now.


    I turn around and leaned my back on the door.


    I didn''t realize that tears are starting to fall in my eyes.


    ******* Skeleton King''s POV *******


    "My king. I have returned."


    I can see my soldier getting off his skeleton horse and immediately kneel on the ground.


    I''m sitting in my throne right now waiting for the news from the scout I sent.


    The moment night comes, I quickly ordered to sent someone to know what happened to the army approaching that man''s territory.


    "Speak."


    "I can''t see clearly what really happened my king since you ordered us to keep a distance to that man''s territory but I saw a remnant of a battle though I''m not sure since it was thoroughly cleaned. The army traveling to the man''s territory was probably an enemy to him and killed them all."


    "Of course, he did."


    That man suddenly invaded this fortress alone one day.


    We furiously attacked him but he just killed all my soldiers that dared approach him.


    He didn''t stop killing until I ordered my soldiers to back off so I can handle him myself but I was shocked to see his appearance.


    He is wearing armor and wielding a weapon that I never thought I will see again.


    We keep staring on each other for a while until I asked him who is he.


    He didn''t answer and just turned around and walked away.


    He probably attacked this fortress to make a statement that he wants to live in this forest since I heard that he also attacked the Queen of giant spiders and the Giant Zombie.


    "You said it was cleaned so you mean he destroyed the bodies?" I ask the soldier after remembering what happened that day.


    "Yes. He probably burnt them."


    "Pity. What a waste of good soldiers. Those people will probably do well in our army."


    I still don''t have enough soldiers in my army.


    There is also a problem with that man.


    He started killing the soldiers that I placed around the forest caves near his territory.


    That was probably his way of telling he doesn''t want anybody nearby his home.


    Well, I could just gather more dead humans to turn into skeletons in the nearby human villages.


    Once I have the resources I need, I will quickly initiate my plan. My plan to rule this world once again.


    Humans have probably forgotten about me but I will tell them, no, I will remind them who I was.


    I was known as the Skeleton King. Ruler of the Overworld.

 Episode 18: The Nether Journey (1)

    ******* Queen Thea''s POV *******


    "My Queen, the battle is over and the enemies are completely routed." The general of my army said while bowing at me.


    "Good," I said while staring at the burnt village in front of me.


    ''I wonder if he is all right?'' I suddenly asked myself.


    I can''t believe the things the Kingdom of Xaerin has done.


    They tried to conquer the western cities of my kingdom but failed so they decided to start raiding small villages. They looted and burned down every village in their path. They even reach the village in the furthest east near the Forest of Monsters.


    The kingdom doesn''t have enough soldiers to take on the field to repel the enemies so most of the nobles just decided to hole up in their castles but not me.


    I can''t take any more news about villages being burnt down so I decided to gather up as much of soldiers that I can possibly muster in the capital and quickly head into the battlefield.


    I only have 500 soldiers with me but all of them are mounted knights and have the best leather armors and stone weapons. 100 of them are my personal guards so they are equipped with iron armors and iron weapons. I also have a very experienced general leading the army.


    All of my vassals said that I''m crazy about leaving the capital and not thinking about the future of the kingdom but I ignored them all.


    The general also said that I don''t have to join the battle but I can no longer sit on my throne while I let others fight battles for me.


    The nobles in this kingdom are really selfish. They didn''t even let the refugees inside their castles and closed their gates shut.


    The people are the foundation of this kingdom. How can they just turn blind with their suffering and not provide them any aide?


    "We also caught a prisoner coming from the Forest of Monsters. He is a weird one though." The general said while staring at the forest beyond the burnt village.


    "Weird one?" I stared at him with a bewildered look.


    "Yes, my queen. He keeps saying that a blue monster is chasing him to kill him though we didn''t see anyone following him." He said while looking at the forest past the burnt village.


    "Blue monster? Just ignore him and execute him like the rest."


    "Yes, my queen."


    I don''t like executing people without a trial but these people don''t deserve a chance. They ravaged small villages and enslaved innocent people. Even with my kind nature, I can no longer ignore all the things they have done.


    All of them also said that all of the people that are enslaved are sold to the slavers in the southern kingdom.


    Bastards.


    I can''t imagine what kind of horror my people are facing.


    I have to find a way to save them.


    I can''t waste any more time talking about a crazy person that came from the forest.


    I started moving my horse on the battlefield.


    I can see lots and lots of dead enemy soldiers in the ground.


    How can their king order his soldiers to burn down innocent people houses?


    The greed of the King of Xaerin knows no bound.


    He keeps invading other kingdoms to expand his dominion.


    The kingdom he attacks most is the kingdom I ruled. The Kingdom of Astikuviel.


    He just keeps on finding a reason to invade this kingdom. His latest excuse is that the current ruler is not of noble''s blood and don''t deserve to rule.


    My father and mother are both commoners.


    They said that my father died when I was young on a monster invasion so my mother decided to take up the marriage proposal of one of the kingdom''s prince.


    My mother has quite a beauty and managed to get the attention of one of the princes in the kingdom. She keeps on refusing the marriage proposal at first but she was worried about me and wanted to give me a better life.


    The reason that I''m the current ruler is that there is no one left alive to appoint to rule.


    All of the royalty is now dead defending the kingdom from human and monster invasions. Even my only half brother is also dead defending the kingdom from the southern invasion and my stepfather from defending the east border from monster invasions.This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    I''m the only left that can be crowned since I''m a royal princess by name.


    There is a lot of people opposed to giving me the crown. Some of them even tried to take over the throne by force.


    I planned to refuse the throne because of a lot of conflicts but decided to accept it.


    I need this power and authority if ever I want to find my father. My mother''s dying wish is to know what really happened to him. I just need to take care of all of the invaders first.


    I looked around and notice something weird.


    They said that the Kingdom of Xaerin has sent more than 3000 soldiers to invade but there are only about 200 dead bodies here and they are equipped with the cheapest equipment.


    Where are the rest of them?


    "My queen! An enemy is approaching in the north. There is about a thousand of them!" A messenger suddenly appeared and gave terrible news.


    "What?"


    Another two messengers appeared and also gave terrible news.


    Three armies are coming from the north, west, and south.


    Each army has about a thousand soldiers in them.


    I see.


    This was a trap.


    My name in the kingdom is synonymous with kindness since I spend most of the kingdom''s treasury to feed all the poor. All of the nobles said I''m not fit to rule and keep asking me to give up the throne and hand it to them but I ignored them and even cut back the expenses for the kingdom''s military.


    The King of Xaerin probably knows I won''t stand by and let my people suffer.


    "My queen. We will do everything we can to get past them so make sure to take that chance to run away and get back to the capital." The general said this and started giving orders to the army.


    "No. Tell the army to prepare to move." I ordered him after thinking for a while.


    The general suddenly looked at me with confusion.


    "What are you talking about, your grace? We are surrounded and got nowhere to go."


    "We can run east and prepare to fight them there."


    The general didn''t answer and just stared at me with a horrified look.


    His reaction is understandable since there is nothing but monsters in that forest but we have nowhere to run.


    I don''t want my army to fight a losing battle and just sacrifice themselves to save me.


    Even though the enemy of my enemy is also my enemy, we can use the monsters in the forest as a distraction to be able to fight the enemy back and kill them all. All of the soldiers in my kingdom have experience fighting monsters so we have an advantage over the enemies in that forest though I''m not sure if this is a brilliant idea.


    "Also, don''t kill that prisoner you said came from the forest. We still need him." I quickly said to my general while starting to give orders to the army to start moving east since the general just turn quiet.


    The general is still silent but after a while, he followed my orders and prepared the entire army to move.


    I looked to my army one last time before heading out.


    I hope I''m making the right decision.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    It took a couple of days to gather enough obsidian to build the portal room.


    The portal itself only needed around 10 obsidian to build but I decided to enclosed the entire room with obsidian.


    I don''t want any dangerous beings on the other side of the portal walking freely in the overworld.


    I also built the portal room in the basement for added security since it will take a couple more iron doors for the enemies to break down before they can enter this world.


    I was worried at first about being able to breathe since the room is fully enclosed but it seems that when you open up the portal, it is automatically connected to the other side and there is a breathable air there.


    In the game, it takes a while before you transported to the nether when you step in the portal but here, you can immediately see the other side. This is the primary reason I decided to cover the entire room with obsidian.


    After inspecting my inventory for the tenth time to make sure I didn''t forget anything, I started walking inside the portal room. I leave a 2-block hole on the side of the room so I can just walk in and out and deactivated the portal for the meantime.


    "I don''t know why are you willing to go this far to help my people my lord but I hope you have a safe journey," Arthur said while bowing.


    "I''m leaving you in charge of my territory. I hope you don''t turn anyone into a zombie while I''m away."


    He flinched after hearing me.


    "Of course, my lord." He bowed again but this time he bent his body so low.


    Bloody Arthur.


    He went crazy and feed my prisoner to a zombie.


    I know his reason for doing it but man, he is one crazy bastard.


    I also feel sorry for his people that been sold to slavery.


    I should try and save them after gathering things in the nether though I need to focused on finding a way back to my world.


    Well, there is a good thing about having two zombies waiting to be cured. I can know if they turn into a different person once there are cured though I doubt that will happen. I just have to try and find out for myself.


    Arthur and his people will probably be fine while I''m away.


    I gave Arthur my enchanted diamond spear and also gave him an enchanted iron armor.


    My spear has all the enchantments I could possibly put so I''m sure he can kill anything that dared to attack this place. I just hope that the three giant monsters won''t invade this castle.


    I also named the spear Excalibur for some reason. I thought it would be funny since this guy''s name is Arthur.


    I was thinking of giving him a different kind of weapon but decided on a spear since he is quite skilled at it.


    The armor is also enchanted to highest enchantment you can put on iron armor. I was going to craft him an entire set of diamond armor but I don''t have enough diamond in my inventory.


    The mine shaft is also about to run out of resources to mine so I''m not sure where to gather more ores and diamonds. I decided to mine only within my territory since I don''t want to accidentally run into trouble like what happened with the zombie tunnels.


    I stared in the portal for a moment before turning around to cover the hole in the room with obsidian.


    I also place the missing obsidian in the portal and activate the portal using flint and steel.


    The portal slowly shines purple until it became clearer and I can now see the other side.


    I can see fire, lava, and other things but luckily, there are no hostile mobs nearby.


    I took a deep breath.


    The smell I keep smelling coming from the nether is not pleasant but I ignored it and just equipped my armor and weapon.


    I don''t know how far I''m going to travel to find a nether fortress to hunt a blaze. I don''t even know if nether fortresses or blazes exist in this world since I can''t find information about them anywhere.


    I planned on bringing my horse to the nether but decided not to since I don''t want him to accidentally fall into lava and die. I also don''t want to die with him. I just have to do this by walking.


    I wonder how long will I take before I can get back home? I hope I can find a blaze quickly.


    After checking the inventory for the last time, I started walking towards the portal.

 Episode 19: The Nether Journey (2)

    ******* Arthur''s POV ********


    I''m staring at the obsidian room Lord Carolus built in the basement.


    Lord Carolus probably already went to the nether dimension.


    I don''t know what is this nether dimension he is speaking off. This is my first time hearing about it.


    I also didn''t know that obsidian can be mined. It is said to be the hardest block in this world but it seems it is no match for Lord Carolus.


    I started walking to get back to my duties.


    He entrusted me with looking after his territory so I have to make sure that I won''t fail him.


    He gave me his very own spear and an iron armor to protect my people and this place.


    I stopped walking for a moment then took out the spear in my inventory and held it in my hand.


    I don''t know what it is made of since he didn''t explain anything and just hand it to me but I can feel so much power coming from the spear. It seems like this weapon will able to penetrate any living being.


    The iron armor he also gave me is enchanted with so many enchantments.


    It is a lot better than the iron armor I used to wear when I was still a knight of the kingdom.


    I put away the spear and started walking again.


    I went past the door of the prison room and can hear two zombies groaning.


    I still can''t believe I did those things.


    After feeding Merek to a zombie, I immediately went to lord Carolus to let him know what I did and beg him to punish me but he just asked me to explain what happened and what information I managed to know from Merek.


    After hearing my explanations for a while, he just asked me to leave the room so he can rest.


    I don''t know what his plan is with Merek after getting information from him but I can''t believe he just let the matter go so easily like what I did is natural.


    I reached the outside of the keep and was planning to go to the farm to know how my people are doing when suddenly I can hear someone screaming from the south wall.


    I ordered some of my people to patrol the walls to make sure no one can sneak up on us.


    I quickly equipped my armor and spear and run towards the south.


    I was about to climb the stairs to get on top of the wall when suddenly I saw something jumps then lands on the ground inside.


    It is a giant spider. Much bigger than the regular ones.


    ''How could I let this happened?'' I said to myself since I can''t believe I just let a giant monster inside lord Carolus'' castle.


    I should attack it while I can still see it''s back.


    I ready my spear and preparing to charge.


    "Careful there, little soldier. I don''t want unnecessary blood spilled on the ground."


    What? It can talk? With a voice of woman too.


    I was so surprised to see a talking monster but I still held my spear tightly in my hand.


    "I''m just here to have a conversation with the lonely king. Can tell him about my arrival." She said after a moment since there is nothing but silence and turned around to face me.


    "Lonely king? You mean Lord Carolus?" I managed to utter words since I''m still shocked by what I''m seeing.


    What would this monster want with Lord Carolus? She is also speaking about him like they knew each other for a long time and just came to visit.


    "Oh. So that is his name. Interesting."


    She looked at me with her multiple scary eyes but I stood my ground and didn''t let my guard down.


    I don''t know what this creature is a connection with Lord Carolus but I noticed she called him king.


    I didn''t know that he was a king.


    I keep calling him my lord. I wonder why he didn''t correct me? He probably has a reason for it.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    "He is not here and has gone to the nether dimension to gather some things," I told her after thinking for a while.


    I''m not going to just tell anybody about King Carolus location but I don''t know if I can beat this monster even with my new weapon so I just have to play along for now till I get chance to slay this being.


    "Oh. Did he leave to the nether? To the hell? I never thought I can find someone who knows about that place. I thought that place has already forgotten by mankind."


    She is saying a lot of things I don''t understand but she said something that bothered me.


    "Hell? What do you mean hell?" I asked her with a worrying tone.


    "He didn''t tell you about what the nether dimension is? It is a place full of lava and fire. That dimension is filled with monsters much more terrifying than what you see in this world that''s why you can also call it hell. Only people who want to die will go to that place."


    What?


    Based on what I heard, the nether dimension is a really dangerous place.


    Why would King Carolus go there?


    If I have known about this, I should have stopped him from going.


    Maybe I should chase after him though I don''t know if I can break the obsidian surrounding the portal.


    What should I do?


    "Hahaha. Based on your reaction, you are really worried about him." I suddenly heard the giant spider''s laughter and voice and managed to snap me out in my deep thought.


    I curse myself for letting my guard down for a moment.


    "You don''t have to worry about him. He is a monster just like me. I almost feel sorry for all the beings who will stand in his way."


    ''He is nothing like you'' I managed to stop myself from saying this out loud.


    "Well, it doesn''t matter. I just came here to tell him about the army coming in this forest."


    "What army?"


    "My children said to me that there more than 3 thousands of them heading straight in this castle. About 500 of them are riding horses and already quite ahead of the rest."


    "Why are you telling this information?" I asked since I don''t know about her motive.


    She didn''t answer and just stare at me for a while.


    "To tell you the truth, I don''t really know. I just feel like I have to tell the lonely king about this out of respect." She answered after a moment.


    I''m speechless.


    I don''t really know what to say or ask since the information she just said is outrageous. I''m having trouble processing all the things I just learned.


    "Guess it is time for me to go." The giant spider said and started climbing on the wall.


    "Wait!" I tried to stop her since I still have a lot of questions but she just ignored me and keep on climbing until he reaches the top and jumps off the wall.


    What is going on?


    Why there is an army heading in this direction?


    They can''t be after me and my people. We are nobody. Why the hell would they send thousands of them after us?


    She said that there are 500 of them hastily coming here. They are probably the vanguard of the army.


    ''My goddess, how I am supposed to tell King Carolus about this?''


    I just prayed to the goddess of all creation since I don''t really know what to do.


    ******* Carolus'' POV ********


    This place is much more terrifying than I thought.


    I''m so scared of even trying to take one step forward.


    It is also a lot different than in the game.


    For starters, the nether doesn''t have a ceiling.


    I don''t know the reason for this but I can a red sky above me but there is no sun or moon.


    How I am supposed to tell time here?


    I tried looking at the clock in my inventory but the clock doesn''t appear to be working. The compass is also just kept spinning around.


    I tried taking out a magic map to see if I can use this here.


    I tried looking at it and surprised to know that it is working.


    Thank heavens.


    I was worried about getting lost in a scary place and not able to find my way home though I have spare obsidians in my inventory in case something happens to the portal.


    Before starting my journey, I have to do something first.


    I turned around and start staring at the portal.


    I should build something to hide this portal.


    I started mining netherrack in the surrounding to build a man-made mountain to cover the portal.


    It was easy to mine the netherrack since it not as hard as stone. It only took one swing and it immediately breaks.


    I completely covered the portal with netherrack and placed an iron door on the side. I make sure the entrance is well hidden so that it will not be noticed from afar.


    My original plan was to build a temporary fortress or something but I don''t want to waste my time on that and I don''t have the necessary materials anyway with me build one.


    I climbed on top of the mountain I just built and started to look around.


    I can see fire and lava everywhere.


    Though I can''t feel the heat since I''m wearing my enchanted armor.


    I wonder what will happen if I take my armor off?


    I removed my armor and quickly regretted my decision.


    The heat is bearable but it is still excruciating.


    I tried looking at my status to see if my health is diminishing but luckily it is still 10 hearts.


    I feel like I''m inside a heated oven and I''m about to get baked.


    Well, I guess I just have to keep wearing my armor for the entire time here.


    I put my armor back on and started looking around the area.


    I saw a lot of quarts ores here on the ground and some glowstone.


    But what really surprised me is there is also gold ores here. I even saw a gold block near a lava lake. Gold blocks are made out of 9 gold ingots so there is quite a lot of gold here than in the overworld.


    I wonder why there is abundant gold in this dimension? I just mined them and store them in my inventory. I don''t know what I''m going to do with this amount since gold in this world doesn''t have a lot of uses. The hoarder side of me is starting to come back.


    I started collecting resources I can find while filling up the maps.


    I managed to gather a lot of resources that I have to build a temporary storage room in the portal mountain to store all of them. I just hope no one finds this place to steal my loot.


    I started to get bored and tired on mining resources so I just started traveling on a straight line to find a nether fortress or a blaze.


    I don''t really know how many hours have already passed since I lost track of the time.


    I decided to go back to the portal mountain and built a bedroom inside.


    I was reluctant on sleeping on the bed but I tried getting on the bed with armor on to see if it will explode. I don''t know really know why in the game, beds explode if you use it in the nether.


    Nothing happened.


    I exhaled quite a lot of air after knowing the bed won''t explode.


    I tried on removing my armor before sleeping but decided to keep it on since it is really hot in here.


    This is my first time sleeping with armor on.


    I could just get back inside the castle since I''m near the portal but I''m really tired of walking and gathering resources. I also don''t have any strength left to mine obsidian to get out of the basement.


    I just closed my eyes and tried to sleep.


    ''I hope nothing happens with Arthur and his people''

 Episode 20: The Nether Journey (3)

    ******* Queen Thea''s POV *******


    We have been traveling for 3 days in this forest.


    We are camping right now early in the morning and is about to march.


    We managed to kill some of the enemies but ultimately we got pushed deeper in the forest.


    I decided to cease fighting since we already got plenty of people injured and just start traveling east.


    The prisoner said that there is a castle there with a blue monster living in it.


    I don''t really believe him but what surprised me is that he also said that there were chasing some villagers that went into the forest.


    ''The Spearman is also seen in that castle.'' These words are what grabbed my attention the most.


    The spearman is probably him.


    I''m glad to know he is alright since I didn''t see him in the village. I was also worried he got captured and is already sold to slavery.


    "My queen. I have terrible news." I can hear a voice coming from behind me.


    I''m inside a temporary wooden house staring at a map along with my officers to start thinking about what to do next.


    I turned around and face the messenger.


    "Well, we already have plenty of problems so what is one more. What is it?" I asked while exhaling.


    I''m really tired of all of this and just want this to end.


    "The prisoner is dead." He was reluctant at first to talk but decided to say the news.


    "What?"


    "He probably died last night. He bit off his tongue and bleed out. I''m sorry my queen." He continued and now is bowing deeply towards me.


    The prisoner is dead.


    He was the only one that I can get information about this forest.


    What so terrifying about that blue monster he keeps on speaking?


    "We should head back west my queen and just fight our enemies head-on." I can hear my general saying some things but I just ignored him.


    There are already about 50 people who are injured and I''m not going to add more to them.


    I also don''t want anyone in my army to die for nothing.


    "Tell everyone to start packing up things and prepare to travel east," I turned around and ordered everyone in the room.


    "But my queen.."


    "Now." The general was about to protest but I quickly cut him off.


    We managed to distance ourselves from our enemies since all of us are in horseback so we are probably safe for about a couple of weeks.


    We were expecting to encounter thousands of monster here but only saw a few of them and ultimately none the deeper we go in this forest. I should say we got lucky but I was hoping to see plenty of them to even the odds with the Kingdom of Xaerin.


    I turned around and started walking outside the temporary house.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    I have been traveling for 3 days or so I think since I don''t have any way to keep track time and didn''t see any nether fortress or a single blaze or any other monsters.


    The only monsters I encountered are ghasts.


    I was so surprised on seeing them and just hide for a moment.


    My plan was to fight them by sending its explosive projectile they shoot back at them but decided to play it safe and just use a bow from a distance.


    I managed to kill about 3 of them and gathered plenty of ghast tears and explosive powder.


    I wonder why gun powder is called explosive powder here? It is probably because they are no guns in this world.


    I''m glad I finally found some explosive powder.


    I didn''t find any creepers in the overworld that I started to wonder if they really exist but they are mentioned in Oliver''s research book so humans turning into green explosive monsters is probably really rare.


    I can use this explosive powder to craft some explosive arrows or TNT but I don''t have any sand with me so I decided to just craft all of them into explosive arrows.Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!


    Yeah! Now I can blow up things into pieces.


    I didn''t know why I got excited about having explosive arrows.


    I''m started to worry about myself that I''m starting to lose my humanity. I''m too battle-hardened now from all the fight that I fought.


    The ghast tears can also be used for brewing potion of regeneration and other things. Now all I need right now is a brewing stand.


    I leave my third tempory home I built to start traveling again. I built a couple of them in a considerable distance of one and another since it is impractical to keep coming back to the portal just to rest.


    I was walking for a couple of hours and was traveling along a valley when suddenly I was stopped by someone.


    I''m pretty sure that is a zombie pigman.


    There are two of them.


    They saw me and ready their golden swords.


    Zombie pigmen are usually not aggressive in the game unless they are provoked but I have to assume that it is not the same here.


    I also ready my sword and shield.


    "Who are you? It doesn''t matter. Give up all your belongings and come with us." I suddenly heard one of the pigmen talking.


    What? They can talk?


    It seems talking monsters in this world is a trend.


    I can also see another 2 pigmen appearing out of nowhere behind me.


    I''m surrounded.


    One of the pigmen in front started to approach me with his golden sword ready to swing since I didn''t answer back even though he keeps repeating his demand.


    Okay. Should I try to talk my way out of this or just start swinging?


    I can see the pigman approaching started to swing his sword.


    Start swinging it is.


    I countered back and swing my sword trying to cut him into two but was shocked since his sword managed to withstand my slash.


    The enchanted golden sword seems to be a little bit harder than stone and iron but still low on durability.


    But it doesn''t matter.


    I just have to use a little bit of my strength.


    I pulled back my sword and started to swing again.


    This time, I applied a little more force in the swing.


    I managed to cut him in half along with his sword.


    The other 3 pigmen were shocked about what happened and all of them started charging.


    The pigman on the back thrust his sword forward and I just twist my body on the side to avoid him.


    His sword was impaled on the other pigman in front of me and now is slowly dying.


    I used this chance and swing my sword to cut both their heads off.


    The last pigman saw all of his companions dead and that he has no chance against me and just started running.


    Oh no, you don''t.


    I quickly chased after him and tackle him to the ground.


    I stepped my foot on his chest to pin him down and pointed the tip of my sword in his throat.


    I can see so much fear in his eyes but this is their fault.


    I didn''t do anything to them and they just attack me for no reason.


    "Do you fear death?" I asked the pigman to further strike fear in his heart.


    He vigorously nodded his head.


    "Good. Now answer my questions. Why did you attack me? What do you want?"


    "We are ordered by our Lord to attack anyone who tries to get past this valley and gather their belongings."


    I see. There are like bandits and their lord is the bandit leader.


    "We have been assign in this valley for a long time but this is our first time seeing a human. You are a human aren''t you?"


    I didn''t answer and just keep staring at him.


    What to do?


    I could just ask this guy where to find some blazes and guide me there but he might do something crazy and lead me straight into his people.


    I continued asking him some questions like is there any nether fortress around here or where does he live.


    "I answered all your questions. Now let me go. Please." He pleaded at me and he started crying.


    I''m still pointing my sword in his throat.


    After thinking for a while what to do with this guy, I just decided to let him go.


    I got off my foot in his chest and turned around to start walking in the direction he said their castle is.


    I can hear him standing quickly and immediately tried to kill me.


    He struck me in the back and his sword managed to scratch 1 durability of my chest armor.


    This is the second time my diamond armor''s durability got reduced. The first time was the battle with the Queen of giant spiders.


    I turned around to face him and fear immediately went back to his face.


    "Wait!" He tried to stop me but I just swing my sword to kill him.


    Monsters.


    They are all the same.


    I decided to look at their inventory quickly to see any useful items but I didn''t see any so I just left them and started walking.


    I didn''t bother cleaning the bodies like I used to do with my monster hunting since I''m in the nether anyway and there is nothing but fire and lava here.


    He said their castle is close so it probably won''t take a while to reach it.


    I have no idea what I''m going to do once I get there but I just keep on walking.


    After a while, I can see a really small castle in the distance.


    It is only about half the size of my castle in the overworld.


    It made entirely out of nether bricks and the walls are only about 5 blocks tall.


    I slowly approach it to see what''s inside but someone on top of the wall noticed me and quickly started shouting to his people.


    I can now see a lot of pigmen on top of the wall and they are equipped with golden bows.


    Why does every time I went to a place I''m just greeted with sword slashes and arrow fires?


    Another pigman appeared but this time he is a lot larger than the others.


    He is about two blocks tall and he has a really big stomach like he is been eating nonstop for a week.


    He is probably the leader of the pigmen.


    I stopped about 15 blocks away from them and just keep on standing.


    I have no idea what to do next.


    I''m the type of guy who just does things and just improvise if things started going south.


    I can see the leader holding an eye of ender in his hand and pointed at me.


    The eye of ender suddenly explode and turn into dust particles.


    I can see the leader suddenly so terrified and ordered his people to start firing arrows.


    I have no idea what is going on but those gold arrows will probably reduce my armor''s durability so I decided to block them with my shield.


    After blocking for a while, the rain of arrows suddenly stopped and use this chance to start running towards them.


    The leader is no longer on top of the wall.


    He is gone.


    I wonder where is he?


    What did he just do with the eye of ender?


    Did he just curse me or something?


    Multiple questions suddenly keep rushing in my mind while I''m speeding towards them.


    I checked my status in case the leader suddenly did something to me but luckily, I can see no changes.


    After reaching for about 4 blocks away from the wall evading as many arrows as I could, I just jumped with all I got and managed to land on top of the wall.


    I can''t believe that I can jump that very high.


    I feel like a freaking ninja.


    Pigmen started attacking me with their swords and I just killed everyone who dared to approach me.


    I can see the leader in the distance running towards his castle keep door but he didn''t get inside and just turned around to look at me.


    We made eye contact for a while.


    I can still see the fear in his eyes.


    I wonder what did I ever do to him to be this very afraid to me.

 Episode 21: The Battle in the Nether (1)

    ******* Pigman Lord''s POV *******


    We made eye contact for a while, then he returned to killing my own people.


    He is killing them so fast.


    I can''t believe that my soldier''s enchanted golden weapons can''t stop him.


    I don''t know where this human came from but we need to take him down.


    He suddenly appeared out of nowhere.


    I was curious about him since he is wearing diamond armor and the last time I saw one is a long time ago so I tried to see his status using the eye of ender.


    Eye of Ender is really hard to craft but I decided to use one on him.


    I was so surprised to see his status.


    Name: Carolus Rex


    Level: 102 (4 up) 23%


    Race: Human


    Age: 528


    Status: Healthy


    Health: ??????????


    Abilities:


    Crafting Level 10 (Max)


    Enchanting Level 10 (Max)


    Brewing Level 10 (Max)


    Cartography Level 10 (Max)


    Redstone Level 10 (Max)


    Inhuman Strenght Level 5 (0 up) 87%


    Inhuman Speed Level 5 (0 up) 87%


    Melee Combat Level 4 (0 up) 22%


    Range Combat Level 5 (0 up) 93%


    Weapon Efficiency Level 5 (0 up) 31%


    Poison Resistance Level 2 (0 up) 45%


    Heat Resistance Level 1 (1 up) 13%


    Cold Resistance Level 2 (0 up) 2%


    Goddess''s Gifts:


    Celestial Tongue - can speak any languages known to this world.


    Celestial Ears - can understand any languages known to this world.


    Celestial Eyes - can read any languages known to this world.


    Monster Hunter - Inhumane Strenght and Speed Level will increase for every monster killed.


    Ageless Body - cannot age no matter how much time passed.


    Rebirth (1) - can be revived by the Goddess of Creation only once if killed.


    This is my first time seeing a human for about 200 years.


    I can''t believe I see one right now since I thought humans had already forgotten about this dimension.


    He is also 528 years old.


    He is about two times older than me.


    I haven''t seen any human that went past 60 aside from the hero from the past and other exceptional humans.


    The hero is granted by the goddess a gift to roam this world for a long time so he can save this world while the other humans have other means to prolong their life but this is my first time to see a human that is basically an immortal.


    Why would the Goddess of Creation favor this human so much?


    The last time a hero popped up is when the world is about to get destroyed.


    Is the destruction of this world happening again?


    His abilities are also shocking.


    He mastered crafting, enchanting, brewing, cartography and redstone.


    He is a lot better than the last hero.


    I have to assume his diamond armor and diamond weapon are enchanted to the highest enchantments he can put.


    He also has inhuman strength and speed.


    The last hero only has level 2 on him but this guy has level 5. Which means he is twice stronger than the last hero.


    He is also efficient with melee and ranged combat.


    I can see him switching weapons from sword to bow to kill my soldiers.


    But what really surprised me are his gifts.


    The last hero only has 5 gifts given to him by the goddess but this Carolus has 6.


    He also can be revived if he is killed.


    Not only he can''t be aged but he also has two lives on him.


    Bloody monster.


    He is getting closer to me.


    I don''t want him anywhere near me.


    "My personal guards! Go! Attack him!" I shouted at my guards who are close to me protecting me.


    They looked at each other for a while with a confused look.


    "But my lord, he is only one human. The soldiers will handle him. No need to send us and leave you unguarded." One of them finally said after a moment.


    I was getting pissed off at them since they can''t see that my soldiers are not enough to stop that human.Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    I have around 200 soldiers in this castle but I really don''t think they can even scratch him.


    "I said GO!" I said to them once again.


    They still have hesitation to follow my order but they began moving to attack the human.


    I''m standing near the castle keep door.


    I''m quite high on the ground and can see every movement of that human.


    He already killed around 50 of my soldiers and now is quickly heading toward me.


    My 20 personal guards are now closing in on that human.


    They still the same size as my regular pigmen soldiers but they are a lot faster and stronger.


    They also have the best golden equipment.


    That human will die soon enough.


    The leader of my personal guards is the one who attacked first.


    He swings his giant sword towards the human to cut him in half. The human was struck on top of the head. The human didn''t time to react since he is so busy blocking attacks on every side.


    I was about to breathe a sigh of relief since I thought the human was dead but he is still unharmed.


    He just swings his sword and cuts the leader of my personal guard into two along with his giant sword and golden armor.


    The body falls down on the ground and everyone suddenly stopped moving.


    The human is so strong to be able to cut an enchanted golden armor and weapon into two.


    "What are you doing!? Kill him!" I shouted at every one since all of them are stunned about what happened.


    All of my soldiers resumed attacking with my personal guards leading the battle.


    The human just cut them into two every single one that approaches him.


    Half of my personal guards are now dead.


    I ordered my soldiers and my personal guards to distance from the human and just attack him from afar.


    Arrows, crossbow bolts, and spears are being shot at the human but he just still fine and slowly walking towards the keep.


    But there is something happening to the armor of that human.


    It is slowly losing durability and cracks can already be seen.


    Good.


    We can kill him once his armor breaks.


    We still have lots of golden arrows and bolts to fire at him.


    He is finally going to die.


    But contrary to my belief, his armor suddenly shines for a moment and all the damage we have done is now gone. Like it is a brand new armor.


    I can see the human no longer holding a sword and shield but a bow.


    He nocks 3 arrows in his bow and fires back at the soldiers on top of the wall.


    The arrows suddenly exploded upon hitting my soldiers and all of them are now in pieces.


    All of their pieces suddenly flown all over the place and splattered the entire castle.


    I quickly turned around and opened the keep door.


    I immediately head inside and ordered the soldiers defending the keep to lock all the doors.


    I decided to hide in my personal room since the door is made out of iron that I managed to collect from all the fools who stumbled in my territory.


    I was planning to report this to the king but I don''t want to get out of my room.


    No matter how strong he is or what type of weapon he has, he can''t break that iron door.


    I just have to wait for him to die from my soldiers or wait for him to leave.


    I suddenly can hear someone fighting outside and not very long I started to hear screaming.


    After a while, the screaming suddenly stops.


    I was starting to get worried and ready my golden sword and wore my golden armor.


    The iron door suddenly breaks down in front of me and I can see the human holding a really big diamond hammer.


    That is impossible.


    He just destroyed an iron door with one swing.


    I don''t know what to do.


    I can''t die.


    We haven''t conquered the nether dimension.


    Who gave this human the right to take away the pigmen''s chance to rule this dimension?


    He started to raise his hammer to pound me.


    "Wait! Her...!"


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    "Wait! Her...!" I can hear him saying something but I just pound away.


    I don''t know why these pigmen started attacking me the moment they saw me but I have the right to defend myself.


    I managed to take care of about 100 of them.


    There is still about a hundred of them outside.


    I wonder why they didn''t follow me here?


    I thought this guy is their leader? Why didn''t they rush here to protect him?


    It doesn''t matter.


    I have to quickly loot the leader''s inventory for anything useful and just escape from here.


    They managed to lose my armor''s durability to a quarter but I managed to repair it using levels.


    I managed to use up about 10 levels to repair all of my gear.


    I still have 96 levels so I don''t have to worry about breaking my armor but I have to get out of here.


    I can''t keep fighting them since I can''t gain anything from them.


    I began to crouch to the dead leader and opened up his inventory.


    He has a lot of stuff in here.


    He has about 15 ender pearls and 2 eye of enders.


    I don''t know what he did with one of the eye of ender.


    I only know two uses for the eye of ender.


    To find an end gate portal. You just have to throw it in the air since it will follow the direction on a nearby end gate portal.


    The other use is to fill all of the end portal blocks to open the gateway to the end dimension.


    But he just pointed the eye of ender at me and it suddenly breaks.


    I should try it in the future to see what happens.


    He also has blaze rods in his inventory.


    Hallelujah!


    I finally have blaze rods to craft a brewing stand.


    I wonder where did he find the blazes?


    Damn.


    I should have kept him alive to asked him questions.


    I was so heated up with the battle and adrenaline is fueling my body.


    I wasn''t thinking straight and just keep on swinging like a madman.


    Maybe I could ask the people outside where to find blazes?


    I looted everything in his inventory and started to look around the castle keep for other things that can be taken.


    I feel like playing an RPG game.


    After defeating the boss, I''m now looking around for my loots and rewards.


    I opened every chest in the keep and loot any items that seem useful.


    I also found an ender chest in one of the rooms.


    I don''t know what to do with this.


    I tried opening it and I can see only letters containing orders and reports.


    I picked one of the letters to see what it is.


    The content is about how many wither skeleton warriors passed the territory and how many loots they managed to contain.


    I read every single letter inside the ender chest.


    I learned that the big pigman I just killed is the lord of this castle and he ordered by the king to defend the border.


    I was shocked to know that my portal is in the middle of a turf war between the pigmen and the wither skeleton.


    Great.


    Not only I spawn in this world in the middle of the Forest of Monsters but my nether portal is also in the middle of two monsters fighting each other.


    I wonder how to use this ender chest?


    It is probably connected to other ender chests that are around the pigmen territory since they used it as a means to communicate with each other.


    I should take this ender chest with me to test it out.


    I have two diamond pickaxe in my inventory and one of them has a silk touch enchantment.


    I started hitting the ender chest with the pickaxe to collect it.


    It took a while to break the ender chest but it is finally in my inventory.


    I can just craft another ender chest to see if they connect to each other.


    After collecting my loot, I started walking towards the castle keep door.


    It is broken down since I hit it hard with my big hammer.


    I ready my sword to fight my way out but I was surprised at what I''m seeing.


    All of the pigmen suddenly thrown their weapons on the ground.


    They are probably surrendering.


    Thank god.


    The battle is finally over.

 Episode 22: The Battle in the Nether (2)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    I started to look around the castle to see if there is still some of them still willing to fight but it seems they all thrown their weapons on the ground to surrender.


    I really don''t know what to do next with this situation but I just started walking towards the exit.


    "The castle is yours, Sir." I suddenly hear a woman''s voice in front of me.


    Pigwoman?


    Glad to know that there is a gender with pigmen.


    I don''t really want this place. Plus, the king of the pigmen will not just sit back while I just attacked this place and killed the lord of this castle.


    I have to get out of here quick.


    I could just kill them all to suppress information but there is already enough bloodshed for today.


    "No. I didn''t come here to conquer this place." I just said after thinking for a while.


    I can see her eyes are full of suspicion like what I just said is a lie.


    "Then why did you attack this place?" She asked me with a really careful tone.


    She probably doesn''t want to offend me.


    "You attacked me first."


    She flinched after hearing my words and just stayed silent.


    I started asking her questions about this place and about the nether.


    I learned a lot.


    I learned where to find some blazes and where enderman usually appear.


    Apparently, blazes can be found in lava lakes or lava oceans.


    They just swim around in the lava and just occasionally come out to find another place to live.


    I could just use a fishing rod to hunt them to collect lots of blaze rods but I doubt the string in the rod can survive the lava.


    I just have to keep my eyes peeled whenever I''m traveling near a lava lake or ocean.


    The endermen also appears in certain places.


    She doesn''t know why they usually appear in these places but she assured me that they will absolutely come out.


    She gave me a map to these places but the map is really crudely made and it is screaming ''Measurements? What is that?''.


    I just accepted it and planned to make a better map once I get to those places.


    I don''t know how hard to hunt endermen but it is really useful to have plenty of ender pearls.


    She said the ender pearl is the heart of the enderman and is located in the middle of his chest.


    Great.


    Another case of cutting open monsters for their loot.


    After asking her all the questions that I thought I needed, I started walking to the gate to leave this place.


    ''I should hunt some blazes and enderman first before walking back home.''


    I started to make a plan in my head while walking.


    It took a while to get what I need in the nether but I''m finally coming back home.


    This should be an easy journey back.


    ******* Queen Thea''s POV *******


    I can''t believe that there is really a castle in the middle of this forest.


    I''m standing in the highest hill around to have a look at the castle at the distance.


    ''He was telling the truth.'' I suddenly thought to myself about what the prisoner said.


    I''m starting to worry about what he said about a blue monster but I just ordered some of my guards to come with me towards the castle.


    I only have about 20 guards with me along with the general.


    I insisted to bring about half of that number but the general just ignored my plea and even tag along with us.


    We started traveling slowly towards the gate.If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.


    We make sure to raise our flag high and the white flag for a sign of truce.


    I can now see people on top of the wall.


    They are equipped with bows and arrows and everyone around me started to get closer to me to protect me.


    As we are getting closer, I can now see a man wearing an iron armor and holding a blue spear.


    We stop for about 10 blocks away from the moat.


    I was about to announce my name and purpose when suddenly the man wearing an iron armor remove his helmet.


    I can''t believe he is really here.


    I''m staring at the man that I once loved.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    I and my people are now ready for battle.


    I heard from a really giant spider that there is an army heading here and started preparing my people to fight.


    They voice a lot of concerns at first but I just asked them for an alternative solution. They didn''t say anything and just started following my orders.


    I don''t really know what to do since there is only 30 of us here and we are comprised of old people, children and even injured people.


    But I''m not going to abandon this place since King Carolus left this castle to my care and we have nowhere to go.


    King Carolus said that there are three major groups of monsters in this forest.


    The Skeleton in the north.


    The Zombie in the east.


    And the Giant Spiders in the south.


    There is also an army heading towards here coming in the west so we are totally surrounded.


    Luckily, the flag of the army coming towards here is familiar to me.


    I used to fight for that flag.


    The flag of Kingdom of Astikuviel.


    What are they doing here?


    Have they come to save us?


    I can now see about 20 of them coming towards here.


    I didn''t let my guard down and ordered my people to prepare for anything.


    The people coming here are now getting closer and I now see clearly who is leading them.


    I can''t believe she is here.


    The woman who broke my heart and ruined my life.


    I removed my helmet and just stared at her.


    She was also shocked by seeing me and we are just staring at each other.


    I was so focused on her that I didn''t notice the cheering beside me.


    "The queen is here to save us!" I can hear one them shouting but ignored whoever said that.


    The cheering didn''t die down and I can see Peyton approaching me.


    "We should raise the bridge and open the gate for the queen, Arthur." He quickly asked me and I can barely hear him from all the cheering.


    I don''t know what to do.


    I can''t just open the gates to anybody even it is the queen of Astikuviel but I suddenly noticed that the ground I''m standing started shaking a little bit and I can see the bridge rising in the moat.


    What? Who raised the bridge?


    I can also hear the gate starting to open.


    I quickly run downstairs to see who did it and it was one of the injured men who just recently started walking.


    "What are you doing? Who told you to raise the bridge and open the gate?" I asked him with an authoritative voice.


    "That is our queen outside, Arthur. She personally came here to save us." He answered me and I can now see the joy in his eyes.


    Dammit.


    There''s no other choice now.


    I just started walking towards the queen to talk to them.


    They didn''t move in their place and just waited for me to get to them.


    I quickly kneel when I was about 4 blocks from them.


    "My queen. It is good to see you. Thank you for coming all the way here just to save my people." I said as politely as possible.


    "Rise." She ordered me and I immediately stand up.


    We just stared at each other for a moment.


    I can see her thinking deeply about something while she is looking around the castle wall.


    "Did the lord of this castle send you to greet me?" She asked after a moment.


    "No. But King Carolus assign me to be in charge of his territory while he is away." I answered her and she is silent for a moment again.


    I began to estimate the number of soldiers in front of me and counted about 500 of them.


    "My queen. If I may ask, I heard there is an army approaching here comprising of more than 3000 soldiers. Are they all the Kingdom of Astikuviel soldiers?"


    She looked at me for a moment.


    She is probably wondering how I got this information but I can''t tell her that I got this from a really giant talking spider.


    "No. Only 500 of the soldiers here are from our kingdom and the 3000 soldiers coming here are from the Kingdom of Xaerin." I can see suspicion in her eyes but thankfully she answered my question.


    Wait. Did she just say the 3000 soldiers coming here are from the Kingdom of Xaerin?


    "I know what you are thinking but we don''t have time for that. The sun is about to go down. You said the king of this castle is away and he left you in charge of this place?" She cut off my thought and quickly asked me a question.


    "Yes, my queen," I answered her while nodding my head.


    "Good. We need a place to stay and I asked of you to let us in."


    I know she will ask me about this.


    I can see the sun is almost down.


    I don''t know if King Carolus will be happy about letting people in inside his castle but I can''t say no to the queen of Astikuviel.


    I think as hard as I could but cannot reach a good solution.


    I didn''t say anything and just motioned my hand towards the castle saying to get inside.


    They started moving towards the gate and I can see one of the queen officers signaling the others to follow.


    All of them slowly march inside the castle.


    The queen suddenly asked me where to put all of their horses since they got 500 of them but I just said to put them where ever is convenient for them.


    I don''t know where to place the soldiers so they can rest but the first floor of the castle keep is empty and has a lot of space and there is also plenty of space in the second floor and basement.


    Most of them are resting on the first floor and the injured on the second floor.


    Around fifty of them are ordered by their general to manned the walls since they noticed that there are only 30 of us living in here and none of us are really soldiers except for me and the two injured men.


    It took a while to sort all of them but we managed to finished before the sun goes down and now the queen and I are in the map room on the third floor sitting across at each other.


    We are discussing a lot of things about what happened to my people and why there is an army of soldiers coming towards here.


    "Wait. You said the King of this beautiful castle left to a place called nether dimension?" She asked after me after hearing my explanations.


    "Yes. He is there to gather things to make healing potions for the injured and he also said that he is collecting other things there."


    "But you said that place is dangerous and only people who want to die will go there."


    I was silent for a moment.


    I really don''t know what to say to her but I remember what the giant spider said to me.


    "Yes but King Carolus is strong and can take care of himself," I said to her with confidence.


    She stared at me for a moment and then started looking at the maps on the large table.


    "No matter how many times I look at this maps, I still can''t believe there is someone in this world who is able to create this with so much accuracy."


    She started putting small pieces of soldiers made out of wood carrying the flag of Xaerin in the map.


    We started discussing things about what to do and how to fight the coming army.


    ''I hope King Carolus won''t be angry with me about letting people inside his castle''

 Episode 23: The Battle in the Nether (3)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    This is not an easy journey at all.


    I was just minding my own business hunting some blazes and endermen when suddenly two armies appeared and started fighting.


    I got stuck in the nether for three weeks because of this. Three weeks!


    Bloody monsters.


    They suddenly appeared out of nowhere and started fighting each other.


    The pigmen and the wither skeletons are now furiously fighting right now and I''m just standing in the middle of it swinging to whoever comes at me.


    I''m caught in the middle of their fighting and force to defend myself.


    This is the reason why I was stuck in the nether for three weeks since I was also forced to flee and hide.


    ''I wonder why they suddenly start fighting? What spark this conflict?''


    ''It was so peaceful in the first 3 days I was here. What happened?''


    My thoughts were interrupted when I can see a giant pigman about 2 blocks tall about to attack me.


    He has a giant mace on his hand.


    He started to swing his mace but before he can hit me, I just swing my giant hammer to him.


    His weapon and armor broke.


    He flew across the battlefield and managed to hit his allies and all of them that got hit died on the ground.


    Another giant wither skeleton appeared behind me.


    He is equipped with a stone sword and has a chainmail armor.


    I didn''t bother to give the guy the chance to attack me and just switch my weapon into a sword and cut him in half.


    I can see on both sides pigmen and wither skeletons charging at me.


    God.


    Will all of you leave me alone already!


    How am I supposed to get home with this!?


    ******* Queen Thea''s POV *******


    There are finally here.


    The army of Xaerin.


    We have been furiously preparing for them for three weeks.


    Thankfully this castle is well built so enemies can''t just knock them down with projectiles.


    The walls are also tall too.


    The enemies will be having trouble climbing these walls.


    The moat is also very useful since they can''t just dig a tunnel underneath us without flooding the tunnel with water and drown themselves.


    The castle is only partially surrounded.


    The enemies divided themselves into three groups.


    The main group is on the side of the gate in the west while the other two are on the north and south.


    They didn''t bother to cover the east side since they figured we got nowhere to run.


    I''m standing on top of the gate in the west wall waiting for the enemies to move.


    The sun is about to rise and I can now fully see the enemy flags raised in the distance.


    I can see about a thousand of them in front of me so I have to assumed the other two thousand are in the north and south wall.


    The general said to only defend the west side since it is the only place they can get inside if they managed to break down the gate and just have the other walls to be lightly manned but I turned his idea down and just have all the walls equally defended. I don''t want any surprises and be prepared for anything.


    The walls and towers of this castle now have soldiers manning them.


    They are equipped with decent weapons and armors.


    I was worried about the supply of arrows since we don''t have a lot of them but thankfully there is a lot of wood in the storage room in this castle.


    I was hesitant to use it first since it doesn''t belong to me but Arthur insisted since we really need it right now.


    I said to him that I will make sure to pay King Carolus back for all the things we used and for staying in his territory without his consent.If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    I also entrust Arthur to lead the southern wall.


    Every officer I have protested about my decision but I just ignored them since Arthur is once a general and a very strong fighter.


    The northern wall is commanded by the general of my army and I lead the western wall.


    After the break of dawn, I can see the enemies charging towards the castle.


    Bastards.


    They didn''t even bother to parley with us and just immediately attack.


    They probably thought they can defeat us since we are outnumbered six to one.


    I ordered my soldiers to start firing arrows to the coming enemies.


    I can see the enemies slowly dying in our hail of arrows but they are still charging.


    They managed to reach the moat and started placing planks to cross the moat and began climbing towards the wall.


    I know this will happen and just ordered to start shooting fire arrows.


    The wooden planks quickly caught fire and burn everyone who is starting to climb.


    I can see another group of enemies starting to attack the gate.


    They managed to build a temporary bridge and they are holding a battering ram made out of oak wood.


    They started banging on the gate.


    I was worried that they might knock it down but I remembered that it is made out of iron and just ignored them.


    I still can''t believe the amount of iron spent in this castle.


    There are also other things that surprised me here but I focused on the problem at hand.


    A long time has passed of this battle.


    We managed to hold out the castle for a whole day.


    They didn''t get the chance to get on the wall or knock down the gate.


    The north and south wall also managed to repel their enemies and the east wall is untouched since they didn''t fight any enemies.


    Night time slowly comes and the enemies are starting to fall back.


    I watch them slowly march back to their camps.


    I ordered some of the soldiers to go out to clean the bodies on the ground. Arthur strongly suggested this since he said hordes of monsters will come if we left them alone because of the scent of blood.


    After sorting things after the battle, I started walking back to the keep to rest.


    The enemies will probably keep attacking until they run out of soldiers to send to die.


    ''I''m confident this castle will not fall.'' I keep saying myself this so I won''t lose hope.


    I managed to reach the map room and I can see Arthur and the general arguing about something.


    They quickly shut their mouths the moment they saw me.


    At least they have the decency to stop fighting when I''m around.


    "What is the status of our army?" I asked my general.


    "My queen, luckily we didn''t have any injured people or death in our army." He quickly answered my question.


    Good. At last some good news.


    "We should try attacking them at night while their guard is down." I can hear Arthur saying something while looking at the maps.


    Both I and the general quickly looked at Arthur.


    "What are you talking about, commoner? We can''t afford to be sending soldiers outside the wall since we barely have enough to defend this castle." The general said to Arthur with a snark.


    "What are you suggesting Arthur?" I just ignored the general and asked him a question.


    "There is a tunnel underneath this castle that leads to this area." He pointed an area on the map.


    His hand is on the north about 70-80 blocks away from the castle.


    It is probably the middle of the camp of the northern enemy army.


    "Why would there be a tunnel that runs outside this castle? Isn''t that a weakness in the defense." The general suddenly asked Arthur a question.


    "It is originally a mine shaft dug by King Carolus. The entrance is barred with iron bars so I doubt the enemy can just stroll inside and attack this castle and the entrance is also hidden among the forest so the enemies will not able to find it. They are also other redstone traps in this castle that he taught me before he went with his journey so we are safe in case they managed to follow us here in the tunnel." Arthur explained to us.


    He is now saying some absurd things again about this King Carolus but I ignored it since the plan he suggested is not bad.


    I also don''t know what is this redstone traps he is talking about but I trust him.


    "Let''s go with that plan Arthur," I said after thinking for a moment.


    We no longer have any other plans since we are stuck here anyway and we are not expecting any reinforcement.


    "But my queen..." The general is about to protest but I just raised my hand to shut him up.


    Both of them are about to leave when suddenly the door of the map room suddenly burst open and a soldier came in.


    "My queen! There is something happening on the east side of the castle!" A soldier immediately delivered sudden news.


    Me, Arthur and the general quickly ran to the roof of the keep to see what is going on.


    We quickly saw a horde of zombies on the east side marching towards here.


    I quickly ordered the whole garrison to wake up and defend the castle.


    The zombies even though there are a lot in numbers, cannot get over the walls and just get stuck on the moat.


    They are quickly dispatched with arrows fired on the ramparts and towers.


    I was glad that everything is going well until we suddenly can hear screaming around us in the distance.


    We didn''t know what it was but we know it is screams of human beings.


    ''What is going on?'' I asked myself since none of my people knew what is happening.


    The ground suddenly started to tremble like the world is being hit by large blocks falling from the sky.


    I focused my eyes on the darkness beyond the east wall.


    I ordered my troops to start firing fire arrows to be able to see on the distance.


    The fire arrows managed to temporarily light up a giant being.


    We managed to saw it all even for a moment.


    It is a giant zombie.


    We didn''t see anything like this at all in our entire life. Not even our long history of fighting monster invasions.


    Morale of the army quickly plummeted down but I managed to keep them in line since panicking will not help us right now and we have nowhere to go.


    The giant zombie slowly walks towards here and the light of the lamps finally reaches him.


    He is now 6 to 7 blocks away.


    I ordered to rain arrows on that monster to stop him.


    The giant zombie didn''t seem to mind all the arrows stuck in his body and just keep on walking.


    He is about to step on the moat when suddenly I can see an arrow flying towards his face.


    The arrow quickly exploded upon contact and all of the people that saw that suddenly stop on their actions.


    The zombie slowly falls on his back and hit the ground.


    The ground shook greatly when the giant''s back hit the ground.


    ''What is that? What is happening now?''


    I can now hear some people cheering on the ground of the castle and quickly lean over to see what it is.


    I can now see a man wearing a blue armor running towards the east wall.


    He is probably King Carolus that Arthur keeps talking about.


    He then jumps towards the top of the wall and managed to land in a single leap.


    ''What!?'' I shouted in my head.


    Everyone was so surprised about what happened except Arthur.


    He didn''t stand on top of the wall for too long and quickly jumps over the wall to the outside.


    I immediately run towards the stairs to get out of this keep and head to the east wall.


    Arthur and the general followed me along with all of my personal guards.


    Around 200 people now stand on the east wall of the castle.


    I can now see King Carolus standing on top of the giant zombie with a sword in his hand.

 Episode 24: Battle of Monsters (1)

    ******* Skeleton King''s POV *******


    I can hear the beautiful sounds of screaming in front of me.


    I heard that there is a huge army of humans marching inside the forest so I quickly assemble my army and personally come to greet them.


    They are trying to run away from me right now but I have already prepared my army in advance and surrounded them.


    They got nowhere to run.


    "That it humans! Come to this forest! Come to me! I welcome you with open arms!" I shouted at them and even though they can''t see me because of the darkness, at least they can hear my voice.


    They trembled in my voice and began to fight my army with everything they got.


    They managed to organize their army and form a battle line.


    We are now back to the oldest rule of this world.


    ''The weak succumb to the strong.''


    I can see less than a thousand of them in the camp. They probably lost quite a little bit of soldiers during the siege.


    This is still not enough soldiers to join my ranks to help me conquer the world but this is still a huge addition to my army.


    My soldiers charged and fought the army head-on.


    Both sides have heavy casualties but the humans managed to hold out and halted my entire army on all sides.


    I decide to fight them myself and started walking to the front.


    "Haha! Humans! Fight for your survival! Fight to the death!" I shouted at them and began to swing my giant sword to the enemy lines.


    A portion of their shield wall has been broken and about 50 of them died in a single swing.


    My soldiers didn''t miss this chance and charge in the gap of their defenses.


    It didn''t take long for them to be overrun.


    Now, it is a matter of time before all of them fall.


    Good.


    I am now much closer to my dream.


    My scouts said that there are still 2 armies left in the west and south of this castle but I didn''t bring enough soldiers to fight two armies let alone three so I decided to just take on the northern army. I also don''t want to stay here any longer since I don''t want to anger the human living in that castle and start an unnecessary war.


    I also heard that the queen of the giant spiders is also amassing his spiderlings out of their territory. She probably also wants these humans for food instead of turning them into skeletons like me.


    I can see the remaining humans fighting my army to death.


    The humans are now almost spent and all of them will now die and their bodies collected back to the fortress.


    I was about to leave after harvesting my spoils but I suddenly heard an explosion on the east side of the castle.


    ''Hmm. What is happening there?''


    I began to wonder and decided to see what is and started walking in that direction and orders most of my army to walk with me.


    ******* Queen Arachne''s POV *******


    Foolish humans.


    I can see my children tearing all of them into pieces around me.


    Why would they leave the safety of their homes and come in this forest?


    "Go ahead, my children! Slaughter them all! Remind them what this forest really is!" I shouted at them and the moment they heard my voice, all of them began to attack more furiously.


    The humans just run in all directions and didn''t bother to fight back but they are in the middle of the Forest of Monsters. Even if they run with all they had, they can''t outrun us and we can see them perfectly in the darkness.


    I watch the pieces of humans lie on the ground.


    There are so many foods here.


    I can feed all of my children and my future children with this.


    I have to get them all.


    "My children! Don''t let any of them get away!" I quickly shouted at them to make sure the humans will not get out of this forest.


    Thousands of my children are now in this area of the forest chasing to whoever runs away from them.


    The humans riding horses managed to distance away from us but they are days or weeks away before they can get out of this forest and my children can travel all week long without rest. It is just a matter of time before I could get them all.You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    I was hesitant to approach King Carolus'' territory with an army of giant spiders but I can no longer take the actions of the humans. They can''t just stroll along this forest like they own this place. I''ll just have to give him gifts collected from these humans to quell his wrath.


    I can see a group of humans who managed to defend themselves and killed a quite bit of my children.


    They form a rectangular shape and managed to defend themselves with all the slaughter.


    There are about 200 of them.


    I jump high up in the air and landed on top of their battle lines and managed to break their formations.


    I killed all the soldiers within my reach and killed who I believed the leader of this army.


    Now, these humans are totally hopeless.


    They are now leaderless and powerless.


    I was about to revel in my victory when I suddenly hear an explosion on the side of the castle.


    I don''t know what it is so I decided to check on it and began traveling towards the castle bringing along most of my children.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    ''What is going here?''


    ''Why there are so many people in my castle?''


    ''Why are the giant zombie and his entire horde of zombies are attacking this castle?''


    I got so many questions in my mind.


    I managed to push through the zombie pigmen and wither skeletons in the nether and managed to get home.


    I destroyed the portal by taking one obsidian in it and began mining my way out of this room.


    After breaking two obsidian blocks, I was greeted by Peyton who is standing outside the portal room.


    He explained quite a lot of shocking things but didn''t get the chance to tell all of them since some people from their group panting their way here and delivered bad news.


    I quickly run outside towards the east wall pass the people I haven''t meet.


    They were shocked to see and even tried to assault me but I just ignored them.


    The woman who delivered the news said that there is also a giant zombie slowly heading towards here.


    I can feel the tremor on the ground of every footstep of the giant and prepared the bow to fire an explosive arrow.


    I nock the arrow and aim at the general direction of what I believed the location of the giant zombie.


    I lose the arrow and waited.


    An explosion occurred after a while and I''m confident that I managed to hit something.


    The ground suddenly shook after a while.


    There is suddenly cheering around me. I ignored them and just start running towards the east wall.


    I tried to jump to get on top of the wall and managed to land safely.


    I was surprised that I can now jump this high. I am now getting faster and stronger from all the fighting in the nether though I don''t know why.


    I can see the giant zombie on the ground and immediately jump on top of him.


    There are a lot of zombies on the field who are now slowly walking towards me but thankfully the people on top of the ramparts and towers fire arrows at them.


    I take out an eye of ender in my inventory to see what will happen if I use it the way the zombie pigman lord did.


    I don''t know why I feel like trying this out now since I''m in a middle of fighting but I suddenly heard a whisper in my ear and decided to listen to it.


    I held it in my hand and pointed at him.


    I waited for a moment until suddenly the eye of ender breaks down and turned into dust.


    There suddenly a status window appeared in front of me.


    ***************


    Name: Giant


    Level: 218 (0 up) 29%


    Race: Legendary Zombie


    Age: 689


    Status: Healthy


    Health:


    ?????????????????????????


    ????????????????????????


    Abilities:


    Zombie Strenght Level 6 (0 up) 11%


    Zombie Speed Level 2 (0 up) 99%


    Heat Resistance Level 10 (Max)


    Cold Resistance Level 10 (Max)


    Poison Resistance Level 10 (Max)


    Ender Dragon''s Gifts:


    Undead Body - cannot age no matter how much time passed.


    Zombie Supreme Leader - can command thousands to tens of thousands of zombies by his will.


    Daywalker - can walk in the heat of the sunlight.


    Nightwalker - can see in the dark.


    Regeneration - gradually heal itself over time.


    Hunger - Zombie Strenght and Speed level will increase for every being eaten. Speed Level is a third time slower to gain experience from Zombie Strenght. The experience gain for both also varies depending on what type of being is eaten.


    **************


    Whoa!


    What is this?


    It is like a status menu of an RPG game.


    It is like my status menu but with more information.


    Wait. Is this what the pigman lord did to me? Look at my status? What did he see?


    I can find out later.


    I have to focus here.


    This guy here has an age of 689. I assumed this is in years since there is no indicator.


    Wow. This zombie has lived for a very long time.


    He also has a race of ''Legendary Zombie''. What''s the difference with a regular zombie?


    His status also says his healthy even though I can see plenty of arrows stuck in his body and I managed to blow up his face.


    Well, this is not a surprise since he has 50 hearts of health.


    Goodness, gracious.


    I should not be surprised since this is probably the boss of all zombies.


    He only received only one heart of damage and is now slowly healing. I quickly peek through the status window to see that his face is now beginning to take shape again.


    I just ignored him and continue observing his status.


    I can see that he has a lot of abilities.


    There are also levels on them but I don''t know if this is a big number or not since this is my first time knowing about this but his heat, cold and poison resistance is max so I assumed they are a maximum level to his abilities.


    What really surprised me is that he has a list of gifts by the ender dragon.


    What are these gifts? What is the ender dragon have to do with it and why is her name on it?


    I was about to carefully read the rest of the giant zombie''s status when suddenly he started moving.


    He moved his hand toward me probably trying to grab me since I can''t see any fingers on his hands.


    I quickly throw an ender pearl at the distance to get out here and plan to slowly lure him away from the castle.


    My body suddenly felt like it is being crushed and I''m now at the place where the ender pearl landed.


    Thankfully, none of my ender pearl teleportations so far managed to deduct my health but it is still slightly painful. I assured myself that I will get used to this eventually.


    I turned around to face the giant zombie and can see that he is slowly starting to rise.


    Some of the zombies near me also started to approach me.


    I''m in the middle of the zombie horde now and thankfully the hail of arrows stopped coming from the castle wall. Arthur or whoever in charge there probably ordered to stop firing to avoid hitting me.


    I tried to focus on the giant zombie who is now on his feet and slowly walking towards me but I''m really distracted with the number of zombies around me that is now trying to kill me.


    They are easy to kill but I can''t see the end of them and it is really hard to see in the darkness.


    I quickly pulled out a splash of night vision VI in my inventory and throw it to the ground.


    The bottle breaks and I now have 6 hours of night vision in my status.


    I can now see the surroundings like I''m walking in the sunlight.


    There are a lot of zombies here and I can''t even begin to count them.


    There are probably thousands of them here.


    God.


    I don''t know how long before the sun rises in the sky.


    How long will I have to hold out?


    I can also begin to see a giant skeleton slowly walking in the distance towards here coming from the north.


    ''What is he doing in here!?'' I shouted in my mind.


    I can also see a giant spider coming towards here from the south.


    Oh no.


    Please don''t tell me that she is here to attack me too.


    I thought my trip to the nether was bad.


    This is so much worse here in the overworld.

 Episode 25: Battle of Monsters (2)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    Great.


    I''m surrounded again with monsters and totally outnumbered. Again.


    ''Why do these things keep happening to me?''


    I just ignored all my worries and just focused on fighting the battle.


    The dead bodies of zombies are now starting to pile up the ground and the pool of blood already reach the moat. It is starting to turn it into color red.


    Super great.


    I hope the other waterway that I dedicated to the basement of the castle will not be contaminated.


    It will not be quite a problem even all the water on the moat and all that is connected to it is contaminated since I have now plenty of places to gather water in this forest. I also got ample of places in the mine where there is a water pocket.


    The giant zombie finally reached me and is now constantly trying to grab me.


    I don''t know what he is going to do with me once he caught me but I just keep on evading since I don''t want to find out.


    It is now becoming really hard to fight with all the distractions of the regular zombies.


    A hail of arrows suddenly flew in my general direction and killed all the zombies on the surrounding and hitting me and the giant zombie at the same time.


    The arrows came from the north side.


    Extremely great.


    Now, the giant skeleton and his army have joined the party.


    I can also see Queen Arachne and his spiderlings started attacking the zombies on the south.


    ''Is she helping me?''


    I sure hope so since I''m all alone here.


    But some of the giant spiders started charging at me.


    ''Okay. I guess she is not here to help me.''


    I started cutting giant spiders who tried to kill me alongside the zombies.


    "My loyal soldiers! Use this opportunity to end that human! Attack with all haste!" I can hear the giant skeleton ordering his entire army to charge.


    ''What!? Hey! I thought this is a free for all. Attack some zombies and spiders too.'' I said this to him in my mind.


    The army of skeletons rushes towards me with their swords drawn and their spear held tight in their hands.


    I switch my weapon in hand into a bow and prepared some explosive arrows.


    I was saving this explosive arrows for an emergency but since this situation right now is an emergency, I am just going to spend some but I''m prepared to use all of them if necessary.


    I nock the arrows and aimed at the coming skeleton army.


    I loosed the arrows and hit the skeletons in front.


    The arrows exploded and all of the pieces of skeletons fly all over the place.


    There are still a lot of them coming here but more giant spiders have now reached me and I switch my attention to them.


    I pulled my sword in the inventory and started hacking them into pieces.


    I tried to swing my sword as wide as possible to hit as many enemies as I can.


    I suddenly saw a giant figure jumping in the sky and is now about to land in front of me.


    I ready my sword for the coming monster.


    "Oh! My King Carolus. I hope you understand my actions. This right here is the perfect opportunity to really know who will rule this forest."


    What? What is this crazy talking giant monster spider babbling about?


    "For centuries, this forest has been equally divided into three by the zombies, skeletons, and spiders. It is finally time to settle the true leadership of this place." She continued talking and I just ignored all the things she is saying.


    What leadership? What do I care who rules this place?


    Just leave me alone!


    She started attacking me with her sharp legs and I just parried all of them.


    Her movements are quick but I greatly improved since the last time we fought. I am now much stronger and faster.


    After blocking and repelling away her attacks, I started to counter her movements and managed to hit her a few strikes.Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    She still heals so rapidly but I just keep on going.


    We were interrupted when the giant skeleton finally decided to join the battle.


    "She is right, human. The balance of this forest cannot be held long and a ruler is now needed." I can hear the giant skeleton saying something but I can barely comprehend the things he is saying right now since I''m so focused on keeping myself alive.


    He swings his sword down towards me and Queen Arachne.


    Queen Arachne managed to leap out of the sword reach in time and I just rolled away on the side.


    The ground shook when the sword hit the ground.


    God.


    What will happen if I get hit with that strike?


    "My apologies, little human. I believe I haven''t told you my name. We cannot have a proper fight if I don''t introduce myself." He started to withdraw his sword and switch to a neutral stance.


    ''I also don''t care about your name!'' I am now starting to go insane from all the fighting and talking with monsters.


    "My name is Zane. But I was known a long time ago as Skeleton King. The Supreme Ruler of the Overworld." He proudly said that while standing straight.


    Insanely great.


    I''m getting tired of all of this and just want daylight to come quickly.


    I wish this world is the same as the game when you just have to lie down on a bed for a few seconds to turn night time to day time.


    "And I will not let you stop me again. You will perish tonight!" He quickly readies his sword to swing but he is interrupted with the giant zombie tackling him unto the ground.


    Both of them are now on the ground with the giant zombie on top of the giant skeleton.


    The giant skeleton tried to get off the giant zombie on him and used one of his legs to kick him away.


    The zombie was kicked on the side and the giant skeleton is now starting to get up.


    I suddenly heard the sound of something spitting behind me and quickly dodge to the side.


    I managed to evade it and saw a green substance flying towards the fallen down giant zombie. The substance is splattered all over him.


    The giant zombie doesn''t seem to mind the substance on him that I believe is a poison and just started to slowly get up.


    I remembered that he has a max level poison resistance so the green substance on him is probably just like water flowing down on him.


    I quickly turned around to face Queen Arachne with a bow and arrows.


    I fired about ten explosive arrows towards her at a fast pace.


    ''Let''s see if you can regenerate that.'' I said to myself while looking at the arrows rapidly flying towards her.


    The explosive arrows hit her and blow up in a quick and consistent interval.


    Smoke began to fill the area and I can''t now see her.


    I turned my attention to the other two giant monsters since she is probably in pieces.


    They are now focused on each other and then the giant skeleton thrust his sword forward stabbing the giant zombie on the chest.


    His sword went through but I can hear no scream from the giant zombie or any type of reaction from the sword stuck in his chest.


    The giant zombie just continues standing still then suddenly he raised his right hand to punch the giant skeleton.


    The giant skeleton got hit in the face hard and got pushed back about a dozen blocks but he managed to keep on standing.


    I didn''t know that giant zombie can pack a heavy punch.


    He is very slow in movement but can deliver a decisive blow to his enemies.


    He switches his target to me since the giant skeleton is now very far away from him and I''m the nearest one right now.


    He still got a big iron sword stuck in his chest but he just started walking towards me.


    I was about to ready another explosive arrow in my hand when suddenly I can see something coming towards me from my side.


    I didn''t have time to get the shield in my inventory or to dodge it so I just tried to block the attack using my right arm.


    The blow was really great but luckily I didn''t receive any damage and my gauntlet armor managed to withstand the blow.


    It is Queen Arachne that attacked me.


    ''Wow. She managed to survive that attack and regenerate herself huh.''


    I switch my weapon on my hand into a hammer and tried to flatten her into the ground.


    She managed to dodge my attack and now is about 10 blocks away from me.


    I can see the giant zombie lean down on my left side and tried to grab me again but this time I didn''t dodge or run and just swing my hammer on one of his legs.


    He loses his balance and begins to fall on the ground face up.


    The giant skeleton used this chance to pulled out his giant sword in the zombie''s chest.


    The sound of the sword being pulled from the giant zombie is not pleasant to hear but I didn''t let my guard down and keep my eyes on them.


    The giant skeleton has his weapon back on his hands and is now trying to kill me.


    I quickly throw an ender pearl on his right shoulder.


    I suddenly teleported close to his face and I swing my hammer hard on his cheeks.


    He received the mighty blow of my hammer and he started to fall down dragging along the giant zombie with him.


    I throw another ender pearl towards in front of Queen Arachne while in mid-air and transferred there.


    I quickly switch my weapon into a sword and immediately swing to cut her face.


    She didn''t have time to protect herself and I managed to deal with her considerable damage.


    She quickly leaped backward to distance herself from me to avoid getting attacked again.


    I looked around to see all of the giant monsters on the ground or trying to distance from me.


    A lot of their army that they brought with them are now dead on the ground for killing each other or died getting in between our battle.


    There is now a moment of silence in the field.


    ''Finally! I can finally rest a moment before they started charging again.'' I quickly said to myself while still looking at my enemies.


    ******* Queen Thea''s POV *******


    I can''t believe what I''m seeing.


    Even the darkness of the night, the events can still be seen.


    King Carolus managed to fight these giants monsters all by himself and he even managed to deal heavy damages on them to make them fall on the ground or distance away from him.


    So this is the person Arthur keeps bragging about that can take a thousand well-armed soldiers alone and win.


    He is doing impossible things like quickly moving around so quickly in the blink of an eye using those green orbs.


    All of the things that Arthur said to me that I didn''t believe is now starting to make sense to me.


    My attention to the battle was averted by the zombies traveling around the castle.


    Some of them are still attacking the castle but most of them are now traveling towards the west like they after somebody.


    I was planning to order a sortie to attack the undead army from the back but reconsidered my plan since there is no need to leave this castle.


    The reason I came up with that plan is that I''m worried that the zombie army will continue traveling west and manage to reach my kingdom.


    I just hope they turned around and go back to whatever place they came from.


    I can see Arthur trying to leave my side.


    "Where are you going, Arthur?" I quickly asked him and he immediately stopped on his tracks.


    "I have to help King Carolus." He said this without turning around to face me.


    "What? What nonsense are you talking about? Can''t you see what is going down there? There are giant monsters fighting and thousands of monsters reaping each other apart." I said to him to change his mind.


    He didn''t say anything for a moment and just keep on standing for a while.


    I was starting to worry that he might dash off the moment I took my eyes off him and was starting walk towards him to physically stop him.


    To my surprise, he just turned around and began to walk back to his position and I didn''t say anything.


    All of the people of this castle just continued watching the battle of monsters while trying to survive the night.

 Episode 26: Battle of Monsters (3)

    ******* Queen Thea''s POV *******


    The battle between skeletons, zombies, giant spiders, and a single human started again.


    I still can''t believe the number of monsters I see in the field but I hardened myself and just focus on defending the castle.


    Some of the giant spiders and skeletons also started attacking the castle.


    The skeletons are attacking the north wall while the giant spider on the south wall.


    The horde of zombies is still attacking the east side of the castle but there is not a lot of them since they are also attacking the skeletons and giant spiders on the field.


    I ordered Arthur to defend the north wall and the general the south wall. I said to them I will handle the east wall since I need my best soldiers here to keep an eye of these giants monsters.


    The west wall can handle itself for the time being since there are no important things happening there except for minor zombie attacks and keeping an eye for the west army but I doubt the enemies will stay in this forest for long not after what happened here.


    Arthur is hesitant to follow my orders at first since he really wants to go to the field to help King Carolus but I said to him what can he do once he gets there. He is just like a small flower waiting to step on and crush.


    I am now watching the battle in front of me.


    They still keep on going even after a long time.


    None of them seems to get an upper hand with one another.


    They are equal in battle but what surprises me is that King Carolus can fight with them with equal grounds.


    King Carolus doesn''t seem to be tired even after a while and just keep on fighting all of them at the same time.


    He is alone though and has to fight them all by himself. Including the skeletons, zombies, and giant spiders.


    He is fighting zombies right now and is now having trouble to deal with them since they are now quite a lot of corpses on the field and he is having a problem moving around.


    "Whoever in charge of the wall! Start firing arrows!" I can suddenly hear him shouting and his voice echoed in the castle.


    What is he talking about? He is still there. I''m not going to order to start shooting while he is busy fighting the enemies.


    "Just do what he says, Queen Thea!" I can hear Arthur''s voice coming from the north wall.


    This is insane.


    I''m not a heartless human to let someone die who is fighting for us just to save ourselves.


    "Do it!" I can hear King Carolus voice again while he is hacking three zombies into two at the same time.


    Everyone around me starts to stare at me waiting for my order.


    I quickly ordered my soldiers to start firing.


    A volley of arrows is now being fired on the field and hundreds of enemies got hit and died.


    The giant monsters also got hit but they didn''t seem to mind and just keep on fighting each other.


    But King Carolus is the one who is surprising among them.


    Even with all the arrows being hit at him, he is still fine and just continued fighting.


    I''m beginning to wonder if he really is human.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    This is starting to tire me.


    The battle went on for the whole night but luckily the sun is about to rise.


    I keep watching the clock in my inventory to keep track of the time.


    I have forgotten about having a clock in my inventory since I got stuck in the nether for quite a while and clocks are useless there.


    The battle was suddenly halted for a moment.


    The giant skeleton, giant spider, and the giant zombie are now just standing still and we are just staring at each other.


    They probably knew that time is running out.


    "Pity. I guess it is time to go." I can hear the giant skeleton talking while staring at the sky.


    He lowered his giant sword and just starting walking in the north bringing along of what was left of his army.If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.


    The giant zombie also just started walking east without saying anything and all of his zombie hordes started to follow him.


    The ones left here right now are the giant spiders and their queen.


    Queen Arachne and I just stared for a moment.


    I was starting to worry that she will not go and we will have to fight until one of us dies.


    Thankfully, my armor is still in good shape and I still have plenty of levels to repair it since I keep on killing monsters.


    I can still fight her for a while but I don''t know if our battle will end since I didn''t see any permanent damage on her.


    She didn''t say anything and I didn''t try to talk to her.


    The staring still continues and I was about to change my sword into a bow to start firing the last of my explosive arrows but she just started to turn around and walk back to her territory.


    ''Phew! I thought this battle will never end.'' I said in my head while staring at the sky.


    I looked around the field to see that there are a lot of dead zombies, skeletons and spiders.


    Damn.


    How many monsters died today?


    It doesn''t matter.


    I have to quickly get back to my room to rest.


    After looking around to make sure that there are no more monsters left on the battlefield, I threw an ender pearl on top of the east wall.


    I teleported in the middle of the rampart and now is surrounded by soldiers that I didn''t know.


    They quickly ready their weapons to attack me.


    "Stand down! Put away your weapons!" I suddenly hear the voice of a woman on my left side ordering all of them.


    They quickly followed her orders and I can see her walking towards me.


    The soldiers quickly make way for her and she is like Moses with the way they let her through.


    She probably wants to talk to me but I am really tired and I really want to sleep right now.


    I tried to jump off the wall to start walking to the keep when suddenly I can see Arthur running towards here from the north side of the castle.


    Great.


    I remembered the real reason while I traveled to the nether.


    I have to quickly give the injured people the Potion of Regeneration VI that I managed to brew while I''m in the nether.


    I didn''t just hide and waited for the opportunity to get past the pigmen and wither skeletons. I used my time wisely and crafted a brewing stand to start making potions.


    It is quite an eventful time since I tried experimenting on mixing other ingredients in the brewing stand to see if I can make another type of potions. The result was lots of explosions and poison gases. I learned my lesson and just stick with the recipe that I know.


    The potions in this world have levels and can be made up to level 6.


    The higher the level, the better the effect and the longer the duration.


    I discovered this while trying to use the same recipe with an already made potions.


    I just have to keep using the same type of ingredients for the potions six times to make a level 6 potions.


    I managed to make quite a lot of Potion of Regeneration since I hunted a lot of ghasts in the nether but there are quite a lot of people here now than I was expecting. There are probably more injured people inside the castle.


    My rest will have to wait and I have to brew more potions but before that, I remembered something.


    "Arthur. Quickly capture one of the zombies outside before the sun rises and bring him to the prison room." I quickly said to Arthur the moment he reached me.


    He is quite a shock about what I just said but he nodded his head and quickly run towards the stables.


    I have now the means to cure a zombie so I need to know if I can cure one that is already turned for a long time.


    The woman beside me started to voice some concerns but I can barely care about her since my vision is starting to get blurry.


    ''No. Keep it together.''


    "Here. Take this." I grab a bag of potions in my inventory and hand them over to the woman who I believe is the leader of the people here.


    Potions can''t be stacked together in the inventory but they can be stored in a bag or something to save some space.


    She stared at me for a moment and I was about to just drop it on the ground since she is wasting my time when one of her people grab the bag and inspect what''s inside of it.


    "There are about 20 Potions of Regeneration VI there. Give it to the injured." I said to her while starting to face the castle keep.


    ''I have to start working now.''


    "Wait...!" I can hear her saying something but I just ignored her.


    I didn''t bother to hear her reply and just threw an ender pearl on top of the castle keep since I''m really tired and I don''t want to walk my way back to the castle keep right now.


    After teleporting on the roof of the keep, I quickly head downstairs back to my room to clean myself first and to look if I sustained any injuries.


    My health is still full and my status is healthy but I have to make sure.


    I can hear people calling after me but I just ignored all of them and just lock myself in my room.


    I quickly cleaned myself and I was about to get out of my room with suddenly I fall on the floor and my vision blackout.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    I don''t know what he is going to do with this zombie but I managed to capture one.


    I''m heading back to the castle with the captive tied on the back on a horse.


    The bridge is up and the gate is fully open since they are busy cleaning the battlefield.


    The sun is almost up and quickly moved my horse forward.


    The people around the gate saw me carrying a monster and tried to stop me but I just said to them that it is an order from King Carolus.


    They immediately back off the moment they hear that name.


    I don''t blame them since they witness with their own eyes on what he can do.


    I quickly place the zombie in the prison room.


    There are now three zombies here.


    I stared at them for a moment and began to wonder something.


    King Carolus said that he is going to cure them. I wonder if he is also meant that he wants to cure Merek.


    I hope not since this guy deserves to become a monster for what he has done to my people.


    I started going upstairs to check on King Carolus.


    I suddenly saw Queen Thea in front of King Carolus room.


    She probably wants to talk to him.


    "He is probably resting right now, Queen Thea," I said to her after seeing her expression of worry.


    "Arthur!" She was startled to see me and I can see a sword in her hand.


    "Don''t just come out of nowhere and surprise me." She quickly added.


    I can see her face starting to blush since someone caught her off guard.


    I was about to laugh at her for being too careless with her surroundings when I suddenly remembered that things are different now. She is a queen of Kingdom of Astikuviel and I''m a commoner of a recently burnt down small village.


    We just stared at each other for a moment.


    Quite a long moment has passed and it is now starting to get awkward.


    "Just leave him alone for now and let him rest," I said to her to break the silence.


    "Are you sure he is fine after fighting a very long battle?" She quickly asked me and I can see the worry came back in his face.


    I didn''t answer her back and just nodded my head.


    "You also have to rest. You also fought a very long battle so you need sleep. Don''t worry. I and the general will take care of everything while you are sleeping." I said to her.


    She hesitated for a moment to move but I know she is really glad to hear the word rest since she is really tired.


    She started walking back to the second floor to rest while I called the general to start discussing things.

 Episode 27: Primary Purpose (1)

    ******* Xaerin''s General POV *******


    I can''t believe this is happening to me.


    Why did it have to be me?


    I lost more than two-thirds of my army because of monsters and attacking the castle head on without a plan.


    We are now quickly marching back home.


    I can''t even imagine that the Kingdom of Astikuviel will just sit back and watch us march in the middle of their kingdom. They will probably retaliate for all the things we have done especially that we are so few in numbers.


    Even by some miracle, we managed to get back home, the king will absolutely execute me for my failures.


    The plan the king so meticulously conducted is now in shambles and his well-funded army is now eaten or killed by monsters.


    I decided to clear my thoughts and keep moving forward.


    We keep traveling through day and night.


    All of us are so exhausted especially the foot soldiers.


    I ordered to left behind all the wounded soldiers and just keep all the healthy ones with me.


    There are a lot of monsters in this forest that is chasing us right now. I can''t afford to be bringing dead weight with me.


    Also, the morale of the army is already so low after burning down innocent villages and slaving the populace so there is no longer room for sympathy.


    It is now night time again but I still push my army forward instead of camping.


    I''m not stopping for anything until we got out of this forest.


    Most of the reports coming from messengers are that some of the foot soldiers are beginning to tire themselves and pass out but I just replied to them to just leave all of them behind too just like the injured and weak.


    Thankfully, no reports about monsters but I know it is just a matter of time.


    The march is starting to slow down and I''m beginning to feel that the monsters are gaining on us.


    "AAAH! MONSTERS!" Someone just shouted from the rear.


    I ordered my entire army to halt and turned around.


    This is it.


    This is the end.


    No.


    I still can do something.


    "Army of Xaerin! Heed my words! We can no longer outrun them! We will fight to end!" I shouted to all of my people.


    There was no cheering or applause from my words unlike when I made speeches about wealth and glory.


    There are only desperations and despair here right now.


    Dammit! If only most of the kingdom''s soldiers are not sent to the western border to defend the kingdom from the rising threat and are here right now, the kingdom of Astikuviel will not stand a chance and all the monsters in this forest will be slaughtered.


    "Battle lines! Form a battle line now!" Even I could see helplessness in my soldiers, I still urge them to move and fight.


    They quickly form a line and stood strong.


    Less than a thousand men line up in the field compared to the more than three thousand men that march forward to conquer the Kingdom of Astikuviel.


    "This will be our last stand! Let these bastards know who are the real monsters in this world!"


    This time, they began shouting and cheering.


    What else could we do right now?


    They rather go down swinging than dying with their backs turn.


    An army of monsters can now be seen in the distance and quickly charge forward.


    Zombies, skeletons and giants spiders.


    The army''s cheering quickly died down.


    My army began to shake and even some of them started deserting but I know they will never get out of this forest.


    There is an old tale that used to tell by mothers to their children about this forest to scare them so sleep.


    I don''t remember the full story but I remembered an important line.Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    ''Anyone who dares to enter the forest of monsters will never come out alive or return back as a human.''


    I should have listened to those mothers.


    ******* Carolus POV *******


    What?


    My eyes are now wide open and I can feel my face pressing on a hard surface.


    Great.


    I''m lying face flat on the floor.


    I quickly get up and sort myself.


    I can''t remember what happened.


    It feels like I''m back when I first got here in this world with my face hurting and have no idea what is happening.


    I started to think deeply about what happened before I passed out.


    Right.


    Everything is starting to come back to me now.


    I was about to leave this room to start brewing potions for the injured but blacked out.


    It seems I passed out cold because of fatigue after fighting for a long time in the nether and recently in the field of the overworld.


    I looked at the clock in my inventory to see that it is already noon.


    How long did I pass out?


    Guess I have to ask the people outside to find out.


    I quickly re-clean myself and change my clothes. I wore my original clothing the one I was wearing when I first got here since I felt nostalgic.


    I opened the door of my room to see a stranger facing here standing straight with a spear and a shield in his hands.


    I quickly armed myself with a sword and was about to wear my armor when suddenly he kneels in front of me.


    Okay.


    This is new.


    "Your majesty. I apologized for alarming you. I was ordered by my queen to guard this door and let no one disturb you."


    Wait. Did he just call me Your Majesty? Well, I don''t care. I stop caring about what other people call me a long time ago and just roll with it.


    But I was stunned about what he said.


    Someone just ordered somebody to watch this door while I''m sleeping.


    This is the first time that I''m being monitored by a dude while passing out.


    I don''t know if I should be glad that someone is looking out for me or creep out since it really a strange thing to me.


    I just ignored it for now since this is probably a goodwill gesture from the queen.


    "Stand up," I said to the guard since it is starting to bother me looking down to him.


    He quickly rose up to his feet and face me with an indifferent look.


    "Where is Arthur?" I quickly asked since I''m really curious where is he right now.


    I am going to start asking Arthur things about why they are a lot of people in my territory and was just happened with the human and monsters invasions.


    "He is with the queen and the general in the map room discussing things." He quickly answered my question with a nod while pointing his hand to the map room.


    ''I know where it is. I built that room myself.'' I was about to tell him that but I just walked past him towards the map room.


    There are two guards standing on the door and the moment they saw me they quickly kneel on the floor.


    Okay.


    "Open the door." I quickly ordered since it is really getting awkward having people kneel in front of you.


    They quickly rose to their feet and one of them knock on the door shouting something about His Majesty is here.


    I don''t know what with this shouting and knocking when you can just turn the knob to open the door. I should have just opened the door myself but I was worried that the guards will do something if I did.


    The door opened and I can see everyone on the room quickly rose from their chairs.


    I slowly walked inside and I can see everyone eyes on me.


    They are about 5 people here and they are sitting around the table with maps on top.


    Glad to know the chairs came in handy. I placed multiple chairs in this room since I try to use this room to explain things to Arthur and his people about this forest but only Arthur came and we just have a one on one conversation.


    They are only one woman among all the people in this room but I just noticed that the guards outside are women.


    Why can''t they send a woman to greet me outside my room?


    I also noticed that the woman across the table is also staring at me like she wants to eat me. Is she a zombie? I hope not.


    Now that I noticed, all of Arthur''s people have the same look like her when they stare at me.


    I ignored for now and just started walking towards the vacant chair on the front.


    They just keep on standing and they are not saying anything.


    I was starting to worry about how to communicate since I remembered that she was a queen or something.


    When I sit down on the chair, all of them quickly followed with an orderly fashion with the woman sitting first and the rest at the same time.


    Wow. I don''t know what is that about but it is really cool to see.


    Arthur is on the right side of the table while I''m facing directly to the queen.


    I was about to say something when suddenly the queen started talking after clearing her throat for a moment.


    "King Carolus. I''m glad that you are now fully recovered from your recent battle. We are starting to worry since you didn''t come out in your room for one whole day."


    Her voice is soft like cotton candy, unlike the first time I heard her on top of the east wall.


    She also called me King which is shocking since I didn''t know that my Lord status is now King.


    How did that happen?


    But I just ignored it like everything else and was glad that I only passed out for a single day.


    I don''t know what to reply or how to reply since this is my first time talking to a queen so I just nodded my head my head to her.


    "I believe we haven''t fully introduced ourselves so allow me. I''m Queen Thea of Kingdom of Astikuviel." She said while her hand on her chest.


    "This is my general and officers." She moved her hand around the table while introducing them.


    I still didn''t speak and just nodded my head again.


    The room is now quite.


    I can see the queen is now having trouble communicating with me since I just stayed silent.


    "How is your injured?" I finally managed to muster my courage to talk. I try to be as calm as possible.


    She was stunned to hear my voice and I was starting to worry that my tone is probably rude or something.


    "All of the injured have already been treated and we only used the potions that you gave us to the people who are in really grave danger. We still have 4 of them left." She quickly said to me and my worry is suddenly gone since I thought I managed to offend her.


    Oh. Great. I thought the potions that I gave her is not enough.


    "Here. I will return them to you." She then put 4 potions on the table and one of the officers picked them up and walked around to put them in front of me.


    I quickly picked two of the potions while handing the other two to Arthur to used for his two injured people.


    He hesitated at first but I just force it in his hands and he accepted it.


    We started talking for a while about what happened while I was passed out.


    Queen Thea also started talking about thanks and about paying for all the things and stuff but I don''t want to have this kind of conversation so I quickly cut her off and just change the topic to discussed other things but she really insisted that they need to give me something for all the things I''ve done so I just said to escort all of Arthur''s people back home.


    She still has qualms about paying me in emeralds but I just keep saying no since I have plenty of that downstairs and I don''t even know what I''m going to do with them.


    She also said about giving me lands but what I''m going to do with those since I already have a home.


    The meeting went for a while and after discussing things, I quickly head to the roof of the castle keep to have fresh air.

 Episode 28: Primary Purpose (2)

    ******* Queen Thea''s POV *******


    King Carolus quickly left the room after the meeting saying he needs some fresh air.


    Arthur also left chasing after him saying he needs to talk to him.


    King Carolus is really a strange person.


    This is the first time I saw him without his armor on, I was stunned along with everyone in the room.


    I have been in court in the kingdom for a long time and have seen what considered the most beautiful faces in the world but they are nothing compared to him. He also has a hair color of the sun which is hard not to stare at. He wears strange clothing but I can see even from a distance that it is well made.


    I was having trouble communicating with him at first since he doesn''t talk for a while and I was starting to worry that he is probably really angry but I was shocked when he finally speaks.


    The first thing he asked after resting from his battle is about my injured people. I thought he will be furious about us intruding in his castle and about the human and monster invasions but I can''t believe he just let the matter go and was very concerned about my people.


    The bottles he gave us is also really strange.


    At first, I was hesitant to give this to the injured since we don''t what it is but he said they are regenerative potions so I ordered it to give to the most injured.


    It was really effective.


    They fully recovered in only one hour after drinking. It is a miracle drink. I haven''t seen anything like it. It is a lot better than the witches and warlock selling in the market.


    They are still 4 bottles left and the general suggested that we keep it since he gave it to us but I ignored him since King Carolus has already done a lot to us and I''m not going to abuse his kindness.


    I also begin talking about paying him for all the things he has done but he just flat out rejected all my offers about emeralds, lands, and resources. He just asked to escort Arthur and his people back to his home. I told him that their village is fully destroyed but he just casually said that he will provide resources to rebuild it along with all the villages that got destroyed by the Kingdom of Xaerin.


    I don''t know how to reject his offer since it is a really good deal.


    I still have a lot of questions to him but I just stop myself.


    "What do you think?" I ask everyone in the room the moment the door closed shut.


    "I don''t know, my queen. I can''t find any malice or motive behind his words so he probably meant all of them." The general quickly answered my question but he only increases the number of questions in my head.


    I have so many doubts but I just let them go since we are lucky that we are still alive and King Carolus didn''t demand anything from us and even offered to help us.


    But I still can''t let my guard down.


    No one in this world who is this benevolent.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    I quickly followed King Carolus the moment he walked outside the map room to talk to him.


    He is walking towards the stairs to the roof.


    He saw me quickly walking behind him and he nodded his head once to me and keeps on walking.


    That gesture probably meant that he wants me to follow him to the roof.


    I just followed him without saying a single word.


    After reaching the roof, we stand on the corner facing west.


    I wonder why he does this every morning?


    I stare at him while waiting for him to speak first but a moment has passed, there is still silence.


    "King Carolus, let me first say that I apologize for..." I started to speak first to start explaining but he raised his hand to stop me.


    "I believe that conversation was already done in the meeting." He just casually said.


    I can''t believe it.


    I know that he let a lot of matter go but what I did is so wrong.


    I just let intruders in his home without his permission and even gave them permission to use his resources.Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere.


    I was about to protest and ask him to punish me but I just stayed silent.


    "Arthur." I can hear King Carolus speaking after a while.


    "Yes, your majesty." I quickly replied.


    "I have something to do in the basement and I need your help for it."


    "Is this about the zombies?"


    He turns his head to face me and then nodded his head.


    I remembered him saying about curing zombies.


    At that time when he explained that to me, I didn''t actually believe him but from all the things I witness him do and the things he knows, I don''t have doubts about him now.


    I quickly agreed to help him.


    After standing in the roof for a while, we started walking to the basement.


    After reaching the prison room, I quickly opened the door for him and can see that they are already 3 zombies moaning and groaning in the cells.


    "How many people know about this, Arthur?" King Carolus asked me the moment we are inside the room.


    "Only me, Peyton and a handful of my people but I can assure you, your majesty, that the information will not leak. I swear it in the name of the Goddess."


    "What about Queen Thea and her people?"


    "I didn''t allow any of them in the basement and just gave them access to the first floor and some areas of the second floor."


    He turned quiet again and just continued staring at the zombies.


    He started walking to one of the cells and opened it.


    I was shocked about what he is doing but I just calm myself since I''m confident he knows what he is doing.


    The zombie quickly got out in his cell and started walking towards King Carolus.


    This zombie is the same zombie I first saw the first time I came into this room.


    I can see something in King Carolus hand and before I can identify what it is, he quickly threw it to the zombie.


    I can see something breaks and a liquid is splashed in the zombie.


    The zombie then started to become weaker and his movement became sluggish and slower.


    King Carolus quickly moved his hand towards the zombie''s open mouth and shove a golden apple inside.


    The zombie then drops on the floor screaming and gasping for air.


    I don''t know what is happening since King Carolus didn''t explain anything but I just prepared my spear just in case.


    King Carolus just keeps watching the zombie with a calm face and just patiently waiting.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    Okay.


    I can see the zombie crying in pain and most likely is about to die.


    I don''t know if this is a normal thing when curing a zombie in this world or I just did something wrong.


    After talking with Queen Thea and his people, I quickly leave the map room and head to the roof for air.


    I suddenly noticed Arthur chasing after me so I decided to let him follow me since I''m also thinking about doing the zombie curing and I want someone to help me with this in case something goes wrong.


    I didn''t want to waste any more time since I don''t know how long before this zombie villager turns into a permanent zombie.


    There is something wrong though.


    In the game, a zombie that is being cured just emit particles and just shakes for a while before turning into a human but this right here is like a muriatic poisoning.


    I was about to equip my sword to end his suffering when suddenly he stops moving.


    Damn.


    Did he finally die?


    I was about to approach the body to check and see what happened when suddenly it begins to glow.


    The greenish skin is starting to fade.


    After a moment his eyes slowly opened and I can see that it is still the same when he was still undead. Clear and still human.


    The zombie features are all gone and there is a normal human being lying on the floor now.


    "What? What happened?" I can hear the fully cured human talk.


    He sounds weak but I suddenly noticed something.


    "You sound like a woman." I suddenly voice my thoughts which I quickly regretted.


    "I am a woman!" She suddenly shouted at me and she quickly gets up on her feet.


    "Careful with your tone. You are in the presence of..." Arthur started talking and I quickly raised my hand to stop him saying some nonsense things like I am King or something.


    She is really cautious and she maintained her distance from us.


    I don''t really know what to do now.


    I didn''t think this through.


    I was about to start speaking when suddenly she equipped a weapon on her hand that looks like a dagger and charged at me.


    Her movements are so fast for a human but she is not fast enough.


    I just grab her hand with my left hand as the dagger about to touch my neck.


    I also grab Arthur''s spear with my right hand as it is about to pierce the woman''s head.


    ''Why does everybody in this world resort quickly to violence?''


    The woman tried to pull back her hand but she can''t since I''m a lot stronger than her.


    I also release Arthur''s spear and glare at him.


    He quickly lowered down his weapon and took a step back.


    After a moment, I release the woman''s hand since she is about to use her left hand to attack me.


    She quickly distanced herself again and held an eye of ender in her hand while still holding tight on her weapon.


    Wait.


    Don''t tell me.


    She pointed the eye of ender to me.


    The eye of ender then breaks into pieces until it turned into dust.


    Her eyes quickly widened.


    Oh no.


    What is she seeing?


    I haven''t tried the eye of ender to myself so I don''t know what informations she is reading right now.


    I didn''t expect anyone in the overworld to have this item so it is on the bottom of my list of concerns.


    My carelessness and stupidity are now back full force.


    "You... you..." She started to speak after a moment and all of her aggressiveness is now gone and replaced with so much shock.


    "Your age... No... You have lived for a long time. Why I haven''t known you? You are not written in any history books or in any spoken tales."


    She started talking things that I don''t understand.


    She then drops her dagger on the floor and charges at me.


    Arthur was about to get in between us when I motioned him to just stay back.


    She quickly grabs my shirt with both of her hands and I can see so much anger in her face.


    "You have the Goddess''s gifts bestowed upon you. Where were you?"


    "Where were you when the three great monsters ravaged this world?"


    "Where were you when the Kingdom of Aezeokar is almost destroyed from defending mankind from monsters?"


    "Where were you when the four heroes decided to fight the ender dragon by themselves and all of them died?"


    "Where were you when the world needed you the most!?"


    A barrage of questions quickly came out in her mouth.


    She also started crying while furiously trying to shake the answers out of me.


    This is my first time having a woman crying in front of my face.


    I know I have to be considerate or something but what on earth is she talking about?


    ''What goddess''s gifts is she talking about?''


    ''What three great monsters is she talking about?''


    ''What kingdom of something defending the world with something is she talking about?''


    ''What four heroes fighting ender dragon then dying is she talking about?''


    ''And most importantly, what is she talking about the world needing me the most?''


    I also asked a barrage of questions in my mind.

 Episode 29: Primary Purpose (3)

    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    The woman is still screaming questions at King Carolus.


    I don''t understand the things she been asking. The only thing I sort of understand is the thing about the four ancient heroes.


    King Carolus is just standing still letting them woman almost reaping off his shirt.


    I was about to move and stop her whatever she is doing but I just remained still since King Carolus asked me to.


    After the screaming and crying for a while, the woman suddenly starting to lose strength in her legs.


    She loses grip on King Carolus shirt and is about to fall down but King Carolus just quickly catches her.


    He then carries her in his arms and started walking towards me.


    "The weakness status is probably gone but she still weak so bring her upstairs and let her rest." He said to me while handing the unconscious woman to my arms.


    I quickly received her while still wondering what she is talking about.


    I can see that King Carolus is still calm even after all the things that happened.


    I also noticed that the woman said he lived for a long time but I don''t really know how to process that information.


    Did she mean literary that he had lived for a long time or metaphorically?


    I don''t know what is happening but I''m glad to know that there is really a way to cure an individual that turned into a zombie. Now I''m starting to remember all the zombies I killed.


    "What are you waiting for?" I suddenly hear King Carolus voice.


    He asked me since I just remained standing holding the woman in my arms.


    I quickly bowed my head and started walking.


    I was about to open the door and leave when I take a quick glance at King Carolus.


    I fully remembered the one story that my mother used to tell me when I was really young. It is my favorite story and I used to ask my mother to repeat it over and over again every night.


    The story about the four ancient heroes that tried to save the world and the fifth one that supposed to lead them but never appeared.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    Glad the woman passed out after screaming and crying.


    I was starting to panic since I don''t know what she is talking about and she really insisted for me to answer her questions.


    I was thinking on just karate chop her to sleep but just remained still and waited for her to calm down but then she loses consciousness and I just let Arthur carry her upstairs to let her rest.


    The moment the door closes behind me, I quickly breathe out a sigh of relief.


    I don''t know what is going on a while ago but let focus on the zombie curing for now.


    I started walking to the other two zombies to figured out what to do next.


    The first zombie curing is successful so I''m confident that zombie Merek will also be cured so I decided to try to cure the other zombie.


    This zombie has fully black eyes and his skin is really green.


    He is a full-fledged zombie and I doubt he can be cured but I need to try.


    I opened his cell door and waited for him to come out in the open.


    After reaching the middle of the room, I quickly threw a weakness potion at him and the bottle quickly breaks upon hitting his body.


    I noticed that he is starting to get weaker so I take this chance to open his mouth and shove a golden apple inside.


    He started to shake and trash on the ground the same with the first zombie curing.


    After a while, he is starting to turn into a human.


    I was about to turn horrified to myself since I killed a lot of zombies while they still can be cured but when I look at the body, he just remained still and he looks dead.


    I quickly approached the body and started to expect to see if he is breathing or he has a heartbeat.Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.


    Nothing.


    I can hear nothing in his chest and I didn''t notice him breathing even after a long time.


    He is dead


    He is really dead and not the zombie kind dead.


    It seems that you can cure all zombies in this world but the one you can truly save is the one who is not turned for a long time.


    I theorized this by seeing the differences in their clothing about how preserved and new it is between the woman and the other zombies so I know that she turned into undead months or probably weeks ago.


    I just wasted one potion of weakness and a golden apple but it doesn''t matter. This is for the name of science.


    I stared at the dead body and wonder what to do with it.


    I should get rid of this and give him a proper burial.


    I can''t just carry him upstairs though because it might cause a misunderstanding.


    I just have to carry him out of here using the tunnel and bury him somewhere in the north.


    I grab a huge clothe in my inventory to cover the body for the meantime.


    I quickly got back on my feet and started walking to the final zombie in my basement.


    I began staring at zombie Merek while he is banging in the bars of his cell.


    Okay.


    Arthur really hates this guy but I don''t want him to stay a zombie for long.


    I might need him when I decided to travel to the Kingdom of Xaerin.


    I quickly opened his door cell and walked inside.


    I tackled him to the ground and force him to drink the weakness potions and shove a golden apple inside his mouth.


    I didn''t bother to wait for him to turn into a human and just lock his cell door leaving him inside.


    I quickly turned my attention to the dead body on the floor and began wrapping him carefully with clothing I just used to cover him.


    I then carefully carry him in my arms and started walking to the tunnel.


    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    "What are we still doing here, Rose? We already lose half of our people from skeleton and slime attacks. You want all of us to die?"


    I can hear the leader of my guards but I just ignored his plea since we still haven''t found the person we are looking for.


    The prophet said that the person that was promised by the goddess to save this world is inside this forest.


    We were given an order to find that person.


    We set out with around 100 people equipped with decent armor and weapons but there are only about less than 50 of us right now.


    I know this is a foolish mission given to us but I have to find him and ask him why he is done nothing for a long time and why he just stayed hidden.


    "Zombies! There are a lot of zombies coming here!"


    I can hear someone shouting from a distance and quickly ready my bow.


    I''m riding a horse so I can see the surroundings better than everyone even in the darkness of the night and I can now see lots and lots of zombies coming towards here.


    I began ordering everyone to defend themselves and I also started shooting arrows to the coming horde.


    We managed to hold out at first but was quickly overrun since there is so many of them.


    Even with the odds, I still continue firing arrows until I was grab in my horse and was thrown on the ground.


    I quickly equipped my dagger and shoved it in the head of the attacker.


    I was about to climb back to my horse when suddenly something just attacked me from behind and bite me in the neck.


    I screamed so hard and my consciousness began to fade.


    My eyes quickly opened and immediately rose up.


    I was greeted with a terrified old woman who is holding a wet towel in her hand and quite a lot of children around me.


    I noticed that I''m sitting in a very comfortable bed and was covered with a beautiful blanket.


    I also noticed that I''m now holding a bow and arrow in my hand.


    I can see everyone around me is very afraid so I quickly store my weapon back to my inventory.


    I raised both of my arms to let them know I mean them no harm.


    "Bad dream?" The old woman asked me after the intense moment finally died down.


    I didn''t answer her and just nodded my head and started looking at the surroundings.


    I am in a room made of stone and noticed that the door of this room is made out of iron.


    Who in this world would waste an iron crafting it into a door?


    I also look above me and see a beautiful block that emits an elegant glow that is both soothing and relaxing.


    "Oh. King Carolus just recently replaced all the lighting in the castle. He called them glowstone and they are really beautiful." I can hear the woman explaining things from me since I keep staring at the block.


    "Children. Would you mind leaving the room while I talk to the young lady?" She turned to face the children and quickly ordered them to leave.


    They immediately run towards the door and after a while, there is only me and the old woman in this room.


    The old woman sat on the chair beside the bed and hand me what it looks like a cup of water.


    "Thank you," I said while grabbing the cup and slowly drink it.


    "I was starting to worry that you might not wake up since you were asleep for about three days."


    What? I was sleeping for about three days?


    I started to think about what happened before I passed out.


    I then remembered something.


    I finally found him.


    The man I was looking for.


    I quickly shoved away the blanket that was covering me and was about to stand when I noticed that I''m really weak and having a hard time moving my body.


    The woman quickly helped me so I don''t fall on the floor and tried put me back on the bed.


    "What are you doing? King Carolus said that you might still be very weak for being a zombie for a long time."


    Zombie? Did I turn into a zombie?


    I started inspecting my body for any symptoms of turning into a zombie but I didn''t see anything.


    "Don''t worry. The king said that he fully cured you." I can hear the woman saying something while I was furiously checking my body.


    What? Did he cure me?


    That is impossible.


    The way to cure someone that is starting to turn into a zombie or that is already turned is by forcing them to drink a weakness potion and force them to eat a golden apple.


    But there are no longer golden apples in this world.


    The golden apples started to run out in this world the moment the tree of hope vanished.


    The last recorded golden apple that is used to save a life is about a century ago.


    "My name is Eleanor."


    The old woman started to introduce herself after I calmed down while trying to cover me again with a blanket.


    She smiled really brightly and I was mad at myself for not noticing that she probably took care of me while I was asleep.


    "Rose. My name is Rose." I said to her after a while.


    "What a beautiful name for a beautiful lady." She said to me while she started to wipe the wet towel in my body.


    I didn''t complain since I can barely move my body and let her clean myself.


    I was named after a flower by my father.


    I have the same red hair color as my mother so my father decided to call Rose.


    I remembered him keep saying these words to me.


    ''You are the most beautiful flower that bloomed in this world.''


    If only he didn''t die defending the kingdom from phantom invasions.

 Episode 30: Primary Purpose (4)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    I am doing my first daily routine right now of standing in the roof of the castle keep staring at the west.


    This is a habit of mine when I was back in my own world doing yoga exercises on the attic of my home before the sun touches my back but I can''t do that here since it is no longer necessary since I''m strong as hell and there is no need to maintain my body.


    I also do other things like teaching the children how to read and write in the enchanting room since all of my books and writing tools are there and I feel sorry for them since there didn''t get any education because of the war and invasions.


    Arthur suggested to also teach the children how to fight but it is not necessary since I''m here and I''m not going to let anybody hurt them while they are staying in my territory.


    I''m also busy redecorating my castle.


    I replaced all of the lamps with glowstones to conserve light resources.


    I also added rooms on the second floor to accommodate the number of people that are staying in my castle and also built temporary shelters on the first floor to make sure that everyone can sleep on beds and not from their makeshift sleeping bags.


    The beds alone cost me quite a lot of wools and strings but thankfully Queen Arachne left chests full of strings and other things outside the gate.


    I don''t know when Queen Arachne left these chests but there is a written note with only three words in it along with her name on the bottom.


    ''Gifts and apology.


    Queen Arachne.''


    I don''t know what she meant by that but I''m not complaining since I''m glad that somebody is giving me free gifts especially when I needed it the most.


    Oh. I''m also busy feeding more than FIVE HUNDRED HUMAN BEINGS in my territory.


    I am already feeding Arthur and his people but I''m now also feeding Queen Thea and her army.


    Apparently, they run out of food and they needed my help.


    They only managed to bring one month worth of food with them when they left their capital and they already ate most of it.


    I don''t exactly have problems with sharing my food supply since I have quite a lot of it and I can just quickly grow them using bonemeal and I also have a ton of them.


    But damn.


    They consume so much food every day. They managed to eat more food than my cows, sheep, and chickens combined. They are even worse than my pigs.


    I didn''t complain to them since I don''t want them to starve to death and I don''t really know what I''m going to do with my surplus food.


    I also learned that they don''t actually know about the bonemeal trick.


    Apparently, they only rely on what they called fertilizer to nourish their crops.


    They are really happy knowing about this simple trick but only some of them can craft the bonemeal. They said that their crafting skills are not that high to be able to craft it. I don''t really understand what they are talking about so I just ignored it for now.


    I can hear someone walking behind me while I''m still pondering in my thoughts.


    "King Carolus. Queen Thea and her general are already in your room waiting for you." I can hear Arthur''s voice behind me.


    I just turned around and nodded to him once.


    Queen Thea requested to have a talk with me about something again.


    She keeps asking me to talk about things and I just flat out reject her since it is bothersome but it looks like I can no longer avoid her since she is already in my room.


    I started walking towards my room along with Arthur following behind me.


    I managed to reach my room and I quickly opened the door.


    Queen Thea immediately saw me and both her and the general rose in their chairs.


    I quickly walked inside my room and sit on the chair.


    Queen Thea quickly followed and both the general and Arthur immediately sit in their chairs after her.


    This is really cool to see and it never gets old.


    "What is it do you want to talk about, Queen Thea?" I quickly get to the point since I really don''t want to go to the process of pleasantries before the conversation starts.The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.


    "Straight to the point, I see. As you can tell, I and my army are about to leave to go back to our kingdom." She said while keeping her tone gentle.


    I really miss her voice when she was on the wall ordering her army. Strong and authoritative.


    She then placed a paper on the table.


    "This is a letter of recognition. It has my signature on it and the royal seal of my kingdom. You can use it to be able to get inside my kingdom if ever you decide to travel there. You can also use this to be able to stay in the Lord''s and Lady''s castle and have the best accommodations."


    Okay.


    I don''t know what this about but this is a really useful paper so I just accepted it.


    "You can also send me an invoice for all the things you have done and given to us. Don''t hesitate to demand whatever amount you deemed necessary."


    Okay.


    This one I will rather ignore since I don''t really care about money.


    After hearing her talk for a while, the meeting was about to be concluded when there is someone knocking on the door.


    "I guess that''s about it, King Carolus. Once again, thank you for all the things you have done. Hope we will meet again in the future." Queen Thea said after babbling for a while.


    I was about to fall asleep this entire meeting but I managed to stop myself.


    She then stands in her chair and walks towards the door.


    Her general is right behind her.


    She opened the door and I can see the red hair woman outside.


    I remembered that her name is Rose and she recently woke up yesterday.


    Rose tried to kneel to the floor but she was stopped by Queen Thea who is starting to leave.


    After seeing Queen Thea disappeared, Rose quickly walked inside the room and closed the door.


    She also tried to kneel in front of me but I stopped her and asked her to sit on the chair.


    Nobody was talking and the room is starting to fill with so much tension.


    She just keeps staring at me and it looks like she really wants to kill me.


    "Can I speak freely, Your Majesty?" She then asked after a while.


    I nodded my head.


    "So, you''re the man who abandoned his kind for 500 years." She quickly said in a really toxic tone.


    "You don''t have the..." Arthur was about to say something to her but I just raised my hand to stop him.


    I still don''t really know what she is talking about why she is really angry at me.


    "What makes you say that?" I asked her to be able to extract information about the things she said in the basement.


    "''What makes you say that?'' Don''t play dumb with me! You stayed hidden for a long time while the monsters ravaged this world!" She shouted at me while standing in her chair.


    Arthur was also about to stand in his chair but I just put my hand on his shoulder to hold him down.


    My intuition is telling me that Rose is about to equip her weapon. I can also feel Arthur is about to hold a weapon on his hand.


    Dammit, everyone.


    Why does everybody is so violent in this world?


    Thankfully, no one is equipping their weapons and Rose sat down on her chair after her emotional outburst.


    "What are you talking about? What are these things you keep asking King Carolus?" Arthur asked Rose a series of questions.


    Thank you, Arthur.


    I was about to ask her those questions.


    "I guess the rest of the world has already forgotten about the history and only the kingdom of Aezeokar is the only one who remembers them."


    She started talking for a while and I think that she thinks I already know what she is talking about which is not by the way and just focused on Arthur.


    She started telling a story about how the great Ender dragon was born with the greed and malice of the humans.


    The Ender dragon was born in a place of eternal darkness and is so powerful that she started creating floating lands and filling them with monsters.


    She is not content with her creations in the endless void so she breathes a huge fire in her mouth that managed to break the space and created a new dimension filled with lava and fire.


    She also filled this fiery dimensions with monsters.


    She started to get bored traveling between these two dimensions admiring her creations so she tried to travel to the overworld but cannot do it since it is protected by the Goddess of all creations.


    She was really angry about this and screamed so strong that it manages to crack a small gateway connecting the three dimensions.


    The gateway was so small that she cannot pass through so she just sends her creations and ordered them to conquer this world in her name.


    So many monsters passed through the gateway and ravaged the four kingdoms.


    There was no order or glory in the attack and just they kill everything in their path.


    There were three great monsters that lead each of the individual types of monsters and they were also other great monsters but they not as active and even some of them just content on staying in one place.


    The kingdom of Xaerin, Astikuviel, Aezeokar, and Chaephitopia banded together for the first time and tried to stop this madness but failed miserably.


    The people started praying to the Goddess for help.


    The Goddess quickly answered their prayers and gave gifts to each leader of the kingdoms to be able to fight back.


    She also said that there is someone who will lead all the leaders who are granted gifts to defeat all the monster and to stop the ender dragon but the promised person never came.


    The king of Aezeokar decided to lead them himself and started calling themselves as the heroes who will save the world.


    Three kings and one queen managed to push back the three great monsters with their combined armies in a forest but they didn''t manage to kill them since they are so powerful.


    The world cheered for this victory.


    The ender dragon was so angry about this and screamed once again to create another small gateway. She not only created one but managed to create so many and it is scattered all over the world.


    Instead of sending monsters, this time she just started breathing fireballs through.


    It rained down on the world and managed to burn more than half of the world.


    Despair quickly returned to everyone.


    The four heroes don''t have a single clue about how to stop the ender dragon so they decided to just fight her head on.


    They assemble an army so big and equipped them with diamond armor and diamond weapons that it depleted all of the diamonds resources of this world.


    The ender dragon saw this foolish struggle and just welcome them by creating a small portal in her own giant floating island connecting to the overworld.


    The combined army saw this opportunity and quickly charge forward.


    They were met with death and destruction.


    The king of Aezeokar quickly ordered a retreat and managed to only save about half of the army.


    The four heroes then started thinking about how to stop the ender dragon and they only managed to find a way to just trap her.


    They attacked once again but this time they started building obsidian towers around the island and placed an ender crystal on top that they managed to craft to chain the ender dragon in her own island.


    They managed to succeed but most of them died including the four heroes.


    Only a handful of people managed to get back to tell the tale.

 Episode 31: Primary Purpose (5)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    I''m sitting alone in my room right now.


    I quickly send both Arthur and Rose outside to process all the information that I recently know.


    I can''t believe what just Rose said about the ender dragon.


    The ender dragon is powerful as heck.


    She alone created two dimensions and all the monsters.


    She then sends them to this world which is crazy since I fought with her creations and they are really strong so I started to wonder how strong she really is.


    She also defeated thousands of armies equip with diamond armor and weapons all by herself.


    Now I know the reason why there are no people in this world wearing or using any diamonds.


    The diamond resources are already depleted in this world but I wonder why there are still diamonds in this forest? Probably because they can''t mine it with the monsters strolling around and originating from here.


    I got lucky that I managed to mine some of the diamonds though I wonder about the lands beyond the known world.


    Is this flat world have a world border or you''ll just fall to your death once you reach the edge? It will be quite funny to know that this world is shaped like a very big cube.


    The ender is nothing like the game.


    Is she the one destroying this world?


    Is this goddess of all creations the one who send me here?


    Am I supposed to save this world?


    A series of questions soared in my head that I''m about to lose my mind.


    Rose also gave me a letter that supposed to be written by a prophet or something.


    She said that I''m the only who can read this in this world and this is a message from the goddess.


    Apparently, Rose was sent to carry this message to gave to me.


    She sent out together with 100 people and all of them perish.


    I stare at the letter that I''m holding right now.


    I have no idea if this letter is really meant for me.


    I opened the letter.


    I was shocked to see that it is written with the language that I know back in my own world.


    **************


    ''I know you have so many questions.


    Why are you here in this world?


    What you are set to do?


    Why you?


    Don''t worry. I''m going to answer them all but you have to travel to the Kingdom of Aezeokar.


    People of this world are starting to forget about me and I''m starting to lose my connections to them.


    I can now only talk to a single person.


    They call that person the prophet.


    Meet with that person.


    I will be waiting for you.


    - Goddess''


    **************


    What is this?


    Someone is really responsible for sending me to this world and it is goddess no less.


    Oh my god.


    I smack my head hard on the table.


    Why me?


    I rolled my head to the side so I breathe.


    My situation is starting to get more complicated but at least I have a primary purpose now.


    I know my destination and I know who I''m going to talk to.


    I folded the letter and kept it in my inventory for safe keeping.


    I decided to go to the enchanting room to read once again the journals and books.


    I thought the stories about the heroes and their conquests written in those books are just myths so I just ignored it but now I''m not sure.


    Damn.


    Why I am so stupid and carefree?Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    I started walking outside my room and see that Rose and Arthur are no longer on the third floor.


    I don''t know where they are so I just keep walking towards the enchanting room.


    I opened the door and surprised to see Queen Thea is in the enchanting room.


    I thought she preparing to leave. What is she doing here?


    I can see her holding an enchanted stone hoe in her hands.


    ******* Queen Thea''s POV *******


    After meeting with King Carolus, I was about to go to my general to help him prepare the army to leave when I decided to have a quick look around in the castle one last time.


    I went into the map room first to look at maps for the last time.


    I remember not sleeping at all and just keep on formulating strategies in this room.


    After looking around in the map room, I decided to just get back to my duties and start being a queen again when I saw the door of the enchanting room.


    I remember seeing King Carolus in that room teaching the children how to read and write.


    I went inside the enchanting room to have a look around.


    I opened the door and saw lots and lots of books in the bookshelves and an enchanting table in the corner.


    A table and a bunch of chairs are placed here to which King Carolus used for the children''s education.


    I started opening books and read for the meantime.


    There is a lot of information here though they are dated, it is still useful like the research about monsters by Oliver Cromwell.


    I wonder where did King Carolus get these books?


    I started to get bored with the books so I started opening chests to see what is inside.


    I know that I''m not supposed to do this but King Carolus said that we can do whatever we want and be feel at home.


    I saw quite a lot of things inside the chests like tools, weapons, and armors.


    They vary from wooden to stone to iron.


    Almost all of them are enchanted that I started to wonder who is talented enough to be able to enchant these many items.


    I randomly picked an item like a stone sword and a stone shield.


    They are not well made and so worn out so it is probably a junk item.


    I held so many items in my hands until I started to go with the farming tools and saw a particular item.


    An enchanted stone hoe.


    I quickly held it in my hand and saw that it is enchanted with Unbreaking I and Efficiency I.


    This is a really rare item to have two enchantments.


    The only one I know that can do this is my mother.


    I remembered that my mother gave my father an enchanted hoe with the same enchantments to help him with his work.


    Is this the same hoe that my mother gifted to my father?


    I suddenly heard the door opened and saw King Carolus outside.


    He saw me and he then slowly walked inside.


    Does he know what happened to my father?


    "Do you know?" I suddenly asked him.


    My mind is so confused right now and I don''t really know what did I just said.


    He looked at me with confusion.


    I was about to start explaining when he started to walk towards one of the chests in the room.


    "Now I think about it. Your name sounds familiar." I heard him speak while he is looking at the contents of the chests one by one.


    After a moment, I saw him holding a satchel in his hand.


    I remember that satchel.


    That is what my parents use to hold their letters.


    He noticed my intense gaze towards the satchel and handed it to me.


    I quickly put the hoe in my inventory and received the satchel.


    I frantically read the letters one by one.


    No doubt.


    This is my parent''s handwriting.


    What is this doing in here?


    "Based on your reaction and your crying, it seems your the daughter of Rolf and Maria." I suddenly heard King Carolus voice.


    I didn''t notice that I started crying and I quickly wipe my tears away.


    This is not a fit behavior for a queen but no matter how I wipe my tears, they still keep on going.


    I noticed King Carolus is handing me what looks like a towel.


    I quickly receive it and started cleaning my face.


    "Why do you...?" I was now having trouble speaking since I''m crying so hard.


    I saw that King Carolus is just standing beside me not speaking.


    I can''t see any judgment in his eyes or any type of critic on what I''m doing right now.


    He just patiently waited for me to calm down.


    I took a deep breathe after a while to calm myself down.


    "I apologized for my awful display," I said to him while bowing my head.


    He didn''t speak and just nodded his head.


    After a long time, I finally have a clue about my father.


    "How did you get these?" I finally cleared my mind and asked him a question.


    "From your father."


    "What!? He is alive?"


    "No. I killed him." He quickly answered my question with an indifferent tone.


    I was so shocked about what he just said.


    I was about to equip my sword but I managed to stop myself.


    "Why?" I just asked him a question but my mind started to become clouded again.


    "He was already a zombie." He just casually said while staring at me.


    "I see." I just said to him since I don''t really know what to say.


    I don''t really know what to feel right now.


    Am I supposed to be happy that I finally found information about my father that I can now tell my mother''s grave or be sad knowing he turned into a zombie and got killed?


    I was about to return the satchel and the stone hoe in the chest when King Carolus said to just bring it with me since it belongs to my parents.


    I thanked him once again and started walking outside the keep.


    I''m starting to wonder what I''m going to do with my life.


    I accepted being a queen of Astikuviel so I can find information about my father but now I finally found it, I don''t really know what to do.


    I just emptied my mind and continued walking.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    I was about to start preparing things to leave with Queen Thea and her army when suddenly I know the story about King Carolus.


    I chased after Rose in the tower in the northwest of the castle since she quickly left when King Carolus ordered to be left alone.


    We are standing side by side and nobody is talking.


    "Is it true about all the things you just said?" I asked Rose after a while.


    "Do you think I''m lying?" She answered my question with a question while turning her head to stare at me.


    I stayed silent again.


    I can''t believe that King Carolus is the hero that the world is waiting for.


    Why did he decide to hide instead of helping mankind?


    He probably has a reason for it.


    Rose also said that he is 528 years old which is hard to believe but considering what he can do, it is not impossible.


    She also knows about his abilities and gifts.


    I don''t know how she got this information but I think it is something to do with the ball with an eye inside that she used in the basement.


    "What are you going to do?" I just asked her after a moment.


    "I''m going to convince, no, I''m going to demand from him to come with me back to my kingdom to talk with the prophet."


    Her voice is so full of hatred.


    I don''t know what happened to her but I''m pretty sure her anger is placed at the wrong person.


    We created this problem.


    Our greed is what brought the ender dragon to life and filled this world with monsters.


    King Carolus didn''t ask for this so why does he need to clean up our problems?


    I didn''t voice any of my thoughts and just remained silent.


    After a while, I just left her in the tower and started walking back to the keep to start preparing for the journey.


    The queen said that they will leave tomorrow the moment the sun rises in the sky.


    I also need to start preparing on how to save my people in the Kingdom of Chaephitopia.


    I still don''t know what my plan is but I''m not going to abandon them and I''m going to do whatever it takes to save them.


    I stopped for a moment and look up to the sky.


    ''Goddess. I know I always asked for you a lot of things but this time, only your blessings are what I needed from you and also give me the courage to fight my enemies.''

 Episode 32: Primary Purpose (6)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    It is so early in the morning right now.


    The sun is still not in the skies but everyone in my territory is already awake.


    At last, they are finally leaving.


    Queen Thea and her army are already mounted outside the castle and they are ready to go along with Arthur and his people.


    The army is so organized and they are even in battle formation even though they are no enemies to fight.


    Queen Thea ordered to her general to stay vigilant until they are out of this forest.


    Arthur''s people are now riding in horses and they are in the center of the formation which is great since they are thoroughly protected.


    I can see Rose still in the center talking to somebody.


    She probably thanking the old woman who took care of her while she is unconscious.


    I can also see Arthur and Queen Thea starting to ride their way here near the end of the bridge I''m standing.


    They quickly dismounted their horse the moment they reached me.


    "Once again, thank you, King Carolus, for everything. I promise I will return this favor that my kingdom owed you." Queen Thea quickly said to me while slightly bowing her head.


    I got sick and tired of her thanking me but I just nodded my head to her as a sign of respect.


    I then quickly remembered something.


    "Here. Take this." I said to Queen Thea while touching her left shoulder.


    I transferred an ender chest in her inventory.


    The way you gave someone your item in your inventory in this world is by touching them.


    I learned this while observing everyone in my territory these past few days.


    I can see Queen Thea looking at the empty space in front of her and she is quite confused.


    She is probably looking at her inventory wondering what did I just gave to her.


    "That is an ender chest. I''m the one who crafted it so it is only connected to me. You can use that to send messages and communicate with me. You just have to place it in a secure location." I quickly explained to her how to use an ender chest.


    I experimented with how to use the ender chest.


    It turns out you can only connect all the ender chest you placed if you are the one who crafted it. It will not work if it belongs to someone else.


    The ender chest that I picked up in the nether is still being used as a means to communicate between the pigmen.


    I wonder why they didn''t change their ender chests?


    They probably know that I stole one their ender chest.


    I just ignored it since it is pretty useful to know the activities of the pigmen.


    I can see Queen Thea is still confused but she just nodded her head.


    "Oh. Remember to put it in a place you sure you want to put it since you don''t have a diamond pickaxe to break it." I quickly reminded her.


    She nodded her head again and then she turned around to mount her horse and go to her army.This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    Arthur then stepped forward after seeing me and Queen Thea finished our conversation.


    "King Carolus. Thank y..."


    I immediately interrupted him by raising my hand.


    Look. I know you people are grateful but a single thank you is already enough.


    Arthur stared at me for a moment.


    He then equipped a diamond spear in his hand.


    "I supposed I have to return it to you." He said to me while handing over the spear.


    I didn''t receive it and just pushed it back to him.


    "No. Keep it. You still need it."


    I can see a shock in his eyes but he just nodded his head.


    I heard him saying something to Queen Thea about saving his people in the Kingdom of Chaephitopia.


    I don''t know what his plan is but that diamond spear will absolutely help him in his rescue mission.


    I really want to help him rescue his people but I''m already stuck in this world long enough and I really want to get home.


    I need to go talk to the goddess and ask her to send me back to my own world.


    He said his goodbyes once again and mounted his horse to leave.


    I watch him slowly moving away towards the rest of his people.


    I also see the children standing up in their horses waving their hands at me.


    Damn.


    They haven''t left yet but I already miss them.


    I also wave my hand back at them while smiling.


    I can hear Queen Thea ordering to start moving.


    They are now galloping west back to their kingdom.


    I was worried about them but they are probably fine since I gave them enough food for three months and I also gave them resources to rebuild their villages.


    I can see Rose starting walk towards me.


    I just turned myself around and started walking towards the castle.


    I can hear Rose started running.


    "What are you doing?" I can hear her asking me a question.


    I didn''t turn around and just continued walking.


    "Back to my castle," I answered her while maintaining my walking speed.


    "No! You have to come with me!" She quickly shouted at me while trying to grab my left shoulder to stop me.


    I''m a lot stronger than her so she just starting to get drag in her feet while I just continued walking.


    I let out a huge breathe of annoyance and stop walking.


    I then face her.


    "I can''t let you run away again from your destiny."


    She is now holding a bow and arrow in her hand.


    Okay.


    "And your plan of convincing me is by shooting an arrow?" I asked her this question since I''m starting to wonder what she is thinking right now.


    I already plan to travel with her back to her kingdom in the northwest from here so why is she doing this?


    I can see her nock an arrow and starting to draw her bow.


    She then aimed at me.


    ''She can''t possibly shoot me.''


    She then released the string of the bow and let the arrow loose.


    ''Okay. She is crazier than I thought.''


    The arrow flies straight towards my head but before it hit me, I just grab it with my right hand.


    I know I can just twist my head to avoid it but my perception of time is starting to change since I can now see fast moving things so clearly.


    This is probably because I am now much faster and stronger.


    I really don''t know what is happening to my body since I tried the eye of ender to myself, it just displayed my regular status and nothing more.


    I wonder if the eye of ender only works to another being and not yourself?


    This is the reason why I still don''t know what she is talking about.


    She was really shocked that I''m able to catch an arrow in mid-flight.


    She then nocks another arrow in her bow.


    Dammit, lady.


    I equipped my bow in left hand.


    I used the arrow that I caught to nock in the bow and pulled the string.


    I quickly released the arrow before she can release her string.


    The arrow then breaks her bow into two and cut the bowstring.


    The arrow just barely misses her head and even some of her red hair was cut.


    She held what is remaining of her bow in her hands.


    I can see sadness starting to fill her face.


    "My father''s bow." I can hear her saying something while caressing what is left of her bow.


    Okay. I made a huge mistake.


    Sadness quickly faded in her face and then I can see her filled with so much hate.


    She threw away her bow and quickly equipped a dagger in her right hand.


    She then started to charge at me.


    ''How about we calm down and let''s talk this out.'' I just said in my head while watching her about to attack me.


    I got no choice.


    I grabbed her hand before the dagger hits me and then karate chop her in her neck to sleep.


    She quickly fainted.


    I made sure to only use a little bit of force to make sure she won''t die.


    I put her on the ground for the meantime and picked up her broken bow.


    I then carry her in my arms like a princess and started walking back towards the castle keep.


    I put her in the room on the second floor where she is taken cared of while she is unconscious from being cured.


    I also placed my diamond bow and wrote a note in the chair beside the bed.


    I know that iron bow she has was important to her since I heard her it is from her father and I can just fix it but she needs a better weapon if she wants to travel in this forest.


    I also need to give her armor.


    I leave the room after writing the note and started walking to the third floor to start crafting and enchanting an armor.


    I also decided to make another diamond bow and another spear since it is pretty useful to have multiple weapons you can use in the battle.


    I quickly get work while wondering when she is going to wake up.


    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    I can see so many phantoms in the dark sky.


    So many soldiers are frantically shotting arrows and bolts to kill them.


    My father is one of them.


    He is the Lord in charge of the eastern border.


    I''m with him right now to visit him and to see the ocean.


    This invasion was unexpected so I''m now hiding in the Lord''s castle.


    I can barely see what is happening outside since the windows of this castle are so small to make sure none of the phantoms get through.


    I can see the soldiers struggling and most of them are now dead or being carried into the sky by the much bigger phantoms.


    The door of the Lord''s room suddenly burst open and I can see my father and a bunch of soldiers behind him.


    "We can still hold the border until the reinforcements arrive but I need you to take my little girl back to the capital." I can hear my father talking to one of his soldiers.


    The soldier then bows his head and started to jog towards me.


    The soldier tried to carry me but I just dodge him.


    He managed to grab after a while.


    "No! Let go of me! I''m not going anywhere!" I quickly shouted at the soldier while trying to struggle his hold on me.


    I can see in the soldier face the confusion since he doesn''t know what to do.


    My father quickly walked towards me and kneel with one leg to face me eye to eye.


    "Look, Rose. I know you are scared and confused but your father will take care of this like he also does." He quickly said to me while smiling so brightly.


    He then hugged me really tight and kissed my forehead.


    All my fears are now gone and I now feel so much safe.


    "I love you, baby girl."


    "I love you, dad."


    He let go of me after a moment and then hand me over to the soldier.


    The soldier quickly held me in his arms and we are now starting to run towards the door.


    "Look at your inventory, Rose! I gave you something special!." I can hear my voice while we are now running towards the stables.


    I quickly look at my inventory to see that there is a bow made of iron.


    I suddenly heard a loud screeching sound coming from the sky while we are now on the field.


    I tried to look past the head of the soldier to see that my father is now holding a bow fighting a really big phantom.


    He managed to shoot a couple of arrows before he was grabbed by the giant phantom.


    "NOOO!" I shouted really loud while watching him being drag away in the sky.


    I tried to convince the soldier to turn around to save my father but he just continued running forward.


    My eyes quickly opened and I can see a stone ceiling and a glowstone.


    I quickly get up and wipe away my tears.

 Episode 33: The Overworld Journey (1)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    Okay.


    Before I''m going to start crafting weapons and armors, I have to take care of something first and that is my territory.


    There will be nobody left to take care of my castle since I''m leaving so I need to harvest my crops and release the animals.


    I also need to gather all the necessary things in the storage that I think is necessary in this world.


    I started walking towards the farm to start harvesting all of the crops. I didn''t bother to replant them since nobody will be taken care of them.


    After taking care of the crops, I started walking towards the chicken coop to release the chickens.


    I opened the door of the coop and slowly guide the chickens towards the gate using seeds.


    After making sure that every single of the chickens is outside, I quickly head towards the barn to release the remaining animals.


    I was having trouble with releasing the pigs since they are reluctant to move in their place but the sheep and cows are really compliant.


    After a while, I successfully managed to guide all the animals outside.


    All the animals in my territory are now on the field outside the gate except for the two horses since we will be needing them.


    I recently tame another horse that is raised in this forest to give to Rose since horses here can run faster than an average horse. It will be useful since she really wants to get back to her kingdom quickly.


    I watch all the animals on top of the wall and it seems they are not going anywhere.


    They probably used to be taken care of and they don''t want to leave.


    After watching them for a while, I can no longer take it seeing them not leaving so I just crafted a new wooden bow and equipped it in my hand.


    I then nocked an explosive arrow.


    I fired at the moat in front of the gate.


    I made sure to aim in the right direction to make sure not to hurt the animals.


    A huge explosion occurred and lots of water is sprayed all over the place.


    All of the animals frantically run on all directions.


    Good.


    You need to take care of yourself my beautiful meat supply.


    I was just watching them run off in the distance when I suddenly remembered that I have someone sleeping in the keep.


    I quickly turned around to see if there is a very angry lady coming out in the keep but luckily after a moment, I didn''t see any.


    She probably still asleep.


    I hope she wakes up soon since I''m planning to discuss with her what we are going to do and what direction and route we are going to take to get to the Kingdom of Aezeokar.


    After seeing the last animal running away from the castle, I then turned around and jump off on top of the wall to start walking towards the keep.


    I didn''t bother to use the stairs or equip my Feather Falling boots and just land safely on the ground. Ninja moves at its finest.


    After reaching the keep, I quickly head towards the enchanting room to start crafting and enchanting.


    I remembered to prioritize fixing Rose''s bow since she will probably be really mad to me about it.


    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    After waking up from another horrid dream, I quickly wipe away my tears and started to look around.


    I''m in the room where I was taken care of this past couple of days.


    What I am doing in here?


    I remembered being hit in the neck.


    I was probably knocked out and brought here.


    I quickly get up on the bed and saw a blue bow on the chair beside the bed.


    There is also a paper with writing on it.


    I picked up the paper and start reading it.


    ''RoseIf you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    Sorry about your bow. Don''t worry. I''m fixing it right now but you need a better weapon if you want to travel in this forest. I''m giving you my diamond bow. I''m also planning to give you different kinds of arrows.


    PS. I don''t know why you attacked me but I remembered that I already told you that I agreed to travel to the Kingdom of Aezeokar.


    PSS. Just letting you know.


    Carolus Rex''


    I suddenly remembered that my father''s iron bow is broken.


    That bastard destroyed my only remembrance of my father but I quickly calm myself since I remembered I''m the one that attacked him first.


    The way he also talks in his note is strange. It is really different from his regular attitude I keep seeing.


    I put down the note and picked up the blue bow.


    It is really well made and it has meticulous designs on it.


    It is really beautiful.


    I remembered the stories about the strongest material used in weapons, armors, and tools during the first battle of monsters.


    I believed it is called a diamond.


    They said that the world has already run out of this material so I wonder where did he get this?


    I wield the bow in my left hand to try using it.


    I tried to draw the bowstring but it is really hard to pull it all the way.


    How I am able to use this bow?


    How strong you need to be to able to use it?


    I just put away in my inventory and quickly run outside the room.


    I need to find that person quickly.


    He might run off or hide once again.


    I quickly run towards the third floor to see if he is in his room when suddenly I heard something in the enchanting room.


    I opened the door of the enchanting room to see King Carolus hammering an iron armor in the anvil.


    "Oh. You are finally awake." He just casually said to me while still hammering the iron armor.


    I started to walk inside until I saw my father''s bow on the table.


    I quickly picked it up.


    "I already fixed it. Just let me know if the bowstring is little to tight." He said to me while holding the armor in his hands to see his work.


    I tried to draw the bow and was surprised that it is exactly the same. It is perfect. I can''t believe that my father''s bow is now fully fixed like nothing ever happened to it.


    I can see King Carolus starting to walk towards me.


    He then touched my right shoulder.


    I try to shove away his hand but he is too strong.


    "Here. Take these items. You will need it." He said to me while taking his hand off me after a while.


    I quickly opened my inventory to see what he just gave me.


    I was shocked to see a variety of items.


    There is a full set of enchanted iron armor. It is enchanted with so many enchantments that I can''t believe that it is true.


    He also gave me an enchanted diamond dagger.


    There are also different kinds of arrows. I tried to look at each and one of them when suddenly my attention shifts to King Carolus as he starting to walk away.


    I quickly followed him to see where he is going.


    He then opened the door of I believe called the map room since I never been inside.


    I saw a beautiful room with a table and chairs in the center.


    There are also maps on top of the table.


    Everything in this castle is so well made and beautiful.


    I heard a rumor from the soldiers that King Carolus made this castle by himself.


    Instead of saving the world, he just spent entire centuries building a home to hide into.


    I can see him putting a new map on the table.


    "What are you doing?" I suddenly asked him since I''m starting to wonder when is he going to travel to the Kingdom of Aezeokar.


    "I believe this is what you called planning." He just casually answered me while starting to place small wooden figures in the table.


    The small figures are shaped like monsters and people.


    "We are right here right now." He pointed at the center of the map while placing the human figure.


    "This entire map right here is the place that I already traveled in the forest." He continued explaining while starting place the skeleton, zombie, and giant spider wooden figures on the map.


    "You said that your kingdom is in the north of Xaerin so we need to travel northwest from here." He then started to place small wooden sticks to mark our path of travel.


    "We need to make sure to avoid the skeleton fortress in the north and pass through undetected."


    "Why?" I suddenly asked him after listening to him for a while.


    "Because I recently battled with the King of Skeletons so I''m pretty sure he will be not happy about me strolling around his territory."


    What? Did he recently fight with one of the Legendary Monsters?


    The way he also talked about it like it is not a big deal.


    He started talking again and we began planning our journey.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    She is a lot calmer right now than I thought.


    I thought that she will attack me the moment she saw me.


    The first thing that I did when I reached the enchanting room was fixed her father''s bow.


    I made sure to restore it to its original form.


    I''m happy that she has no complained about my restoration.


    After planning for a while for our journey, I decided to call it a day and sleep.


    She complained that we should start moving but I just showed her the clock in my inventory to let her know that it is already night time.


    She was shocked to see a clock.


    It is probably a rare item in this world.


    She is still hesitant to follow my orders so I just left her alone in the map room and started walking towards my room to sleep.


    ******* Prophet''s POV *******


    "You should rest now, Prophet. You keep praying to the Goddess whole day long and it is now night time." I can hear someone talking behind me while I''m kneeling in the altar praying.


    That is probably the king but I just ignored him since I can no longer hear the voice of the Goddess.


    She is probably angry at me for what I have done.


    I made a decision to use my abilities given by the Goddess to help mankind.


    Even though it is so horrifying, I still gave the order to do it so we can have enough resources to fight back our enemies.


    ''Goddess. If only you come down in your heaven to help your children. We will not be desperate enough to start committing crimes.''


    I prayed once again and I still don''t hear her voice.


    I also starting to wonder about Rose since it has been a year and we still haven''t heard from her.


    She probably perished and failed her mission.


    I suddenly can hear someone running from behind.


    "My king! My King! A messenger just arrived. The Kingdom of Xaerin''s army is marching north with 2500 soldiers." I can hear the voice of a man delivering grave news.


    "What!? What did we do with the Kingdom of Xaerin that they are now marching towards us?" The king quickly questioned the soldier but I can''t hear any reply.


    The silence began to fill the room and I stand up after a moment.


    All of the people in the room quickly stared at me.


    I straightened my back and fixed my robe.


    "People of Aezeokar. The goddess has spoken. We need to fight our invaders and crushed them beneath our feet." I spoke to them with a really divine tone while raising my hands in the air.


    They all look at me with confusion but after a while, someone started cheering in the crowd until all of them are now shouting and screaming.


    The king looks at me with a worried face but I just ignored him since he is too soft to handle the kingdom affairs.


    If the goddess won''t help us, I just have to do it myself even if I have to lie to every single one of my people.

 Episode 34: The Overworld Journey (2)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    I woke quite early since I still have a lot more things to do before traveling.


    I quickly cleaned myself and change to the newly made clothes.


    I made new clothes with the design similar to what Queen Thea is wearing. People around me already know me as a King so I might as well live up to the name and start wearing the clothing of royalty.


    There is no mirror in this world so I just use a bucket of water to see my reflection.


    I look quite good, to be honest.


    After looking at reflection for a while, I started walking towards the door and opened it to see Rose standing outside.


    Okay.


    What is she doing?


    She quickly bowed her head the moment she saw me.


    Wow. I got to hand it to her. Even though she really hate me so much, she still shows respect towards me.


    I just told her to start preparing her inventory for the journey and to just wait for me since I still have lots of things to do.


    I quickly walk past her and started walking towards the basement.


    I opened the door of the prison room.


    I saw the fully cured Merek lying in his bed and he quickly got up the moment he saw. I didn''t know that he is also awake so early.


    I slowly walked inside and I can see so much fear in Merek''s eyes.


    "Morning, Merek." I greeted him like we are best friends.


    He doesn''t answer me and just remained silent.


    "I''ll be leaving my territory for a while and I started to ponder what I''m going to do with you," I said to him while slowly walking towards his cell.


    I can see that he is now starting to panic fearing what I have planned for him but on the contrary, I''m going to give a better prison room.


    I opened his cell door and asked him to follow me.


    He was reluctant to follow but he just started walking.


    I can see in his eyes that he already accepted whatever will happen to him like he is about to be executed.


    I actually built him a new room in the basement.


    It is much bigger and better since it has flowing water inside for him to drink and a restroom.


    I also place chests inside the room filled with food enough to last for a year.


    It is a much better lifestyle.


    I know he is still a prisoner but at least he feels like at home with a very soft bed and a variety of clothing.


    He was really shocked by what he is seeing and he is really reluctant to believe that I''m giving him this room to live in. He probably thought this is a trap of some kind but I ignored him and just start explaining things in this room.


    I also make sure that there is no way he is going to escape this room and I double check every inch of this place.


    I know I can just release this guy or hand him to Queen Thea but to be honest, I have forgotten about him since I got the letter from the Goddess.


    I feel bad about it but I still need him for information and bargaining chip.


    He said that I will face the wrath of the Kingdom of Xaerin if I touch him so he is probably a high ranking person in his kingdom.


    "Okay. I guess that''s about it. Do you have any questions?" I said to him after a while.


    He looked at me for a moment and he is still not talking.


    I was about to turn around and start walking when suddenly I heard him speak.


    "How many languages do you speak?"


    What? What is he talking about?


    "I heard you speak Astikuvielian, Xaerinian, and Aezeokarian. You constantly switch languages like it is nothing and you are really fluent in them." He started speaking while looking at me with confusion.


    I also looked at him with confusion.


    What is he talking about?


    What fluent in languages? I only speak one language back in my homeworld and some computer languages because of my work.Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    Now I think about, it is really strange that I''m able to communicate with the people here in this world like we are talking in the same language. My tongue just automatically switches language to whatever suited in the conversation.


    I also can write any type of language like my hands know what they are doing.


    I already past caring about what is happening to my body so I just ignored what he just said.


    I turned around and started walking outside the room.


    I quickly locked the door and double check if it is really secured.


    After making sure that Merek is settled and will not able to escape, I quickly head towards the storage room with Rose to sort out our inventories.


    We started sorting first the food and water since it is the most important thing.


    We carry quite a lot of food and water and I''m relieved to know that both our inventories can store food for a long time and they will not rot.


    It seems that only the inventories of the undead and monsters don''t have the ability to preserve the state of the item stored.


    After sorting out the food and water, we started checking the weapons and armor.


    Then, we moved on to the clothing and other things like camping.


    There are a lot of things we organized but managed to finish early just as the sun is about to rise.


    I made sure that the entire castle is secured and to hide the items stored in my storage room in the different places that I think the people will not find it just in case someone managed to break inside the keep.


    We immediately mount our horses and just use the tunnel in the basement to get out of here.


    I can''t really raise the bridge and opened the gate since there is no one inside to lower the bridge and close the gate.


    I also don''t want the hassle of jumping up and down just to close the gate and lower the bridge or using the ender pearls since it is a waste of resources.


    I suddenly remembered something and quickly held an eye of ender in my hand.


    I then point it at Rose while she is riding her horse.


    "What are you doing?" She quickly asked me and she is shocked to see that I''m holding an eye of ender.


    **************


    Name: Rose Cromwell


    Level: 38 (0 up) 67%


    Race: Human


    Age: 23


    Status: Weak


    Health: ??????????


    Abilities:


    Crafting Level 4 (0 up) 45%


    Enchanting Level 1 (0 up) 11%


    Brewing Level 0 (0 up) 1%


    Cartography Level 5 (0 up) 81%


    Redstone Level 0 (0 up) 0%


    Melee Combat Level 1 (0 up) 25%


    Range Combat Level 3 (0 up) 98%


    Weapon Efficiency Level 2 (0 up) 67%


    Poison Resistance Level 0 (0 up) 0%


    Heat Resistance Level 0 (0 up) 15%


    Cold Resistance Level 3 (0 up) 45%


    Inactive Abilities:


    Inhuman Strenght Level 1 (0 up) 55%


    Inhuman Speed Level 3 (0 up) 55%


    Inactive Goddess''s Gifts:


    Descendant - inherent all the Goddess''s Gifts from a predecessor.


    Monster Hunter - Inhumane Strenght and Speed Level will increase for every monster killed. Strength Level is a third time slower to gain experience from Speed.


    Partial Immortality - The body ages slower than an average human.


    Ranger Skills - all weapons that are range will be much effective in battle.


    Extreme Accuracy - can almost never miss a target.


    Ender Dragon''s Curse - all of the Goddess''s Gifts is blocked and can''t be used and can''t be seen.


    **************


    Whoa!


    No matter how many times I used the eye of ender, I still get surprised by what I''m seeing.


    Her complete name is Rose Cromwell which is intriguing since her last name is familiar. It is probably just a coincidence.


    She is also a year younger than me.


    Her status also says she is weak. She is probably still recovering from being a zombie for a long time. I should postpone the journey for now but I doubt she will agree with me about that but at least her health is still full.


    Her abilities are also a little bit lower than mine but it is still probably great compared to the average people I met in this world though I haven''t used an eye of ender on them.


    But what really shocked me is that she also has gifts from the Goddess. They are blocked by a curse though from the ender dragon which is not great since they are pretty useful.


    I was about to start reading her inactive gifts when suddenly I noticed her pointing a bow at me and she is about to shoot.


    I quickly closed her status and just ordered to start traveling.


    I also make sure to take it slow since she is still weak.


    It didn''t take a while to travel in the tunnel and we managed to reach the former entrance of the mineshaft.


    I quickly mined the iron bars so we can get out and quickly put it back to make sure no monster will get inside.


    I was about to order to start traveling when suddenly I saw the tombstone of the person I just buried near here.


    I don''t really know where to put that person so I just buried him nearby.


    After a moment, I can hear the nagging of Rose to start traveling so I just kicked my horse to move it forward.


    We are now galloping away in my territory and into the territory of the skeletons.


    ******* Legendary Creeper''s POV *******


    ''Wake up''


    I can hear someone''s voice but I just ignored it since I''m still lamenting the betrayal of my own people.


    They quickly used the excuse of the appearance of monsters in this world so they can rose in the ranks and take over my position and my husband''s lands.


    They filed false charges and used our failures from the recent invasion to pin all of them to my family so they can take over our lands.


    They succeeded and they have my husband and my son executed.


    They also punished me by sending me into a mining expedition in the forest near the Kingdom of Astikuviel.


    The tunnels we dug were quickly overrun by zombies and that is the last thing I remembered.


    ''Wake up''


    I can hear the voice again speaking to me but this time I listened.


    ''Good. You finally heed to my call.'' She quickly said to me like she is glad that I finally focused my attention on her.


    ''Do you hate mankind?'' She then asked me a question.


    "Yes."


    ''Do want revenge?''


    "Yes."


    ''Do you want to live again?''


    I was reluctant to answer.


    I don''t really know how to respond to that question.


    After thinking for a while I just said my answer.


    "Yes."


    After saying my answer, I suddenly feel like my body is changing and it really hurts.


    ''Good. You will be reborn and from now on you will be known as The Legendary Creeper'' She said to me while I''m enduring the pain.


    My body is really in pain and I''m about to give up.


    ''Now, use your anger and EXPLODE!''


    I started screaming and I can feel my arms expanding.


    A great explosion suddenly occurred.


    I quickly open my eyes to see that I''m in the bottom of a huge crater.


    My arms are also gone but I noticed after a while they suddenly grew back.


    I can feel the sunlight and I quickly inhaled a huge air.


    I''m alive again.


    I started to inspect my body to see that I change a lot.


    I still have my two hands and two feet but some parts of my body have now green color patches.


    I realized that I''m no longer a human but I don''t care since all I want is all humans in this world to die.


    I was about to get out of the crater when I suddenly noticed a stone tablet that is still intact even after the explosion.


    There is a carving on it.


    It is written in Astikuvielian.


    I quickly read it.


    ''To the forgotten.


    Hope that they are in a better place.


    C.R.''


    So this is my grave.


    I just picked up the huge tombstone marker with my hands and crushed it into pieces.


    I''m a lot stronger now.


    I''m back and I will make sure everyone who did me wrong will pay dearly.

 Episode 35: The Overworld Journey (3)

    ******* Legendary Creeper''s POV *******


    I slowly climbed out of the crater until I reached the ground.


    I know I''m no longer human so I tried to open my status to see what change of me.


    **************


    Name: Arana Assuerus


    Level: 0 (0 up) 0%


    Race: Legendary Creeper


    Age: 719


    Status: Healthy


    Health:


    ?????????????????????????


    ?????????????????????????


    Abilities:


    Inhuman Strenght Level 4 (0 up) 0%


    Inhuman Speed Level 4 (0 up) 0%


    Heat Resistance Level 5 (0 up) 0%


    Cold Resistance Level 5 (0 up) 0%


    Poison Resistance Level 5 (0 up) 0%


    Ender Dragon''s Gifts


    Creeper Body - cannot age no matter how much time passed.


    Creeper Supreme Leader - can command thousands to tens of thousands of creepers by her will.


    Nightwalker - can see in the dark.


    Extreme Regeneration - heal itself at a very fast pace.


    Human Hunter - Inhumane Strenght and Speed Level will increase for every human killed.


    Hatred - can locate humans wherever they are within the radius of a hundred blocks.


    **************


    I see.


    A Legendary Creeper.


    This is my race now.


    There are a lot of changes in my abilities but I can also see other things like the gifts of the ender dragon.


    I was about to read the rest of the status when I suddenly can sense a human nearby.


    I quickly close my status and started running at the direction of whom I believe is a human.


    I can see a very tall wall in the distance with water in front of it.


    I concentrate on my legs to make them explode.


    After a moment, my legs suddenly expanded a little bit and a sudden explosion occurred.


    Another crater was built on the ground and I was hurling in the air over the wall.


    I suddenly saw what appears to be a castle while in mid-air.


    I hit the ground pretty hard and rolled a dozen blocks.


    I waited for my legs to recover so I can stand up.


    After growing back my legs, I quickly run towards the keep of the castle and saw the door is made of iron.


    I equipped my diamond pickaxe and started destroying the iron door.


    I managed to get inside and started to locate the human that I have been looking for.


    I run towards the basement I saw a lot of rooms with iron doors.


    I can feel the human in one of these rooms and started destroying the door with the diamond pickaxe.


    It didn''t take long for me to get inside and saw a human standing in front of me.


    He is shaking pretty hard and I can see so much fear in his eyes.


    Human.


    He is a human being.


    I want him dead.


    "I knew it this is a trap! I''m going to die!" The human started shouting and is on the ground kneeling and crying.


    I started to walk towards him and grab him in his throat using my right hand.


    I raised him high in the air until he started to have trouble breathing.


    I then concentrated in my right hand.


    An explosion quickly occurred and smoke begins to fill the room.


    After a moment, the once beautiful room is now destroyed and there is nothing left of the human.


    My right hand quickly regenerated.


    ''Find the room with obsidian in it.''


    I can hear once again the voice of a woman. She is probably the great ender dragon that is destined to destroy this world.


    I quickly destroyed every door in the basement to find what I''m looking for.


    After a while, I finally found the room with obsidian in it.


    I started mining the obsidian.


    I took a while to mined two obsidians since it is believed to be the second hardest block in this world next to bedrock.A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    I walked inside the room to see what appears to be a gate of some kind.


    ''Fix the portal and ignite it.''


    I quickly placed the missing obsidian in the portal.


    I raised my right hand and concentrated on it.


    My hand exploded and something purple quickly envelope the portal.


    The portal is now open and I can see something on the other side.


    I started walking towards the portal.


    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    We are now slowly riding towards the northwest.


    I was about to complain about the slowness of our travel but I''m still very weak and King Carolus probably knows it since he used the eye of ender to me.


    I have no idea that he has that kind of item but I should have expected it since he is a hero that is blessed by the Goddess.


    I only have 3 eye of enders with me and I already used one of them to King Carolus.


    The eye of enders was given to me by the prophet so I can determine the identity of the hero.


    When I met King Carolus for the first time in the basement, I know something is odd about him and decided to use the eye of ender to him to see his status.


    My intuition is right and I finally found the person I was looking for and we are now starting to go back to the Kingdom of Aezeokar.


    We travel for the whole day without talking or anything.


    The sun is now starting to go down.


    King Carolus ordered to halt to start camping.


    I was about to make a campfire and spread my makeshift bed when suddenly I can see King Carolus started building something.


    I asked him what he is doing and he just said that he is building a temporary home for us.


    I don''t really understand what he just said and just watch him work.


    I don''t really have anything to do so I decided to be a lookout and guard our camp.


    I was just standing observing the surroundings when suddenly I can see something moving from a distance.


    I ready my iron bow in my hand and an arrow.


    I waited for it to come out and I nock the arrow in the bow.


    I then draw the bowstring and aimed at the being who is slowly walking towards here.


    I was about to release the arrow when suddenly I can see that the person walking towards me is a monster.


    A little zombie.


    It looks like a girl too.


    She is still walking slowly towards me but I''m still holding the string of my bow.


    She is now starting to get close to me but no matter how I think that it is a monster in front of me, I can''t kill it.


    I suddenly saw an arrow that went past me and hit the little zombie in the head.


    She quickly died and fall on the ground.


    I turned around to see King Carolus holding a diamond bow in his hand.


    He is staring at me and I can see no emotions in his eyes.


    "Burry the body, Rose, while I finished building our tempory home." I can hear him ordering me but I just continued staring back at him.


    After giving his order, he then turned around and resumed what he is doing.


    I was still hesitant to follow his orders but I just turned around and picked up the body of the little girl.


    I walked quite a distance from the camp and started digging 2 blocks deep in the ground.


    I then place the body of the little girl in the hole and cover it.


    I kneel on the ground and put my hands together to start praying.


    ''Goddess. Guide this poor little girl to the afterlife and to a better place''


    After praying, I got up and started walking back to the camp.


    I saw that King Carolus is now finished building a temporary house.


    We quickly got inside the house and I saw two beds on each side and a furnace on the center.


    There is also a glowstone on the ceiling to light up the interior.


    It is like a normal home you see in a village and I can''t believe that he built this so quick.


    He was about to start cooking food when I immediately volunteered to do it.


    We ate the food in silence.


    After eating, we quickly got on our beds to sleep.


    I can''t really sleep since I can still see the face of the little girl that I just buried.


    I got up in my bed and see that King Carolus is now sleeping.


    I can''t believe how easy for him to kill a girl even it is a monster.


    I suddenly noticed something strange to him.


    I started walking towards him I saw that he is sweating and shaking in his bed.


    He is probably having a nightmare.


    I was about one step away to reach him when suddenly he got up and pointed a spear in my head.


    His spear is so close in my eyes that I quickly took a step back.


    He lowered his weapon after a while and then put it away in his inventory.


    His sweat is dripping in his face and he quickly wipes them away using a towel.


    I can''t believe what is happening.


    I can''t believe that even a powerful being like him has nightmares.


    I wonder what he just dreamed about?


    He quickly ordered me to get back on my bed to sleep when suddenly I can hear a sound coming on the outside.


    King Carolus noticed it too and he quickly got up and started walking towards the door to slowly opened it.


    He then peeked outside.


    "Skeletons. There are only ten or so of them. I guess no matter how careful we are, they will still find us in their territory." I can hear him talking to me while still looking outside.


    He then wore his armor and equipped a sword in his hand.


    I was shocked to see that his armor is also made of diamond.


    How many diamonds this person has to be able to craft an entire diamond armor and diamond weapons?


    "Stay here. I''ll take care of them." He ordered to me while starting to walk outside.


    He closed the door but I quickly run to open it to chase after him.


    I can''t just sit around while monsters are attacking our camp.


    I equipped the new armor that I received from King Carolus and my father''s bow.


    I still can''t use the diamond bow King Carolus gave to so I decided to use the iron bow for now.


    It is really dark outside the house and I can barely see anything.


    King Carolus saw me standing beside him and stared at me for a moment.


    He then dropped a bottle of some kind in his hand on the ground.


    The bottle breaks and there is a liquid that splashed both me and King Carolus.


    I suddenly can see the surroundings like it is day time.


    I don''t know what is going on but I can see skeletons equipped with leather armor and stone weapons in front of us.


    Some of them also have bows in their hands.


    There are about 10 blocks away from us right now and they are now starting to charge.


    "You take care of the skeletons wielding a bow while I take care of the rest." I suddenly hear King Carolus ordering me while he is preparing to attack.


    I quickly nocked an arrow in my bow and prepare to fire.


    The skeletons are now on King Carolus reach and he quickly swings his sword towards them and quickly killed them.


    I can''t believe how quickly it is for him to kill the monsters and about half of them are already dead.


    There are still five of them and three of them are equipped with a bow.


    I fired arrows towards the skeletons on the back and the three of them quickly died.


    King Carolus also managed to kill the remaining monsters and silence quickly filled the area.


    King Carolus and I just stand for a moment while staring at the dead enemies.


    After making sure that there is no other monster in the surroundings, we quickly gathered the remains of the skeletons and bury them in the giant hole.


    We quickly walked back to our house after cleaning the bodies.


    King Carolus ordered to go back to sleep but I''m still hung up on the recent battle that I can''t shut my eyes close.


    I just lie on the bed just staring on the stone ceiling when suddenly my weak body finally gave out and I managed to sleep.

 Episode 36: The Overworld Journey (4)

    ******* Skeleton King''s POV *******


    I am sitting in my throne right now staring down at this ''wandering merchant''.


    "You know my merchandise is top quality and they are worth the price so I don''t know why are you hesitating on accepting my offer." He said to me while standing straight and his cape on his back called elytra fluttering.


    This is the Legendary Monster that I hated the most.


    Instead of helping me fulfill our mother''s wishes, he just turned his back on her and does whatever he wants just like the others.


    I didn''t answer him and just stared at him.


    He suddenly disappeared and teleported on my left shoulder sitting.


    "You know, Zane. We have been living for a long time and I know your greatest goal is to do whatever our creator wants but we have free will you know." He started spouting nonsense to me and I can no longer take it.


    I tried to grab him with my left hand but he quickly teleported back to his position.


    I was losing my patience and I was about to stand up in my throne to start attacking him but I managed to temper myself since I still need him.


    He is the only monster I know that has the abilities to craft and enchant.


    He is also the only one I know that can provide us with good quality weapons and armors.


    The human blacksmiths and enchanters that I captured refused to work for me so I just turn them all into my soldiers. It seems Astikuvielains are as tenacious as their current queen.


    He stared at me with his purples eyes just patiently waiting for me to make a move.


    He is so small yet he is too powerful.


    Why would our mother create him like this?


    Silence filled the throne room.


    We currently have a standoff and I can see no emotions in his eyes.


    "Alright. I give what you want just give me my weapons and armors." I finally accepted his deal since I got no choice.


    One day, when I get the chance to kill him, I will definitely make it slow and painful.


    "Excellent! I''ll be back with the merchandise." He said to me while clapping his hands once.


    He quickly disappeared and left purple particles in the place he was standing.


    One of my soldiers quickly steps forward after seeing the legendary monster leave.


    "My king. I have grave news." He bowed to me while talking.


    "What it is?"


    "Our soldiers in the western region are slowly disappearing and nobody knows why."


    "Send a scout to find out then."


    "We already did but it seems they also disappeared since they didn''t come back until now."


    "Hmm." I started to think deeply while holding tight with my iron sword.


    Who is doing this?


    "Any word in the territory of that man in the south?" I asked after thinking for a while.


    "Yes. Our scouts there said that there is no current activity and they might be a possibility that that man has left his castle."


    I see. Now I understand what is happening.


    "Send a word to all of the soldiers in the western region. Assemble and start finding that human and kill him. He is probably traveling somewhere in our territory."


    I don''t know where is that human right now but if he is in my territory, I will not just let him leave unscathed.


    The scout quickly bowed and ride his skeleton horse.


    He is now galloping away and I just watch him while thinking that he might not come back.


    Another soldier steps forwards and quickly bowed.


    "I also have bad news for you, my king."


    "Talk."


    "The fleet that we sent in the northern part of the Astikuviel Kingdom are all sunk and only some of our soldiers managed to swim back in our territory."Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit.


    The Kingdom of Astikuviel is starting to annoy me.


    They are now getting used to fighting monsters and able to push back all of our assaults.


    I may have underestimated their queen.


    "Step back." I just ordered the soldier after hearing his news.


    The last soldier quickly steps forwards and bows to me.


    "That better be good news since this night is full of disappointments," I said to him while looking in the ceiling of the throne room.


    "It is, my king. The fleet we sent in the southern waters of the Astikuviel Kingdom has returned and they are successful in gathering soldiers."


    Finally. Some good news.


    "Where are the prisoners? Are they all here? Send them in."


    He quickly shouted at the large double door of the throne room and it quickly opened.


    They are now humans walking in straight lines towards me and I can see in their faces that they already lose hope.


    They are tied together so they won''t escape and they are surrounded by my soldiers aiming their weapons at them.


    They are about five hundred of them here.


    "Raise your head, humans," I said to them and all of them tremble in my voice.


    They are hesitant to listen to me and they just keep down their heads.


    One of my soldiers fired his bow and hit one of the prisoners.


    He quickly died and every single one of them quickly raised their heads and stare at me.


    "That''s it. You have nothing to fear to me." I said to them while slowly standing in my throne.


    They tremble even more and it is good since I need that kind of fear from them.


    "What are they?" I asked one of my soldiers since I am staring at them and they don''t like Astikuvielian soldiers.


    "They called themselves Chaephitopia pirates and we caught them in the middle of the ocean."


    "Pirates?" I asked my soldier since it is my first time hearing that word.


    I am being left behind with the information of the world so I decided to start building ships to travel and collect information. It seems my plan worked.


    "They are similar to soldiers since they wield weapons and kill but they are not as disciplined and it seems they don''t have any training for combat. They also only listen to their so-called captains and not their queen in their kingdom."


    "I see."


    I slowly walked closer to them and I can see so much fear in their eyes as they stare at me.


    They are not disciplined they say? I guess I can''t be too picky with my army since my soldiers are now slowly diminishing from the constant battles.


    "Don''t worry, humans. I will free you from your suffering." I said to them while raising my left hand in the air.


    I then quickly put down my hand and arrows are fired on all sides.


    All of the prisoners got hit and they quickly died.


    Corpses are littered in front of me and blood is now starting to fill the floor of the throne room.


    I raised my sword high and quickly swing in the empty space above the dead bodies.


    A crack suddenly appeared above the corpses and black aura is starting to flow down in the hole and envelop the bodies.


    They slowly start to shed their humanity and are now being reborn.


    "Stand my loyal servants!" I shouted at them.


    They quickly organized themselves and stand straight.


    They are now an additional five hundred soldiers in my army and I quickly send the fleet back to gather some more prisoners.


    Now, all I need is new weapons and armors and start planning my greatest invasion.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    It has been three days since we left my territory.


    We are still traveling northwest towards the Kingdom of Aezeokar and the sun is now above our head which means it is already noon.


    We finally got out of the territory of the skeletons since there are about THOUSANDS of them chasing us.


    It seems they are not happy about us galloping in their land and killing their kind.


    They didn''t manage to find us since I''m getting used to building tempory homes in secluded places since my training in the nether.


    We can actually get out of the territory of the skeletons in a single day since our horses can run very fast but Rose is still weak and I decided to just take it easy for now.


    We are now standing in front of what I believe is a giant swamp.


    If my memory serves me right. This is where slimes in the game spawn.


    Rose said that this is the path they took to get to the center of the Forest of Monsters.


    I don''t see any slimes near the edge of the swamp but Rose is pretty sure that they are a lot of them inside since they managed to get past this place.


    I suggested that we took a long route and just travel in the Kingdom of Astikuviel but she quickly shot down my idea since it is a long journey she says. I was about to say to her that it is better to take a long journey than rather be dead but I just keep it to myself since she is now starting to warm up to me.


    We started to travel slowly in the swamp and we are so careful with the surroundings.


    I ordered to start wearing armor since we might suddenly get attacked.


    I noticed that Rose is not wearing her helmet.


    "Why are you not wearing your helmet, Rose?" I asked while starting to increase the speed of the travel since it is still quite safe.


    "The helmet you crafted covered my whole face so it is hard for me to breathe." She just casually answered me while holding tight in her horse''s rein trying to catch up with me.


    ''Okay. I crafted that helmet that way so it is used to prevent from breathing arrows.'' I thought to myself but didn''t voice out to her.


    We just continued traveling for an hour or two until we encounter our first slime.


    There is only one and it is only mid-sized so it not a threat but I can see Rose is afraid of this monster.


    "We should probably run past that monster since there is nothing that could kill it." She said to me while keeping her eyes on the slime.


    What is she talking about?


    I just equipped my bow in my hand and nock an arrow.


    I fired one arrow first in the core of the slime and then fired another four at a fast pace.


    The first arrow pierced the body of the slime and hit the monster''s core.


    It quickly split into four and the remaining four arrows finished the small slimes.


    Rose was quite shocked about what just happened. She probably doesn''t know how to kill a slime so I decided to demonstrate to her.


    I managed to find out how to kill a slime monster in the nether by hunting magma cubes. It was difficult at first but I managed to do it in the end by panicking and just swinging like a maniac until accidentally hitting the core.


    I quickly run towards the remains of the slimes and dismounted in my horse to gather the green liquid and turn them into a ball.


    It is nice to finally have slime balls since they are pretty useful especially for redstone purposes.


    We continued to travel until we starting to see quite a lot of slimes in front of us.


    We just run past them since they are just slow moving.


    It is smooth riding for a while until I noticed something weird in this swamp.


    The number of trees in the surroundings is getting fewer like they are being cut down. They are probably someone living close by or something is going here.


    I ordered to halt for now to observe the surroundings.


    Rose is now wearing her helmet, thank god. I thought she will just let her head exposed.


    The giant slimes, mid-sized slimes, and the small ones are now starting to come together like they are merging into one.


    After a while, a gigantic slime is now in front of us and it is probably 5 or so blocks in height and width and it is still growing.


    ''Why do in this world, they are a lot of giant monsters?'' I just said to myself while watching the merging of slimes in the distance.

 Episode 37: An Unsuspected Encounter (1)

    ******* Carolus'' POV ********


    Great.


    What a perfect way to end the day.


    Just watching the sun goes down on the west while RIDING A HORSE RUNNING AT FULL SPEED.


    Damn. This giant slime won''t let us go.


    He became a 9 block-ish size now and I tried looking at his status using the eye of ender to see if I can fight him.


    **************


    Name: Giant 91%


    Level: 91 (91 up) 69%


    Race: Legendary Slime


    Age: 689


    Status: Healthy


    Health:


    ?????????????????????????


    ????????????????????


    Abilities:


    Heat Resistance: Level 5 (Max)


    Cold Resistance: Level 5 (Max)


    Poison Resistance: Level 10 (Max)


    Ender Dragon''s Gifts:


    Slime Body - cannot age no matter how much time passed.


    Slime Supreme Leader - can command thousands to tens of thousands of slimes by his will.


    Slime Regeneration - can absorb the surrounding slimes to heal itself.


    Toxic Body - a poisonous body that can kill and dissolve anything.


    **************


    After seeing his status I just said nope and ordered to run away.


    I''m not in the mood in fighting a giant monster that can heal itself indefinitely until he runs out of slimes to absorb and I also don''t see any end in the number of slimes in this swamp.


    The reason that they are not a lot of trees around here is the slimes dissolve them to increase their size and split themselves to half. We managed to witness it by seeing the giant slime hop around and dissolving the swamp trees he managed to land and giving birth to new slimes.


    I also notice a percentage in his name suggesting that he is not in his final size so he is probably about 10 or so blocks.


    He is also missing five hearts and all the Legendary Monsters that I met has 50 of them so probably because he is still not complete.


    I turned my head around to see if we managed to outrun the giant slime. I suddenly saw that he took a great leap and is now slowly gaining on us.


    Goddammit. If only he is not in his territory surrounded by thousands of slimes, I can kill him but I guess I''m not lucky today.


    We are galloping at the highest speed our horses can achieve and we are now starting to slow down probably because the horses are getting tired.


    We are absolutely dead once that monster reaches us.


    I think pretty hard for a solution to escape this monster when finally I remembered something.


    I quickly held an ender pearl in my hand.


    I threw it as hard as I can in the distance until it is no longer visible in the eye.


    I hold on Rose''s shoulder and imagined her as a part of me. I also imagined the horses we are riding.


    I heard a leaping sound behind us and I quickly raise my head above us to see that the giant slime is now at our heads.


    He is now descending and we are totally getting crushed or absorb.


    ''Come on, ender pearl! Break already!'' I shouted in my head while looking at Rose.


    I can''t see her face because of the helmet but I can totally guess that she is worried since she didn''t complain about my hand on her shoulder.


    The giant slime is about 5 blocks away from us.


    ''Come on!''


    4 blocks


    ''Oh! God!''


    3 blocks


    2 blocks


    I suddenly feel something crushing my body and the scenery quickly changes.


    The ender pearl landed in the 1 block deep swamp water.


    The horses are now frantic and trying to shake us off.


    "Easy, boy. Easy." I said to my horse while rubbing his neck.


    My horse calmed down after a while but Rose was kicked off in her horse and is now face down on the water.


    I quickly dismounted in my horse and calm her horse down since it is now trying to run off.


    After calming the horse, I quickly check on Rose to see if she is alright.


    I was about to touch her when suddenly she stands up and removes her helmet.The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    She then started vomiting and I just waited for her to finish her thing.


    "What was that? My body hurts like it is being crushed by something." She said to me while wiping her mouth using a towel.


    "It is teleportation using an ender pearl. You''ll get used to it eventually." I just said to her and quickly ordered to get back on our horses.


    We managed to distance ourselves from the giant slime but they are still slimes around us and are now slowly hopping their way in our position.


    I can see Rose is still groggy from the ender pearl teleportation but she quickly mounted her horse and we started running again.


    We can now barely see anything in the surroundings since it is really getting dark but we still pushed forward.


    I was about to use a Night Vision VI potion to help us see when suddenly I noticed something flying towards us.


    I quickly equipped my bow and fired but the thing that is hurling towards us breaks up hitting the arrow and a liquid is sprayed all over Rose and me.


    I noticed that I have now a Night Vision VI in my status and I can see the surroundings like the sun is still up in the sky.


    Rose is shocked too probably wondering who threw that bottle.


    I can see something in the distance and both me and Rose ready our bow.


    It is riding what appears to be a skeleton horse and there is a hooded person riding it.


    "Well, well, well. What do we have here? Two foolish travelers." I can hear the person voice talking to us and she sounds like a woman.


    Man. I have trouble distinguishing the gender in this world unless I managed to hear their voices.


    I didn''t talk back to the stranger and neither does Rose.


    Silence filled the area until the stranger slowly moved her horse towards us.


    Rose quickly draw her bow ready to fire.


    "Put down the weapon, Rose." I just ordered her since I''m trying to figure out what this stranger is doing.


    The stranger slowly pulled down her hood and I can see that she is not human.


    Wait, what? What is she?


    I was shocked to see her appearance.


    She has a feature of a zombie but yet she still looks like a human. She is like a zombie villager but she can talk so it is really strange.


    The stranger then smiled brightly towards us like we are best friends which is weird.


    "Follow me. I''ll take you to safety." The stranger then said after looking at us for a moment and she is now slowly traveling away from us.


    Rose looked at me probably wondering what we will do.


    We have nowhere to go and we are still surrounded by slimes. Our horses are tired and it is now night time.


    We got no choice.


    I just started following the stranger and Rose was hesitant to follow but she quickly moved forward her horse after a while.


    We just slowly traveling, following the stranger until we managed to reach a house or what appears to be a giant hut.


    No. This is a witch hut only bigger.


    I was about to order to run away when suddenly the stranger dismounted in her skeleton horse and tie it near the front door.


    She quickly opened the door and motioned us to get inside.


    Okay. My mind is telling me to run away but my instinct is telling me to trust her.


    Hmm. What to do?


    I just dismounted my horse after a while and tie it up beside the skeleton horse.


    Rose also followed my actions and we are now inside in the hut.


    It is beautiful inside and fully lit up.


    I can see the stranger sitting in the rocking chair with a black cat on her lap.


    "Took you so long to get inside that I started to wonder if both of you decided to run away. That would have been stupid since you will probably wind up dead. Hahaha." She said to us and she put her head on the cat while laughing.


    Okay. I can now confirm that she is crazy.


    The stranger then stands up putting the cat on the table.


    She started walking towards me and switch my weapon into a sword ready to swing at any time.


    "No. No. No. No need to be cautious. I am a friend. Hahaha." She just said to me while starting to get close.


    She is now half a block away from me and she raises her hand slowly to my head to touch it.


    I was about to attack her when suddenly I decided to just let her do it since I''m curious about her.


    "I never thought I will see another person in my life wearing diamond armor. This is very interesting." She said to me while her hands are now slowly going down in my body.


    I put away my sword in my inventory and stopped both of her hands from going to a place I don''t want her to touch.


    She just laughed at me while blinking her eyes quickly like she is seducing me or something.


    I just opened my inventory and held an item in my hand.


    "Oh! An eye of ender. You also have one." She said to me and I can see her face is full of shock and admiration.


    I pointed the eye of ender to her and it breaks into tiny pieces till it turns into dust.


    ***************


    Name: Sisilla Hasani


    Level: 0 (Restricted)


    Race: Undead


    Age: 527


    Status: Healthy


    Health: ??????????


    Abilities:


    Crafting Level 10 (Max)


    Enchanting Level 10 (Max)


    Brewing Level 10 (Max)


    Cartography Level 10 (Max)


    Redstone Level 10 (Max)


    Melee Combat Level 5 (Restricted)


    Range Combat Level 3 (Restricted)


    Weapon Efficiency Level 5 (Restricted)


    Poison Resistance Level 10 (Max)


    Heat Resistance Level 0 (Restricted)


    Cold Resistance Level 2 (0 up) 10%


    Ender Dragon''s Gifts:


    Undead body - cannot age no matter how much time passed.


    Battle Restriction - cannot improve in battle no matter how long the training or how many battles won.


    Level Restriction - cannot gain any experience from battle.


    Inactive Abilities:


    Inhuman Strenght Level 2 (0 up) 56%


    Inhuman Speed Level 2 (0 up) 56%


    Inactive Goddess''s Gifts:


    Partial Immortality - The body ages slower than an average human.


    Monster Hunter - Inhumane Strenght and Speed Level will increase for every monster killed.


    Potion Master - all potions used are more efficient.


    Fist Warrior - melee combat skills using hands are more efficient in battle.


    Ender Dragon''s Curse - all of the Goddess''s Gifts is blocked and can''t be used and can''t be seen.


    ***************


    Whoa! This is the longest status I have ever seen in this world.


    She has a lot of gifts from the goddess and from the ender dragon. Though the ender dragon''s gifts are more like a curse.


    I also saw her used an eye of ender to me which is shocking since I didn''t notice it because I''m busy reading her status.


    Damn. I was careless.


    I quickly threw her on the floor and she just continued laughing like a lunatic.


    I stared at her while she is staring at the ceiling. She is probably still reading my status though I wonder why others can see other things in my status while I can''t see it. There is a strange thing going here. I feel like someone or something is trying to hide something from me.


    I can see Rose on my side dumbfounded about what is happening here.


    Thankfully, Rose just remain stand still and not doing anything reckless.


    The woman in the floor named Sisilla Hasani did a backward roll and is now standing in her feet staring at me.


    "Never thought I will meet you, Oh great Hero." She then said to me while smiling brightly.


    What? What is she talking about?


    She then fixes her clothes and hair.


    "My apologies for my rudeness. Allow me to introduce myself. My name is Sisilla Hasani. Former Queen of the Chaephitopia Kingdom. It is very nice to finally meet you." She said to me while bowing.


    Great.


    This night is getting weirder and weirder.

 Episode 38: An Unexpected Encounter (2)

    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    Did she just say that her name is Sisilla Hasani?


    One of the heroes from the legend?


    One of the Names being sung by the entire kingdom of Aezeokar and one of the people who tried to save the world.


    That is impossible. She died with the battle with the ender dragon or so the story said.


    But she is standing in front of me and King Carolus didn''t correct her saying her name and just remain calm as always.


    I quickly kneel in front of the hero.


    "Oh. What is happening here? Why is the iron lady kneeling?" I can hear Queen Sisilla saying something.


    I''m so overwhelmed about what is going here but at least I know that there is a surviving hero from the legend. She can help us take down the monsters in this world.


    My heart is now filled with so much hope.


    "Rose." I can hear King Carolus whisper beside me but I just ignored him.


    I raised my head and stare once again to Queen Sisilla of Chaephitopia.


    "Stand up girl and both of you please have a sit." Queen Sisilla said to me while motioning us to sit in the chairs that are not there before.


    She probably just recently placed them.


    King Carolus just remain standing just staring at Queen Sisilla.


    "Yes, Queen Sisilla." I just said after a moment while standing up and walking towards the closest chair.


    I also removed my armor and put away my weapon.


    "No. None of that ''Queen''. I''m not even human anymore, pretty girl. Just call me Sisilla." She said to me while reaching for the black cat and sit on the rocking chair.


    I don''t really know what she just said but I just remain standing in front of my chair and waiting for King Carolus to make a move.


    King Carolus is still staring at her and I can see Sisilla staring back.


    Tension is now starting to fill the room and I was about to say something to King Carolus when he finally starts walking.


    He removes his armor and put away his weapon.


    He then sits in the chair beside me and I also quickly followed.


    "I assumed girl you have questions for me so let''s just get on with it but before that, I have to ask this hero first something," Sisilla said to break up the tension and silence.


    "Rose. My name is Rose Cromwell." I quickly interjected before she can ask King Carolus a question.


    She nodded to me and she then faced King Carolus.


    "So, Carolus. How are things?"


    What? That is her question to him? She is not going to ask about why he is missing for five hundred years and just appeared now?


    "Great." King Carolus just casually answered Sisilla''s question like they are close friends just meeting up for the first time after being separated for a long time.


    They continued talking for a while and I just remained silent. Their conversation just consists of how is the weather in the center of the Forest of Monsters and other things I can barely understand.


    How can these two people talk like this when the world still needs saving?


    I was about to interrupt their nonsense conversation when suddenly Sisilla finally ask a serious question.


    "I guess the early conversation releases the tension between us so it is about time we get serious," Sisilla said while sliming brightly.


    She has a weird attitude for a person who is blessed by the Goddess and tried to save this world.


    "So, where were you, Carolus?"


    King Carolus didn''t talk for a moment and both Sisilla and I just keep staring at him waiting for him to answer the question.


    This is also the question that I asked him but didn''t get an answer.


    I am starting to lose my patience waiting for him to talk and was about to lash out when suddenly he raised his head on the ceiling like he is thinking about something.


    He is still not answering Sisilla''s question.


    "I guess you also have your own problems you are dealing with," Sisilla said this and I can see in her face that she is now serious.This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    What problems? I don''t really understand what she is talking about since I just saw King Carolus took down hundreds of skeletons all by himself but then I remembered our first camp night.


    That is my first time seeing a vulnerability from King Carolus.


    He never said what he was dreaming about and I didn''t ask.


    "Well, this was a fun conversation. How about we continue this tomorrow and just eat and rest for tonight." Sisilla then said to us while putting the black cat on the table and starting to cook something in the furnace.


    She didn''t give me a chance to ask her questions but I didn''t mind and just offered to help with the cooking but she quickly refused me since me and King Carolus are both guests in her house.


    We ate while listening to Sisilla''s stories.


    Apparently, after the battle with the ender dragon. She managed to survive and was cursed to be not able to walk into the sun and age.


    She then was thrown in this swamp by the ender dragon and decided to just stay here and not go back to her kingdom. She was afraid that her people will not accept her for what she is now and just stay hidden.


    I was getting really sad about her story and starting to get even more mad with King Carolus for not helping them a long time ago.


    King Carolus just continued eating in silence while listening to the story.


    "I still can fully remember the battle between the ender dragon and the four of us. We didn''t even manage to scratch her even a tiny bit. Hahaha." Sisilla continued telling her story with a weird smile on her face like he is telling a happy story.


    After eating, Sisilla then offered us separate rooms to sleep in.


    I was about to protest since I don''t want to get separated to King Carolus but decided to just remain silent and sleep in my room.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    I am now sitting on the roof of the giant hut since I can''t sleep from all the things that just happened.


    Being chased by a really big slime to being saved by an ancient hero that turned into undead.


    Damn. What a crazy day.


    "Can''t sleep?" I suddenly hear a voice behind me but I just remain sitting since it is just Sisilla.


    I didn''t answer her and just look at her for a moment before facing back on the front.


    "A man with a few words. I really like you."


    She sits beside me while looking at the moon in the sky.


    It is now a new moon and in the game, slimes don''t spawn in this time of the month but I guess it is different here since I can hear a few slimes hoping around in the distance.


    I suddenly noticed something strange.


    "Why do slimes don''t approach this hut?" I asked Sisilla who is now staring at me with googly eyes.


    "I spread a liquid in the surroundings that slimes really hate. I discovered it a long time ago while experimenting on how to cure myself of a sickness called undead." She said to me while smiling and I''m starting to get worried about her.


    I see. It is quite nice to know that there is a substance that slimes don''t like.


    "Did you try drinking a weakness potions then eating a golden?" I try suggesting to her since I remembered that she is undead. I also have plenty of golden apples in my inventory to give to her in case she didn''t have any.


    "Yes, I did. It didn''t work. Sadly, the only way out of my predicament is to end my life."


    Okay. I have no other solution that I can give to her so I just remain silent once again.


    She also stopped talking and just continue staring at me and it is now getting really awkward.


    "No matter how I stare at your face, I still can''t get enough of your beauty." She said to me I just continued facing in front ignoring her.


    I can no longer take with the staring and just excuse myself so I can sleep.


    She tried to stop me and even tried seducing me but I just jump down the roof and walked inside the hut.


    I immediately went inside my room and sleep.


    ******* King of Xaerin''s POV *******


    I am surrounded by fools and incompetent people.


    They have been giving me nothing but bad news this evening.


    "Why is there still no news from the army we just sent to the Kingdom of Astikuviel?" I asked everyone in the room while sitting and staring at them.


    "We don''t know, your majesty. Our spies in the Kingdom of Astikuviel didn''t give any reports. They are probably still clueless about what happened to our army." One of the people in the room quickly answered my question.


    "Then go there and find out yourself," I said to the person who just answered me.


    He is confused about what I just said and I quickly glare at him.


    "Yes, your majesty." He quickly stood up in his chair and bowed to me. He then runs towards the exit of the room.


    I know the Kingdom of Astikuviel doesn''t have plenty of military forces since their queen decided to focus on helping the common people so it is impossible they be able to defeat my army so where are they?


    "Update on the western kingdom?" I just ignored the Astikuviel Kingdom for now and change the topic.


    "They are still growing and now a force to be reckoned with. Our plan of invasion in their kingdom will now not be possible since we don''t have enough soldiers."


    "Then find me more soldiers!"


    "But we don''t enough money to..."


    "NOW!"


    He then quickly stand up and bowed to me. He runs straight ahead towards the exit like what the first person did.


    Fools. They are nothing but fools.


    Before the person that I just ordered to look for more soldiers open the door, it just burst open and a soldier wearing a leather armor quickly stepped inside.


    "My King. A report came in about the army we sent in the North." He bowed for a moment then quickly said to me.


    "What is it?"


    "The army was defeated and only a hundred of them managed to escape."


    "What? How is that possible?" I quickly stand in my chair making everyone in the room staring at me and the soldier that just brought a report take a step back.


    "The survivors said that they fought about five thousand enemies and they are also saying they are all equipped with iron armors and iron weapons."


    "That is impossible! No one in this world has that much iron!" I shouted at him and he quickly breaks eye contact and just look down.


    I just remain standing for a while and the room fell silent.


    All of them are either looking at me or just plainly avoiding my gaze.


    "Get out. All of you. Leave me alone." I just said to them before I decided to execute them for their incompetence.


    All of them quickly leave the room but the messenger soldier just continued standing in place.


    "What are you doing? Do you really want to die?" I just said to him and I can see in his eyes is starting to fill with fear.


    "No, your majesty. There is also a letter just came in. It has a royal stamp of the Kingdom of Aezeokar."


    I quickly received the letter and ordered him to leave and shut the door.


    I sit down on the chair and open the letter.


    ''To the foolish Xaerin King.


    I hope the recent battle will give you the idea of what the Kingdom of Aezeokar can do. We also want our land back that you stole from us so unless you want us to march and claimed it back ourselves, you better just hand them to us.


    Rainier Cromwell


    King of Aezeokar''


    I quickly ripped the letter to shreds.


    You''re the foolish one King Rainier since you are nothing but a puppet by the church and I know this letter is not written by you.


    I quickly spread a map on the table and begin planning once again what to do.


    If my people can''t give the world to me, I''ll just have to conquer it and do it myself like I always do to all the things that I want.

 Episode 39: An Unsuspected Encounter (3)

    ******* Sisilla''s POV *******


    I waited for my guests to woke up at early dawn.


    I never thought in my centuries in living in this swamp that the guest rooms that I''ve built in my house will be handy.


    This house of mine doesn''t even have a master''s bedroom since I don''t need to sleep.


    I''m in the roof waiting for the sun to hit my skin.


    I can feel the sun is now slowly rising I didn''t cover my head with my hood since I want to feel the rays of the sun in my skin even it kills me.


    I am facing west and the sun is starting to burn the back of my head.


    I have already forgotten the sensation, the heat and the joy of being able to walk in daylight but I guess my waiting for a miracle is not for naught.


    The person that the Goddess promises to save us has finally surfaced.


    I was about to cover my head with my hood when suddenly someone stands behind me and just raised it for me.


    It is King Carolus.


    He never fails to impress me.


    I never heard him coming here in the roof. He moves just like my cat.


    I was about to talk to him when suddenly he jumps off the roof. He really is a man of few words. He is probably preparing to cook some food so they can leave and continue traveling.


    Rose said that they are traveling towards the Kingdom of Aezeokar to talk to the person called ''Prophet''. I never heard of this person nor would I care. She said he is the only person in this world that can talk to the Goddess but I don''t believe her for a moment. The whole world has already forsaken the Goddess and the Goddess also has forgotten about us.


    We are all alone but I guess there is still hope since we have King Carolus now.


    Though I wonder where did he come from? Rose said that he is a king though I never heard of him before in my life. I tried asking about it but he just remained silent. I guess it doesn''t matter about his life story since every single one of us has a chapter in life we don''t want to talk about.


    I just cleared my thoughts and stands up. I stretched my body since I just sit in the roof all night long then I jump off to take care of my guests.


    Rose cooked the food this morning and I just let her do it since she really insisted. I don''t really need to eat and just built a kitchen in this house so I can''t forget that I was once human.


    The food I served them yesterday was only recently gathered when the time I heard a voice whispering to me that some humans are wreaking havoc in the territory of skeletons.


    I don''t really believe the person that just whispered to me but I still prepared just in case they went past my territory.


    We eat and they just continued listening to my stories. I also eat even though I don''t need food in me because I don''t want them to feel sorry for me.


    After eating, they started preparing for their journey and was about to leave. I quickly speak to King Carolus about talking to him just one last time. Thankfully he agreed and we are now sitting alone inside the house while Rose is outside tending the horses.


    King Carolus is staring at me with indifferent eyes. He has the same eyes as me. The eyes that have already seen centuries.


    I didn''t actually ask him to talked to me. I have a different plan in mind and I guess he also knows it the way he is sitting right now.


    I smiled brightly at him and drink all the battle enhancing potions in my inventory. I can feel so much power flowing in me right now. I quickly equipped my diamond armor and kicked the table away to charged at him.


    I raised my right fist to throw the strongest punch I can muster with my cursed body.


    King Carolus didn''t even bother to stand up in his chair and just blocked my attack with his left hand.


    He blocked my punch with so little effort and he didn''t even move a little bit in his chair.


    He stared at me with his dead eyes.


    "Hahaha. Did you really think you can just appear after hiding for a long time and everyone will just be alright about it?" I said to him while trying to pull my right hand from his tight grip.This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.


    He is really strong. Even stronger than my companion hero, the King of Xaerin. Guess he is really the chosen one.


    I raised my left leg and kicked him.


    He didn''t bother to block the attack and just let it hit him.


    He flew across the room and broke through the wooden door of my house.


    I quickly run towards the outside and saw King Carolus just standing in his two feet.


    He flew about 15 blocks away and by the looks of it, he is still fine.


    Guess I need to get serious to make him fight back.


    "What!? What is happening!?" I can hear Rose''s voice but I just ignored her and just started charging towards King Carolus.


    I started throwing punches at him and he just dodges all of them so effortless.


    "What''s wrong? Is this the best you can do?" I tried provoking him but he is still not showing any signs of fighting back.


    I managed to push him back outside my territory and there are now slimes around us.


    King Carolus is still calm and just continued dodging and blocking my attacks.


    He didn''t even bother to wear his armor or equip a weapon. I guess this battle is just a nuisance to him but I need to find out for myself if he really can fight the ender dragon.


    I was starting to get pissed off about his lack of interest to fight back.


    "Did you know that thousands of people died while you hide in whatever corner in this world you are hiding!?" Still no response from him.


    "Did you know that I watched my own husband and all of my sons get killed by a giant stray!?" No response.


    "Did you even have a loved one that you care about!?" King Carolus twitch when he heard me say that.


    Finally. I am getting somewhere.


    He raised his right arm and I was about to dodge in the side when suddenly he threw a punch so quick that I didn''t get the chance to evade.


    I can feel so much pain in my chest even though I am wearing diamond armor and flew so high up in the air.


    I am starting to fall down in the sky and went through my house and landed hard on the ground.


    I can feel the sun is starting to burn my face but I don''t care.


    ''I guess he can really do it. He can save this world.'' I thought to myself while remembering the four of the heroes standing in front of a giant fire breathing monster.


    I smile brightly while hearing someone running towards me.


    ******* Rose''s POV ********


    What is going here?


    King Carolus and Sisilla just went inside the house for a final talk when suddenly King Carolus just broke through the door and flew about 15 blocks away from the house.


    Sisilla then started furiously attacking King Carolus and I tried to chase after them but they move so quick and was gone deep in the swamp.


    I went back to the house to plan to ride the horse but I suddenly saw something flying in the sky.


    I ready my bow in my hand and wait for the thing to land on the ground.


    I was surprised that it just went through the house and landed behind it.


    I quickly run at the back of the house with an arrow nock on the bow.


    I suddenly saw that it is Sisilla.


    She is still wearing her armor while laying on the ground.


    I quickly put away my weapon and run towards her. I can see her smiling like what she just did is so amusing.


    I quickly covered her face from the sun with my body since I can see a cloud of smoke coming out of her helmet.


    Sisilla looks at me and I can see her right arm reaching for my face.


    "What a pretty face you have. I wish I have your face." Sisilla said to me while looking at me like every single man in my kingdom look at me.


    What is she talking about? She has the most beautiful face I ever saw in my life. Also, there is a much important matter than faces right now.


    I flinched at her hand touching my face but I just ignored it since I''m worried about her.


    "What happened? Why you suddenly attacked King Carolus?" I asked Sisilla after a moment.


    She didn''t answer me right away and just did a quick backward roll. She is now standing in her feet.


    She is now wearing her usual clothing covering her entire body from the sun.


    "Just a friendly conversation." She said to me while smiling brightly.


    I''m pretty sure that not how you conduct a "friendly conversation" even in the past.


    I just remained silent while staring at Sisilla.


    I suddenly see King Carolus in the distance casually walking towards here.


    I tried to get in between them since I thought they will continue fighting but King Carolus just ordered me to ride my horse.


    I looked at Sisilla once again and she just nodded at me probably saying to go.


    I bowed to her and started following King Carolus to our horses.


    King Carolus didn''t hop on his horse the moment we reached the front of the house instead he suddenly placed a chest in front of the house and transferred some items.


    I don''t know what he just stored in the chest and I didn''t ask.


    He then untied his horse and ride on its back.


    King Carolus and I started traveling in the northwest across the swamp in silence.


    ******* Legendary Creeper''s POV *******


    ''What a bunch of idiots.''


    ''Why are they fighting among themselves?''


    ''Can''t they hear the voice of their creator?''


    I was drowning in my thoughts while standing on top of a mountain staring at the battle between the pigmen and wither skeletons.


    It has been four days or so I think since I can''t really tell time in this dimension.


    I don''t really know where to go when I got here in the nether and just started walking aimlessly and stumbled upon a great battle.


    I can see a really big pigman and a really big wither skeleton fighting one on one.


    They are probably the leaders of these monsters.


    ''Stop them. Unite them.'' I can hear the voice of the ender dragon once again.


    I quickly concentrated on my legs.


    My legs exploded and I was hurling in the air.


    I landed in the middle of the battlefield.


    Both pigmen and wither skeletons stop fighting and they stare at me.


    They are really confused about what just happened but they just ignored me and continued fighting.


    I grabbed the nearest pigman in the neck and concentrated on my hand.


    My hand exploded leaving no trace of the pigman.


    Everyone around me saw this and they quickly united themselves and attack me.


    Good. That was easy. I managed to stop them and unite them.


    I just killed all of the monsters that tried to attack me and they are now quite a lot of craters on the ground because of my explosions.


    I can now see both the giant monsters walking towards me.


    "Who dares interrupt our battle?" I can hear the giant wither skeleton talking.


    I didn''t answer him and just stepped on the wither skeleton on the ground in front of me.


    I concentrated on my leg and blow the wither skeleton into existence leaving another crater on the ground.


    Both the Legendary Monsters in front me was surprised about what I just did and ready themselves to fight me.


    They started charging towards me and I just prepared myself to fight them alone.

 Episode 40: Journey Continues (1)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    It has been three days since we left in the territory of Sisilla which means it is been a week since I left my castle.


    It only took less than a day to get out of the swamp since I push Rose and our horses to travel as fast as they can. I don''t want to get stuck in a place with monsters that don''t afraid of sunlight.


    I could take it easy like always and just build a temporary home inside the swamp but I didn''t get the chance to asked Sisilla about her secret of keeping away the slimes since she just started attacking me for some reason.


    I don''t know what is going on with everybody in this world and why they assumed that I''m some hero that supposed to save this world but I really don''t have any idea what they are talking about. I am also afraid to ask them since they are probably will get more angry at me. I guess I have to roll with it right now until I get the chance to talk to this ''Prophet'' and asked about the Goddess.


    Rose and I are in the northern part of Asktikuviel Kingdom.


    Rose actually passed out right now from our constant traveling and I quickly built a temporary home beside this giant river for her to sleep in.


    I feel sorry for Rose but this is her fault since she really insisted on traveling even though she was still weak.


    It is still a middle in the day and I decided to take this chance to try fishing in the river. I want to eat something new.


    Unfortunately, I didn''t bother to make an enchanted rod since I have plenty of food in my inventory so I just crafted a wooden rod and use it on the river.


    I only caught about 3 fishes for an hour of fishing but I didn''t mind since I just want to try what fish taste like in this world.


    I continued fishing for a while.


    I also tried to investigate the land on the other side of the giant river. I think it is a jungle of some kind. I am really sure since it is pretty far. I should ask Rose about this.


    I suddenly can hear someone walking behind.


    I am familiar with the pattern of the footsteps so I''m sure it is just Rose. Man. I am starting to get weird for noticing these small things in this world like footsteps pattern and able to see in the far distance. I managed to developed these skills because of my constant battles with monsters and trying to survive.


    "What happened? What are you doing?" Rose quickly asked me and I didn''t turn around to face her.


    ''Good morning to you too.'' I said to myself but I didn''t voice it out.


    "I checked on your status and you are finally healthy but you should just relax for the rest of the day," I told Rose without looking at her face and just focus on fishing.


    I didn''t hear any reply or anyone movement behind me so I don''t really know what Rose is thinking right now and what she will do.


    "No. We need to move. We are wasting time." I can hear Rose voice after a moment and I can''t believe her extreme motivation to get back in her kingdom.


    Great.


    I raised my head in the sky and saw one bird in the sky.


    Hmm. Let''s try something else to teach her how to be patient.


    "Okay. If you can hit that bird in the sky with an arrow then we will leave immediately." I said to Rose while reeling the string of the rod since I managed to catch a fish.


    I looked at Rose after inspecting the fish I caught and putting it in the inventory. She looked pissed and she has the ''I want to kill you'' face.


    I was about to say that I was just joking and was about to order to get the horses when suddenly Rose equipped a diamond bow in her hand and nock an arrow.


    She aimed at the bird flying in the sky and loosed the arrow.


    "Missed," I said while looking at the arrow flying in the sky.


    The arrow barely misses the target but it is still close.


    Rose was angry with the result and tried once again.


    "Missed," I said again while going back fishing.


    I didn''t really see the arrow misses the bird since I am now staring at the water in front of me but the way Rose breathing heavily behind me suggests that she totally missed the target again.Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road.


    "This stupid bow." Rose started cursing the diamond bow that I created.


    "Don''t blame the weapon your holding. It is you who lacked the patience and skills." I said to her while putting the fishing rod on the ground beside me.


    I equipped my diamond bow in my hand and nock an arrow.


    I didn''t bother to stand up and just quickly pulled the string and release the arrow.


    It hit the bird in the body and it is now starting to fall in the sky.


    I put away the weapon and picked up the fishing rod to go back catching fish.


    I know I am not an expert marksman but I managed to master fighting in this world since I really don''t fancy dying and have to protect myself. Archery is my most trained skill since it is the most useful in battle next to the sword. I also don''t regret forcing myself to train in shooting hundreds of arrows just to hit a moving target in the distance.


    Rose is probably boiling mad behind me but I ignored her since my fishing is becoming therapeutic and I feel so relaxed right now.


    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    "You should pick up that bird so we can cook it." King Carolus said without facing me and just continued fishing.


    I am so angry right now but I am really surprised that he managed to hit that bird in that distance while it is moving.


    I may be boastful but it is said that I''m the best archer in my kingdom and I didn''t even manage to graze the bird.


    I just started walking towards the general direction on where the bird landed in the thick forest in the south while secretly cursing King Carolus for his easy going attitude.


    I know that I recently passed out but we are now so close in the border of my kingdom and it is only about half a day away. I need to convince him somehow.


    I was about to enter the forest when suddenly there are some people riding horses coming from the east.


    One of them is holding a flag with three mountains on it which means they are from the Kingdom of Astikuviel.


    I quickly prepared my weapon just in case and run towards King Carolus.


    King Carolus is still calm and didn''t even bother to stop fishing even though there are four people who are holding weapons while riding horses coming towards here.


    "Who are you? What is your business in this part of the Kingdom of Astikuviel?" One of the soldiers asked King Carolus and me while starting to spread their forces.


    This is not good.


    I know King Carolus and Queen Thea are in good terms but they definitely bring us with them to interrogate us and that is not an option right now since it is a waste of time.


    I could just injure them and asked King Carolus to continue traveling.


    "Put away your weapon, Rose." I can hear King Carolus ordering me while still focused on what he is doing.


    I don''t know how he managed to know what I''m about to do but I just followed his order and just stand down.


    I can see King Carolus shifting his hold of the fishing rod in his left hand while holding what appears to be a paper on his right hand towards the soldiers.


    The leader of the soldiers ordered one of his people to get the paper and hand it to him.


    He read it for a moment and I can see a shock in his eyes.


    "This is the royal stamp of the kingdom!" The leader said while quickly dismounting in his horse.


    He ordered every one of his people to follow him and kneel towards King Carolus.


    I don''t know what is happening right now.


    "Your majesty. We apologized for bothering you." I can hear the leader of the soldiers talking and he is now using a different tone. He is now much respectful.


    "Rise and just leave." I can hear King Carolus casually ordering the soldiers.


    The soldiers then quickly stand up and the leader hand over the paper to King Carolus.


    They mounted in their horses and is now galloping back in the east.


    No matter where you are in this world, a king will always be a king though I don''t know where is the kingdom of which King Carolus is the king since he doesn''t want to talk about it.


    I didn''t press the matter since it is not of great importance than having him talk to the prophet.


    I already lost about a year of my life. I managed to learn this by talking to Eleanor the day I woke in King Carolus castle.


    I was hoping that the recent event will make King Carolus stand and ordered to start traveling again but he is still fishing.


    I stared at King Carolus for a moment then started walking towards the forest to pick up the dead bird.


    ******* Queen Arachne''s POV *******


    It is so dark in my giant cave but it doesn''t bother me and my children since we can see just fine.


    They are a lot of things going on lately like the lonely king leaving his beautiful castle, a newborn legendary monster with an explosive skill and Zane sending a bunch of ships across the waters in the south of my territory.


    I guess it is about time I also make a move.


    I have been inactive for a long time so I have to get reacquainted with my skills and opened my status.


    ***************


    Name: Arachne


    Level: 109 (0 up) 7%


    Race: Legendary Giant Spider


    Age: 689


    Status: Healthy


    Health:


    ?????????????????????????


    ?????????????????????????


    Abilities:


    Spider Strenght Level 4 (0 up) 58%


    Spider Speed Level 4 (0 up) 58%


    Heat Resistance Level 5 (Max)


    Cold Resistance Level 5 (Max)


    Poison Resistance Level 10 (Max)


    Ender Dragon''s Gifts:


    Ageless Body - cannot age no matter how much time has passed.


    Giant Spider Supreme Leader - can command thousands to tens of thousands of giant spider by his will.


    Nightwalker - can see in the dark.


    Extreme Regeneration - heal itself at a very fast pace.


    Devourer - Spider Strenght and Speed level will increase for every being eaten.


    Camouflage - can turn into a human for a period of time.


    ***************


    I see.


    It is now 689 years after my birth. It has been a really long time.


    I still remembered everything that happened in the past like they just happened yesterday. The carnage, the endless fire and being trapped in this forest.


    I invoke my ender dragon''s gift of Camouflage.


    I started to transform myself. Four of my legs is now being suck into my body leaving the other four to turn into human hands and legs. My multiple eyes are now starting to combine itself and after a moment they turn into a perfect pair of human eyes. Hair is starting to grow in my head and I slowly stand on my human feet.


    I am now standing in a dark cave without clothes and my children are staring at me wondering what I''m doing. This is probably their first time to see me transform into a human after a long time.


    I quickly made human clothes to wear using strings. I made it as similar to what Astikuvilian wears so I don''t attract attention.


    I summon one of my giant spiders. This one is quite a bit larger than the others but I''m still the largest among all of them.


    I need to ride one of my children since my little human legs won''t do any good at traveling.


    I hop on the back of my children and started traveling west to the Kingdom of Astikuviel.

 Episode 41: Journey Continues (2)

    ******* Goddess'' POV *******


    ''Goddess, this is my first and maybe my last prayer. Even though I don''t really believe you existed but if you did, I just hope you give pity to my wife. Destiny has already lead the sure destruction of the Kingdom of Xaerin but my wife has done nothing wrong. I''ll do whatever you asked of me. Just tell death to give her mercy.''


    I can finally hear the voice of the descendant of Xaerin.


    This is what I have been waiting for.


    The ender dragon might have trapped me in my heaven the way she is trapped in her end island but it doesn''t mean I can''t answer to the prayers of my creations.


    All of the three ancient kingdom''s descendants and the original one have finally reached out to me.


    It is time to get rid of their curse.


    It is time to let them know I didn''t abandon them.


    It is time to give them a fighting chance.


    I held my hands in front of me and it glows until everything around me is now bathed in light.


    ******* Prince Raimer''s POV *******


    The moment I reached the desecrated church in my castle in the eastern border, I quickly kneel on the ground in front of the broken altar.


    This place was once beautiful. The priest preached to hundreds of people gathered in here but now there are only dust and mold. The king forbade religion since he believes it only hinders his world conquest.


    I am all alone here while staring at the ground.


    I don''t know what to do.


    I tried to convince my father to stop the nonsense war but he won''t listen to me. He just said that it is his destiny to rule this world. He even tried to kill me for "treachery" but only managed to take my right eye.


    My wife is also plagued with an incurable disease. I don''t know where she gets it from but I called every potion master and healer in the kingdom and they didn''t manage to find a solution for her sickness. I even tried to call the ender dragon''s believers the illagers like the witches and warlocks but they also failed.


    I am losing hope.


    I am finally doing the thing that I didn''t think that I will do in my life and that is praying.


    I don''t really believe the existence of the Goddess but what else could I possibly do right now.


    I didn''t put my hand together like what the people who worship here do and just closed my eyes.


    I began praying.


    After a moment, I was answered with nothing but silence.


    Of course. What did I expect?


    I stand on my feet and began walking out of the church.


    I was about to step outside and reached my horse when suddenly I can hear a whisper in my ear.


    ''Don''t lose hope. Save this world.''


    I quickly turned around to see who said that and armed my giant iron hammer in my hand.


    I didn''t see anyone.


    I quickly noticed that my body suddenly shines and I closed my remaining left eye because of how bright it is.


    After a moment, I opened my eye and checked my body for any changes.


    Nothing. I can see nothing wrong in my body.


    I opened my status to see if there are any changes.


    **************


    Name: Raimer Van Ranst


    Level: 61 (0 up) 32%


    Race: Human


    Age: 36


    Status: Healthy


    Health: ??????????


    Abilities:


    Crafting Level 3 (0 up) 67%


    Enchanting Level 0 (0 up) 0%


    Brewing Level 0 (0 up) 0%


    Cartography Level 4 (0 up) 72%


    Redstone Level 0 (0 up) 0%


    Inhuman Strenght Level 3 (0 up) 88%


    Inhuman Speed Level 1 (0 up) 78%


    Melee Combat Level 3 (0 up) 58%


    Range Combat Level 1 (0 up) 41%


    Weapon Efficiency Level 2 (0 up) 49%


    Poison Resistance Level 1 (0 up) 34%


    Heat Resistance Level 1 (0 up) 27%


    Cold Resistance Level 1 (0 up) 62%


    Goddess''s Gifts:


    Descendant - inherent all the Goddess''s Gifts from a predecessor.


    Monster Hunter - Inhumane Strenght and Speed Level will increase for every monster killed. Speed Level is a third time slower to gain experience from Strenght.


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.Partial Immortality - The body ages slower than an average human.


    Melee Skills - all weapons that are melee will be much effective in battle.


    Berserker - can enhance strength and speed for a period of time.


    **************


    What? What is this?


    I am shocked to what I am seeing but the only thing that I''m so focused right now is the name Goddess in my status.


    The Goddess really do exist and she even answered my prayer.


    I kneeled on the ground holding my weapon in front of me.


    I didn''t put any sincerity to my first prayer but this time I put all my feelings into it.


    ''I won''t fail you, Goddess.''


    ******* Sisilla''s POV *******


    I hope Carolus and Rose are safe from their travel.


    They are probably fine since Carolus is around and he can handle anything.


    It is morning right now which means it is time to stay indoors once again. This is my most hated time in the day even though it is once my favorite.


    I am rocking my chair while brushing my cat.


    I stare in the surroundings and remembered that they are two humans that lived here for a night.


    I''m glad I met a human before I am gone fully insane from living for so long and decided to take my life away.


    ''Goddess, I pray for Carolus victory against the ender dragon.'' I prayed.


    I was about to close my eyes to pretend to sleep when suddenly I can feel my body changing.


    I quickly opened my eyes to see that I''m shining.


    My cat quickly got off my lap and run away in the distance.


    My body is aching so much and tried to stand but quickly fell on the floor.


    I am trashing and screaming begging for it to stop.


    After a while, the pain is finally gone and I slowly stand on my feet.


    I checked on my body to see that it is now different.


    I touched every part of my body to see that it is changed.


    What happened?


    I opened my status to see if they are changes.


    My eyes are wide open right now and started smiling and laughing like a crazy person.


    I quickly punched my front door down and ripped my clothes off.


    I slowly walked outside my house until my body is now fully bathed in sunlight.


    "Oh! How I miss this!" I exclaimed while spinning slowly with my arms spread wide on the muddy ground of the swamp.


    I jumped on the roof of the house and stare at the vast horizon.


    I know that I''m fully naked but I don''t care if anybody sees me right now. The people or monsters who happened to see me, just consider this a free service.


    I laughed and dance on the roof while having the rays of the yellow fire in the sky enveloped me.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    "Where are you going, Arthur?" I can hear the voice of Queen Thea behind me.


    I am walking towards the stables to finally start traveling south.


    "I have a duty to save my people," I said to Queen Thea without stopping.


    "No. You have a duty to serve this kingdom."


    The moment I hear Queen Thea''s words, I quickly turned around and both of us stopped walking while staring at each other.


    "I already served this kingdom when I was the lord and knight of the west until they stipped me of my title!" I shouted at Queen Thea.


    She didn''t flinch at my words and even ignored the people that are now gathering around us.


    "I have now enough influence and support to give you back your title and position." Queen Thea said after a moment.


    "I no longer need it nor care about it," I said to her while turning around and starting to walk towards the stables.


    Queen Thea tried to stop me by holding my hand and I was about to pull my hand away when suddenly I started shining.


    "Arthur!" Queen Thea shouted at me while trying to get closer to me.


    I quickly pushed her away and ordered her guards to protect her.


    I closed my eyes and just waited for something to happen.


    I opened my eyes after a moment and can see multiple soldiers pointing their weapons at me. I can also see some bows and crossbows ready to fire.


    What just happened? I didn''t feel any pain or changes in my body.


    "Stand down! I said STAND DOWN!" I can hear Queen Thea ordering her soldiers to lower their weapons.


    They reluctant to follow her orders at first but after hearing Queen Thea shouts, they finally put away their weapons.


    "Arthur, are you alright?" Queen Thea asked after a moment and I can see every single people here staring at me.


    I ignored all of them and just opened my status.


    It only takes only one glance in my status to have me kneeling on the ground.


    "Arthur!" Queen Thea shouted at me while starting to get close.


    She quickly kneels on the ground in front of me while trying to talk to me.


    "She finally answered," I said after a moment while Queen Thea is still talking.


    "What? What are you talking about?"


    "I prayed and prayed every day and she finally answered my prayers."


    "Arthur, you better start making sense before I call a healer."


    I didn''t answer Queen and just reached my hand on her face.


    She flinches in my touch but I don''t care right now.


    Tears are now flowing in my face.


    "The Goddess answered my prayers."


    Everyone around me is shocked about what I just said including Queen Thea.


    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    King Carolus and I are now galloping towards west.


    I finally managed to convince him to stopped fishing since he really wants to stay.


    It took quite a lot of arrows to make him move in his seat but we are now finally traveling towards my kingdom.


    I''m on the lead since I am now familiar with the land.


    King Carolus is right behind me and I kept track on him in case he suddenly disappears.


    "We are traveling too fast. We will tire our horses early." I can hear King Carolus voice behind me but I just ignored him.


    Too much time has already gone and I can''t imagine what is happening in the Kingdom of Aezeokar.


    Last time I was in my kingdom, they are still phantoms invasions on the eastern border and drowned attacks on the west.


    I hope they are all right.


    Everything was running smoothly for a while when suddenly I started to shine.


    I quickly halted my horse and I can also hear King Carolus stopping.


    I can''t see anything and I suddenly can feel someone grabbing me and I think I am now laying on the ground.


    After a moment, the bright light finally disappeared and I can now see King Carolus face right in front of me while holding me in his arms.


    I tried to shake him off but he is too strong.


    I can see an eye of ender in his hands and quickly used it on me.


    "Stop doing that! How many eye of enders do you have!?" I shouted at King Carolus.


    "I see. Your curse is gone now." He just ignored me and started spouting something.


    What curse?


    I quickly opened my status to see if they are any changes.


    I was shocked to see that they are now gifts from the Goddess and new abilities.


    I can''t believe it.


    I am still bewildered about my status when suddenly I was being helped stand on my feet. I didn''t mind King Carolus hands on me and just let him do it.


    I stared at him while wondering about what he just said.


    He said something about a curse. He knew something about me that I didn''t know and he didn''t say anything about it.


    King Carolus ordered to stop traveling and just rest for now but I just protested and urge to keep moving.


    I don''t know what just happened but I know this is a sign that I''m walking the true path the Goddess wants me to tread on.

 Episode 42: Journey Continues (3)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    It is past noon and we are still traveling at full speed.


    Rose is taking the lead and we are galloping beside the vast water on the side. The giant river is now turned into an ocean. I really need a map of the world right now since I don''t know where I''m exactly am I. I don''t really fancy on just relying on Rose for navigation.


    ''Dammit, Rose. Take it easy with the horses.'' I said to my mind while watching Rose forcing her horse to run very fast.


    There is also about the matter of Rose shining for a second and having her curse gone. I''ll probably need to ask Queen Thea or Sisilla about this since both of them have my ender chests.


    "Let''s stop for now," I said to Rose while stopping my horse from running.


    Rose also stopped and steered her horse around. She started traveling towards me while I''m dismounting my horse.


    "What are you doing? We are about a torch away from the border." Rose quickly said to me while staring on top of her horse.


    Rose said that we are only a torch away which means we are only about two hours away from her kingdom. It is good and all but I need to send a message first.


    The sun in the sky is now starting to bother me so I just built a temporary waiting shed, for now, to tie in the horses and have shade from the sun.


    Rose is still complaining and I just ignored her while placing an ender chest on the ground.


    "What is that?" Rose finally stopped protesting and asked me a question.


    "An ender chest. It has multiple uses and I can explain them to you but not right now." I said to her while opening the cover of the ender chest.


    A window appeared in front of me and I was actually shocked that they are something inside of it.


    There are two letters.


    I quickly picked both letters and opened the first one.


    The first message is from Queen Thea. It is really long and there are a lot of pages.


    **************


    ''King Carolus.


    I hope that you can read this message as early as possible since you said that we can communicate with this magical chest.


    There is a matter of urgency about Arthur and the sudden change in his status. He said that he is granted gifts from the Goddess and I believe him but my people do not. I was hoping you can give us an insight about was just happened


    The details about what just happened will be written in the next pages.


    Queen Thea.


    Hah! I read this message first right before you do Carolus since I''m crazy. - Sisilla''


    **************


    What?


    I was about to read the rest of Queen Thea''s message when I noticed the last writing after Queen Thea''s name.


    Dammit, Sisilla. Leave my personal message alone. I should probably teach Queen Thea how to encrypt a message and also teach Sisilla how to not read other people''s letters.


    I didn''t think of this when I gave both of them my ender chests. Of course, everyone that has one will be able to access everything inside this chest. I should be careful from now on.


    I managed to read the rest of Queen Thea''s message and it seems that the same thing happened with Arthur. He probably has the same curse as Rose and Sisilla.


    Damn. I thought Arthur was just some ex-soldier of some kind and didn''t notice that he is something more.


    Queen Thea is also asking for my advice about how to handle the situation which, to be frank, I also don''t have any idea what is going on.


    I just started writing a reply for Queen Thea and stored it on the ender chest. I also wrote a book on how to write an encrypted message and ask Queen Thea to read it and destroy it after.


    The matter of Queen Thea is probably handled so it is now time to open the second letter.


    **************


    Hello there!


    You are probably mad about me reading the first letter. Don''t worry, I promise it won''t happen again. I wrote you a letter to tell you that it is now finally time to face our destiny but you already knew that don''t you?The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    It seems that we will be seeing each other again in the near future along with Rose and the other two people. It is very fun to finally get back into action. I will take care of the monsters in this forest in the meantime while you talk with this "Prophet".


    It is finally time to end the tyranny of monsters and stop the ender dragon once and for all. Hope you will lead us this time.


    From your sweet lover, Sisilla


    **************


    I don''t know how to react with Sisilla''s letter.


    Sisilla is saying some things I don''t understand but I didn''t ignore it this time and just keep it on my mind.


    I really don''t have a solid plan right now aside from talking to this ''Prophet''. I just have to go there for now and find out for myself.


    Sisilla is also saying that I''ll have to lead them. Lead them to what? Battling all the monsters in the world and the ender dragon? Well, good luck with that. I can''t even leave a permanent scratch on a single legendary monster. I know she is a little bit crazy but this is insane.


    I didn''t write a reply and just put away Sisilla''s letter in the chest for now and tear down the temporary waiting shed.


    I ordered to start traveling again so I can finally find my answers to all to my questions.


    Rose and I traveled in silence for a while.


    We finally saw something in the distance like a wall or something.


    "Wait. That wall was not there before." I can hear Rose saying something while keeping her eyes forward.


    We are starting to get closer until we are in front of a really tall stone wall and an iron gate. The wall is about the same height as my castle wall.


    Interesting, I didn''t know that there is someone in this world that have enough resources to be able to build a wall that stretches so far. I can''t see the edge in the southwest so I can''t really know how long is this wall. It also stretches endlessly in the north.


    The people on top of the wall notices us and ready their weapons.


    Great. The usual greeting that I always encountered.


    I was about to ready my weapon when suddenly one of the people on the top of the wall shouted at us.


    "Who dares approach the great wall of Aezeokar?"


    Okay.


    "Rose," I said Rose''s name while staring at the people on top of the wall.


    I didn''t equip a weapon in my hand but I didn''t let my guard down.


    "My name is Rose Cromwell. Lady of the Eastern Border and niece of the king. I order you to open this gates immediately." Rose quickly said to the person who is asking us a question.


    The person who I believe in charge of the wall didn''t reply to what Rose just said and just continued staring at us.


    "You are lying. Lady Rose is dead."


    Great. Of course, they going to assumed that she is dead since she is missing for a long time.


    What to do now?


    I can see Rose is equipping an iron bow in her hands and all of the people on top of the wall raises their weapons to prepare to fire.


    I was about to wear my armor and hold a weapon to prepare to defend ourselves when suddenly Rose raises the weapon over her head and letting the people on top of the wall sees it.


    All of them turn quite while they stare at Rose''s iron bow.


    "What the... Open... Uhm... Open the gates!" The person in charge is in shock after seeing Rose''s bow. He fumbled for a while until he finally ordered to open the gates.


    The iron door in front of us, about the same size in my castle, slowly opened.


    Rose looked at me for a moment before kicking her horse to move it forward.


    I don''t know what just happened so I just moved my horse and followed Rose.


    I can see lines of soldiers on the sides. They are in perfect line and they are standing straight. They are also ordinary citizens gathering behind the soldiers. It feels like I am at a festival and we are in a procession.


    It is really weird but I just keep myself calm and just observe my surroundings.


    I noticed something strange here.


    All of the soldiers here are wearing an iron armor and wielding an iron weapon. Considering what I just noticed in Queen Thea''s army, they only got a little bit amount of iron but it seems that the Kingdom of Aezeokar is rolling in with irons. They probably have a stable supply of iron somewhere or they already have this much in the first place but the way Rose is reacting right now, it seems that it is her first knowing about this.


    I just keep my thoughts to myself for now and just follow Rose to wherever she is going.


    ******* Legendary Creeper''s POV *******


    I have taken over this castle in the center of the forest.


    It took quite a bit of explosion before I managed to have a peace talk between the pigmen and wither skeletons.


    I managed to convince them to stop fighting and unite themselves to fight a common enemy. Convincing them was easy since they recently fought with a powerful human and said human managed to kill hundreds on both sides.


    I also asked for them to garrison this castle in the overworld for now so we can use this as a temporary gateway to transport resources and my future army.


    I am standing on top of the west wall of the castle.


    I stared at the vast horizon and after a moment I jumped towards the sky to ride the ghast that I managed to tame in the nether.


    I steered my mount forward and we are now flying above the trees.


    My destination is a little further on the west just about the edge of the forest.


    I managed to reach the place and I started to remember what happened here.


    This place is a giant graveyard.


    Thousands of people died here defending the world from monsters but they died for nothing.


    They bleed and died on a grassy field and was buried on the place they fell upon.


    All of the people here were ripped from their families and was forced to fight a losing a battle. It is time for them to wake up and take revenge to the humans who wrong them.


    I held my hand in front of me and concentrated.


    My hands expanded a little bit and a giant explosion occurred.


    A crack appeared in front of me and black smoke is slowly pouring in the hole.


    The place below me is now filled with black smoke.


    After a moment, multiple explosions occurred everywhere on the ground and I just continued observing.


    Most of the trees below are now obliterated from the explosions and they are now a lot of craters on the ground.


    I can see that they are something crawling out in the holes.


    They looked different than me and they don''t have arms and instead of having two long legs, they have four and they are so short. It doesn''t matter what they looked like. What matters is that their desire for revenge.


    I was disappointed that they are only about two hundred of them here. I was expecting thousands of them to be reborn but it seems that not a lot of them held a grudge against humanity.


    It is not enough. I need more.


    I ordered all of them to travel towards the castle.


    I was about to leave when I suddenly can feel the presence of human beings.


    They are close.


    I know it is still too early to make myself known to the world but I want them dead.


    I steered the ghast further in the west.

 Episode 43: A Coming Disaster (1)

    ******* Ender Dragon''s POV *******


    What is happening?


    The tight grip of the chains around me is starting to loosen up.


    I tried stretching my body and somewhat can move around a few blocks.


    Interesting.


    Did something happen with the Goddess?


    I closed my eyes and try to see the overworld through the eyes of my creations. Most of them are still trapped and being pushed back by the humans but I can see one who is now flying above a human village.


    My newest and favorite creation is moving against the beings that chained me on my island.


    I laughed and raised my head.


    It is finally time to make the humans bow down before me.


    I used my powers a little bit and tried seeing the future to see the foolish struggle of humans. I was surprised to see something else that makes my happiness go away.


    Five people will stand before me.


    A man wielding a spear.


    A woman wielding a bow.


    A man wielding a giant hammer.


    A woman who fights with her fists.


    All four of them will be leading by a man wielding all of those weapons and a sword.


    I see. That is why the Goddess grip on me loosened is because she used a lot of power to break the curse that I placed upon the descendants of the heroes who fought me.


    It seems the Goddess also brought another outsider in this world.


    It doesn''t matter. The Goddess just made a huge mistake. I know she is weakened now so it is a perfect time to rally my creations.


    I opened my mouth and screamed so loud.


    Multiple cracks appeared before me and I can feel the echoes of my voice traveling across the dimensions and all over the world.


    ******* Legendary Creeper''s POV *******


    I can hear a scream echoed in the air and I know whose voice it is.


    The Ender Dragon.


    ''Kill them. Show them no mercy.'' A whisper suddenly brushed my ears.


    Don''t worry, Ender Dragon. Even if you didn''t tell me, I will still make them pay for what they have done.


    I am flying on top of the human village near the forest and it looks like they are waking up because of the huge roar.


    The sun is about to go down and looks like it is about time to make a move.


    I kneel on my one knee and tap the top of the head of the ghast. The ghast know that this is a signal to attack. This is one of the things that I trained him to do.


    The ghast started spitting black flaming balls to the houses below us.


    Multiple explosions occurred and set most of the houses on fire.


    Human screams are now can be heard and I can see some soldiers below frantically searching for the enemies who attack them.


    Most of the humans are now running out of their houses and are quickly evacuating the village. Even with their panic screams, they are still organized and is now traveling towards the west. It seems this is not their first time being attack by a monster.


    I can''t let them escape.


    I was about to order my ghast to start firing again when suddenly arrows started flying towards us.


    I quickly steered the ghast away from the arrows.


    It seems that human soldiers managed to find me.


    It looks like I need to take care of this matter myself.


    I jumped off the ghast and landed in the middle of the soldiers. They are about thirty of them but they are only equipped with leather armor and stone weapons.


    What happened to the renowned diamond soldiers of Astikuviel?


    Some of them started charging at me with their weapons held tight in their hands.


    I didn''t use my abilities for this battle and just started killing them by using my hands. I want the bodies intact so I can try to bury them to turn into a creeper or if that doesn''t work because they don''t bare enough hate towards mankind, I could try turning them into other monsters that I can use.The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    It didn''t take long for ten of them to die.


    I noticed that there is something different about the Astikuvilian soldiers. They are not as brave and tenacious than I could remember. I guess centuries has changed the people in this world. I have to give them my respect though since they are fighting me with everything they got.


    Another arrow pierced my head. I just pulled the arrow out and threw it on the ground.


    "Go, soldier. Will hold this monster off. Tell the queen about this."


    I can hear the man in charge of this small army ordering one of the mounted soldiers to leave.


    ''No. I can''t let them escape.'' I said to myself while trying to see beyond the smoke.


    Smoke is starting to fill the surroundings because of the burning wood and I can barely see any of my enemies.


    I picked up one of the soldiers that are in front of me and threw him on the general direction of the messenger.


    I didn''t hear anything or anyone being hit.


    I am getting mad about not being able to see my surroundings. I concentrated on my right hand and lift it to the sky.


    An explosion occurred and the blast managed to clear up all the smoke. All of the soldiers also got blown away by the explosion and is on the ground coughing blood or not moving.


    The mounted soldier managed to get away but it doesn''t matter. There is now nothing left standing in my way.


    I closed my eyes and focused on detecting the remaining humans around me.


    It seems they are still about five of them nearby.


    I quickly run towards them and see that they are mounted and was about to run away.


    I concentrated on my legs and made them explode. I am now flying in the air towards them.


    They managed to distance from me but I managed to land in between them and trapped an old man.


    "Peyton!" The old woman suddenly screamed at the old man.


    "Go on without me, Eleanor! I''ll be fine I promise!" The old man screamed back at the old woman.


    There are three horses that are now standing between me.


    The other side has two women riding them and each of them has a child riding behind while the old man is now holding a stone spear in his hand.


    The old man kicked his horse forward and pointed the spear at me.


    I just grab the spear and toss the old man on the ground.


    "Peyton!" The old woman screamed his name again and is now starting to go back.


    "No! Go! Don''t turn back!" The old man managed to shout back while coughing up blood.


    I can see the old woman staring at me while stopping her horse. She slowly turned around and both of the horses are now galloping away.


    I slowly walk towards the old man who is laying on the ground facing the dirt.


    I kicked him to make him lie on his back.


    I then stepped my foot on his chest.


    Seeing the other people abandoned him, the old man stared at me and started laughing.


    He is probably gone insane from having so much fear.


    "Haha. You have the face who thinks you already won." The old man said to me while trying to shake off my foot.


    I put more force in my foot making the old man grimace.


    "You think you can defeat, old man?" I said to him while bending myself so he can see my face better.


    "No, but I know he can." He quickly answered my question while still trying to laugh even having trouble breathing.


    What is this old man talking about?


    "I know you will bow down on his feet and beg for his mercy." The old man continued.


    I just stared at the old man while listening to him.


    "I know he will chop you into tiny pieces and there is nothing you can do."


    "Who is this person you are talking about, old man?" I finally asked him.


    The old man smiled so brightly like he is not being stepped on by a legendary monster.


    "King Carolus." The old man said proudly.


    He is now holding a stone hoe in his right hand and quickly swing towards my chest.


    The stone hoe buries deep in my chest and the old man let go of the handle.


    I just pulled out the stone hoe and tossed it aside.


    I then concentrated on my foot.


    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    A lot of things happened this past few days after the Goddess granted me gifts and abilities.


    Queen Thea quickly said that this is a good sign that the Goddess will finally get rid of the monsters in this world.


    Queen Thea also tried to grant me back my title as a lord. I was about to refuse when she suddenly shows me a letter from King Carolus. He said that I need to stop someone named Sisilla from fighting Legendary Monsters all by herself. I don''t know what he is talking about but I don''t want to disobey King Carolus wishes.


    I accepted the offer of lordship and a great ceremony was held. Lots of people tried to stop this but Queen Thea just stared at them and they quickly shrink back. After the battle between the Xaerin and the kingdom, Queen Thea returned to the capital as a winner and quickly gathered the favor of some influential people and the common folk. All of the opposition has now little power towards her.


    Queen Thea also ordered to start recruiting more soldiers to build a great army. She said that if our enemies can''t be defeated by kindness, we just need to defeat them using iron, stone, and flint. The people on the court also tried to stop her about this because of the lack of food in the kingdom but she quickly offered a solution to the problem. King Carolus taught us how to turn skeleton bones into a bonemeal and use it to quickly grow crops. The people were shocked about this. The hunger is finally solved in this kingdom.


    I asked for a condition though to Queen Thea before accepting the lordship. I want someone sent to save our people from the Kingdom of Chaephitopia. Thankfully, Queen Thea agreed to my condition. She already has plans about this while we are traveling back to the kingdom.


    I am now galloping towards the east together with other twenty people as my guards.


    We are now close to my village that is recently fixed and it seems the sun is about to go down.


    A roar suddenly echoed in the air making the horses frantic and everyone around me shock.


    I quickly calmed down my horse and every one even though I am quite a bit shock myself.


    ''What just happened? Whose scream was that?''


    My thoughts were suddenly interrupted with explosions on the distance. I can see fire began to envelop the houses and people are now running towards us.


    I ordered most of my guards to help the civilians evacuate and have only five soldiers with me.


    It is probably another zombie or skeleton attack but why there are explosions and fire though?


    As we are about to enter the village, another mounted soldier approaches us.


    "Stop!" I quickly ordered the mounted soldier to stop his horse.


    The mounted soldier didn''t listen to me and even try to run past us.


    Three of my guards quickly surrounded the mounted soldier and the mounted soldier is now holding his spear high in his hand.


    "Get out of my way! I have to report this to the queen!" The mounted shouted at us while trying to attack anyone who tried to get near him.


    "Speak! What is happening?" I said to him while motioning to my guards to distance themselves.


    "A monster about the size of a human is attacking the village. The monster is so powerful and can''t be stopped." The mounted soldier quickly said to me.


    I let the mounted soldier get past us and even relay a message on my own to the queen.


    I quickly moved my horse forward in the village along with the other five soldiers.

 Episode 44: A Coming Disaster (2)

    ******* Arthur''s POV *******


    I am pushing my horse to run as fast as it can in the village while having my five guards trying to catch up with me.


    I suddenly noticed two horses in front of us galloping towards our direction.


    I quickly halted my horse and all of my guards. I waited for the two women to get near us.


    It is Eleanor, her daughter, and her grandchildren.


    "Arthur!" Eleanor quickly said to me while stopping her horse and her daughter also halted beside her.


    "Are you alright? Where''s Peyton?" I quickly asked Eleanor since I didn''t notice the old man when I was helping the other villagers.


    "Quick! You have to save my husband. He is holding a monster off all by himself." Eleanor said to me while crying.


    "Where?" I quickly asked Eleanor.


    Eleanor pointed at the general direction where they run off to and I quickly ordered my guards the protect them. My guards protested on me going alone to fight a monster so I decided to bring two of them with me.


    We are now galloping towards the east and it is really hard to focus because of all the heat and smoke coming from the burning houses.


    We managed to reach the place where Eleanor described and I can finally see someone stepping its foot on an old man.


    I didn''t bother to stop my horse from running and just jumped off while putting my iron armor on.


    I rolled on the ground for about four blocks and quickly equipped my diamond spear on my hand.


    I threw my spear at the monster about ten blocks from me while I''m still kneeling on the ground and my spear went through the monster''s chest.


    The monster didn''t scream or anything and just tried to pull the spear out of its body.


    I invoked the Loyalty III enchantment of my spear and the monster is now flying towards me while still having my weapon on its chest.


    I quickly grabbed my spear on my right hand and I''m now facing the monster in front of me.


    I can finally see the face of the monster and it looks like the monster is a woman.


    Her face is filled with curiosity rather than pain.


    She smiled at me after a while.


    "Bad move, soldier," The monster said while hugging me with her arms.


    The monster is too strong and I am having trouble in shaking her off even with my newfound strength given by the Goddess.


    Her arms suddenly expanded a little bit and after a while, an explosion occurred making me close my eyes.


    I don''t know what just happened but I opened my eyes and saw that I am now standing at the bottom of a giant crater.


    I am alright though and didn''t even felt a little bit of pain.


    It seems that the armor given to me by King Carolus is really well made but still, I can see tiny cracks all over them.


    I tried spending my levels on my armor just like what King Carolus said to me if ever my armor''s durability is reduced.


    My armor suddenly glowed for a while and all of the damaged done to it was suddenly gone.


    "Interesting. An iron armor with Blast Protection V and Mending enchantments." I can suddenly hear the voice of the monster in front of me.


    She is missing her arms but I noticed that they are now quickly growing back.


    ''What kind of monster I am facing right now? Can I even defeat it all by myself?''


    I just cleared my thoughts and just swing my spear with everything I got. The monster didn''t bother to block and was hit hard. She flew out of the crater and I quickly jumped out of the hole to see where she is going.


    The monster flew through a burning house and I can no longer see her.


    I didn''t let my guard down but I need to check on the person who is lying on the ground.


    I run towards the person who is trying to stand on his feet.


    "Peyton!" I quickly exclaimed after identifying who the person is.Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road.


    "Arthur, what are you doing here?" Peyton said while losing his balance and is now slowly falling on the ground.


    I quickly helped him stand up and ordered my two guards to escort him out of here. My guards protested to my order but I just ask them if they can fight and win against that monster, I''ll let them join the battle. They didn''t say anything and just picked up the old man and leave.


    It is only me, the burning village and that monster left in this place.


    I''ll kneel on the ground with one knee while holding my spear with both hands in front of me.


    ''I won''t fail you, Goddess.''


    I can see the monster slowly walking out the burning building and it seems she is not bothered with the heat.


    I quickly rose in my feet and prepare for battle.


    It has been a long time since I fought a powerful monster. Last time, it was a three block tall skeleton along with its army but I know this one I''m facing right now is much more powerful. I may not win this one but I''m not letting any monster set foot in my kingdom.


    This monster will just have to walk over my cold corpse first before she can do anything in the Kingdom of Astikuviel.


    "How peculiar. You are a lot stronger than an average human. Perhaps you are King Carolus the old man was talking about?" The monster said to me while fixing her whatever left of her tattered clothes.


    "Sorry to disappoint you but no, I am not him," I said to her while increasing my guard.


    I don''t know what her abilities are so I have to be careful. I know she can explode her arms so I just have to avoid getting grabbed or caught.


    "I see." The monster said after a moment and then she leaped forward.


    She is fast!


    I quickly dodged to the side to avoid the monster''s assault.


    Her punch broke the wall of the house behind me and the house is now collapsing.


    It seems she is strong too.


    I won''t falter. I''ll just need to find a weakness or wait for sunlight since it might be this monster is an undead.


    ******* Legendary Creeper''s POV *******


    I can see the human is now on the ground trying to stand up.


    The battle went on for a while but it seems he is now tired and it is already the middle of the night.


    The light of the fires from the burning houses are now gone and it is now pitch black. This is one of the reasons that I managed to land a few hits since the human can''t see in the dark.


    This human might be useful to me but too bad since the ender dragon wants this human dead.


    I charged once again and the human ready his spear. He thrust his spear forward. I tried to parry the attack but it managed to pierce through my left shoulder.


    It seems this human still has a little bit of strength in him but it doesn''t matter. He is finally within my reach.


    I grabbed him with hands and concentrated.


    His armor is still in good shape and he keeps on repairing them which means he still has plenty of levels to spend on mending. I''ll have to break his armor first before I can kill him.


    As my hands were about to explode, I can hear something spitting towards me.


    I quickly jumped back and managed to evade a green substance.


    The liquid began smoking on the ground and looks like it is a poison.


    I scanned the surroundings to see who attacked me.


    A woman who is wearing a white robe is standing on top of a burnt house.


    Human? No, there is something different about her.


    I don''t know who this being is but I can feel that she is a lot more experience than me in battle. I don''t want to fight her unnecessarily since I still have a lot of things to do.


    I stared at the human in front of me who is now using his spear to help him stand.


    ''It seems this is his lucky day.'' I said in my mind.


    I decided to fall back for now and hopped on top of my ghast.


    I then flew towards the forest to get back to the castle leaving a burnt village and lots of dead humans behind me.


    ******* Sisilla''s POV *******


    There are four things a wise man fear in this world.


    Traveling in the sea while storming.


    A night with no moon.


    The wrath of a good man and most importantly;


    Attacking an undead fortress in the middle of the night.


    My quest to get rid of all the monsters on this side of the world is not doing well so far.


    I gracefully lose with the giant slime in the swamp since that thing just keeps on absorbing slimes around him and just won''t die. I decided to fall back for now and just choose another monster to attack.


    There is no turning back now.


    I burnt my house in the swamp to the ground that I have been living for a long time. I really hated that house since it is a reminder that I was once undead and can''t walk in daylight without covering myself.


    I also killed my skeleton horse since he no longer listens to me and buried him in the ground. It seems he knows that I am no longer undead. I just tamed another horse that I managed to stumbled when I was running in the territory of the skeletons.


    I am now on top of a mountain staring at the skeleton fortress in the distance.


    I turned around and made sure to hide my horse and cat so the skeletons won''t find them.


    I then placed a TNT on the ground and ignite the fuse with a flint and steel.


    I kicked the TNT so hard and it is now flying towards the fortress.


    A great explosion occurred and the whole area is now shaking a little bit from the blast.


    Holes in the fortress suddenly appeared and skeletons holding a stone pickaxes walked out. It seems this fortress don''t have any doors whatsoever.


    Thousands of skeletons then started pouring out of the fortress and I began to smile very brightly.


    I can feel my new thin clothing is starting to wave before thousands of monster running towards the top of the mountain.


    I drink all of the battle potions I have in my inventory and quickly wore my diamond armor.


    It is now time for a beautiful dance.


    I charged at the skeletons and began punching them into pieces.


    I laughed and dance while tearing through my enemies.


    I was having so much fun when suddenly a great explosion occurred in the fortress and lots of stones started flying all over the place.


    The stones that are flying managed to hit and kill some of the skeletons and I just punch away the stones that are moving towards me.


    I can see a giant skeleton walking out in the huge hole in the fortress. It seems that the monster just decided to punch his way out. He needs to build a door to that fortress.


    The giant skeleton is now walking towards me.


    All of the skeletons around me started to fall back and I am now face to face with a legendary monster while being surrounded with thousands of undead monsters.


    "It has been a long time, Zane. How are you been?" I said to the giant skeleton.


    "Your voice. No, it is impossible. All of the heroes of the past died by the hands of the mother." Zane said while lowering his giant iron sword.


    He can''t see my face with my helmet but it seems that he still managed to identify me.


    "Well, I did die perse but it seems that destiny has still had plans for me," I said to him while preparing to charge.


    "Fool! You should have stayed dead!" The giant skeleton shouted to me while raising his sword high and then swinging it down.


    I laughed once again and it looks like this will be a long night.

 Episode 45: A Coming Disaster (3)

    ****** Carolus'' POV *******


    We finally reached the castle in the eastern border in the Kingdom of Aezeokar after parading with thousands of weeping citizens that just want to have a little glimpse of their "Lady Rose".


    The travel was really annoying and so slow but thankfully we managed to get past them and are now slowly walking inside the castle.


    The climate of this place is also bothering me since after a day''s travel in the southeastern border. It started snowing nonstop and it is really cold. I am not ready for this and have to quickly craft another set of clothing. It seems the Kingdom of Aezeokar is living in a cold biome.


    I started to observe the people in the surroundings and notice that the tension here it still high because of the incident yesterday. There was a scream that shook all of us and nobody knows who and what it is.


    Damn. What is going in this world? I remembered that someone whispered to me that this world is about to get destroyed. I need to return quickly to my own world otherwise I will get caught up with their demise.


    There are also strange things going on in the nether. I read all the letters and reports in the pigman''s ender chest and discovered that they are planning something.


    The pigmen and wither skeletons also stopped fighting all of the sudden and they seem to be united or something now. What happened that make these two monsters that are constantly killing each to ally themselves?


    I also discovered a letter with disturbing information. It said that they took over a castle in the middle of the forest and they need to help transfer the newborn green monsters to the giant portal.


    I don''t know how to react to this information. I hope they are not talking about my castle since it is located in the middle of a forest. I also hope that Merek is fine. I am starting to regret leaving that person alone in the middle of the forest that is surrounded by monsters.


    The information about the green monsters also started to bother me. There are a lot of green monsters in this world like zombies, slimes, and creepers. I wonder which one are they talking about?


    I just cleared my mind since there is no point in worrying about the things that are far from my priorities.


    I dismounted on my horse and handed the reins to the soldier that is beside me. I told the soldier to take care of my horse and to keep him warm since he is a good companion of mine and we share a lot of experiences during our stay in the Forest of Monsters.


    Rose and her company also dismounted and ushered me inside the castle keep.


    After the gate is open wide, I saw people standing in front of us. They are well dressed so they are probably nobles or something.


    Great. Another lengthy formalities and conversation.


    Contrary to my belief, one of them suddenly run forward and hug Rose.


    "Rose. I can''t believe it. You are really alive." The lady said while holding tight Rose.


    "I''m back, dear sister. I''m home." Rose replied while hugging her back.


    Okay. This is huge news for me. Didn''t know Rose has a sister. I hope the sister is not like Rose with being short-tempered and aggressive.


    Another thing also approached Rose.


    A bird. It is a red parrot.


    The parrot flew over the people in front of us and quickly landed on Rose''s shoulder.


    Okay. I didn''t know that Rose also has a pet. There is a lot of shocking things about Rose that I just know right now.


    The hugging finally stopped and the sister is now wiping her tears away.


    "Jack. Glad to know that you are alright too." Rose said to her parrot while rubbing his head.


    I really feel like I''m out of place here and I really want to go talk to this prophet but I''m glad that I managed to find Rose and cured her. Otherwise, Rose will still be a zombie and I don''t have any way of knowing about this prophet.


    This prophet is said to be in the capital though so there is still more traveling to do.


    Rose, her sister and the people here talked for a moment while I''m just standing here not doing anything and just listening to their conversation.


    After a while, they finally offered a room to rest in and I quickly said ''Yes'' since I''m really cold and tired right now.This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    The sun is also about to go down so it is perfect timing to finally sleep.


    I was ushered to my room and quickly get inside so I can finally rest.


    They tried offering food and other things but I just said ''No'' and send them all away.


    I was about to get on my bed when suddenly I can hear a knocking on my door.


    God, no. Please let me rest.


    I just grumbly opened the door of my room and was shocked to see that it is the sister of Rose.


    I let her inside and both of us are now sitting in a chair.


    "King Carolus. Thank you for letting me talk to you even though you are resting." The sister said while bowing her head to me.


    Well, to tell you the truth, I didn''t even get to lie down on my bed before you knock on my door.


    I didn''t say anything to her and just nodded my head while continued staring.


    "Oh. I didn''t get the chance to introduce myself since you said you are tired of your travels and wanted to rest."


    If I have to guess, she is probably named after a flower or something just like her sister since she also has red hair.


    "My name is Poppy. It is pretty nice to meet you."


    Knew it.


    Poppy started talking for a while and I just let her even though I really want to lie down on my bed.


    I noticed that she is a lot different than her sister. For starters, she is really kind and mature which is odd since she is the sister of Rose. My guess is they probably grew up in different places and didn''t get the chance to be together or they are not related. I hope it is the former.


    Poppy also started thanking me for returning her sister and this time I finally stopped her from talking and just kindly ask to be left alone so I can rest.


    Poppy left the room and I quickly changed to my pajamas.


    I suddenly remembered that I''m a little dirty from the travel and I needed cleaning. Thankfully, they have a bathroom in this room and have a quick wash.


    After washing myself, I was about to get on the bed when suddenly I can hear a sound of sorts like it is a blowhorn or something.


    I took a deep breath and closed my eyes while raising my head.


    Great. What is happening now?


    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    I didn''t expect to be finally back home.


    When I was ordered to leave for a mission to find the ''Lost Hero'', I was actually expecting to fail and not be able to get back to the kingdom.


    My welcome here is also really heartwarming. People on the roads was happy and screamed for my name.


    I was talking to Poppy in her room when she suddenly asked to leave to talk to somebody.


    I just let her leave while holding her newborn child on my hands.


    I didn''t know that my sister got married while I''m away.


    I was a little bit angry though for Poppy to be married since she is still very young but I''m very happy for her.


    The boy in my arms has the same hair as her mother.


    I was about to give the child to one of the caretakers when suddenly the door of the room opened and Poppy came in.


    "Your back. That was quick. Who did you talk to you?" I said to Poppy while walking towards her and carrying her baby.


    I handed her baby to her.


    "I just talked to King Carolus. I tried to thank him for returning you but he just said that he needed rest." She said to me while she walked towards one of the chairs in the room and sit.


    "I see. Well, he probably still not adjusted to the climate here." I said to her while chucking more wood in the fireplace since it is slightly cold for the baby.


    "I guess your right."


    The silence began to fill the room and I''m just staring at Poppy.


    I requested for her to be in charge of this place while I''m away. I know she is still young but she is capable and I don''t want anyone else taking over this territory.


    I suddenly remembered something that bothers me.


    Why is there so much iron in this kingdom?


    All of the armors, weapons even tools used by normal people are made out of iron.


    Where did they get this amount of iron?


    There is also about the wall that seems to be surrounding the entire kingdom. When did they build it and where did they get the materials for it?


    I was about to ask Poppy about these things when suddenly I can hear a sound that I was hoping that I will never hear again in my life.


    The sound of horns indicating that there is a phantom invasion.


    Poppy also knows what the sound of the horn is about.


    She was about to hand over her baby to the caretaker when I run past her towards the door.


    "No. Stay here. I will handle it." I quickly said to her.


    Poppy looked at me and her face is full of concern.


    "Don''t worry. I''m now back. I will take care of it like I always do." I said to her while starting to run towards outside the castle.


    I am finally back in my kingdom and I''m together with my family so I''ll be damned if I let anyone hurt them.


    I run outside the castle keep and then towards the stables.


    I quickly mount my horse and I''m now traveling towards the very tall eastern wall that I don''t remember existing while I was still here. I''m together with a lot of soldiers.


    I managed to reach the bottom of the wall and quickly run on the stairs towards the highest tower here.


    I looked around here and saw about five hundred soldiers here equipped with iron armor and weapons. All of them are ready for battle.


    I ignored the matter of why there is a lot of iron here and was glad that we have a lot of advantage with the enemies.


    I looked up in the sky and saw hundreds of phantoms circling the dark sky.


    Their numbers are still growing since more and more phantoms are still coming from the east.


    "My lady. I''m glad to have you with us." I can hear someone talking beside me.


    I didn''t face the person who was talking to me and just continued staring at the sky.


    "Who are you?" I just said to him while now wearing my armor and holding my diamond bow.


    "Right. I haven''t properly introduced myself. I am the general that is assigned to protect the eastern border and I''m also the husband of Lady Poppy."


    "I see," I said to him while wondering what my sister''s husband looks like since I didn''t want to take off my eyes in the phantoms.


    I actually asked the moment I reached the southeastern border if there are any invasions while I''m away but was surprised to know that there wasn''t any.


    What happened to make the phantoms attacked my kingdom once again? Is it about the scream that occurred yesterday?


    I was starting to get anxious to order to fire at the phantoms but there are still so high in the sky that the arrows will still not be able to reach them.


    I can hit the phantoms at this distance though with my diamond bow but I just calmed myself down and observe.


    A shriek suddenly roared in the sky that makes everyone around me cover their ears.


    I remember that sound.


    A giant phantom appeared flying low in the distance above the ocean and is now getting closer here.


    The giant phantom suddenly flies up in the sky to join the small phantoms.


    I am now filled with so much rage.


    That monster is the one who took away my father.

 Episode 46: Tragedy (1)

    ******* Rose''s POV *******


    "What are you doing!? Fire back! Don''t be intimidated!" I shouted at everyone who is on top of the ramparts and towers.


    The battle is going well at first but now we are getting overwhelmed.


    There are too many phantoms attacking right now and this is the first time this kingdom has seen this scale of invasion.


    Even with iron weapons and armors, we still can''t kill them all or push them back.


    The only thing we can do right now is to hold out until the sun arrives or wait for reinforcements. I already send a messenger to ask for help in the capital but I don''t think they will get here in time.


    I can see another soldier getting dragged by the phantoms and is now slowly getting carried towards east.


    I fired multiple arrows and managed to hit all of the phantoms carrying the soldier. Even with the distance, I still managed to kill them all. I guess the gifts of the Goddess is starting to get useful.


    The soldier is now falling in the ocean. All of the soldiers of the Aezeokar Kingdom is trained how to swim in cold water so he will probably fine along with other people who are now in the ocean but we still need to fish them out of there.


    "Where are our battleships? I can''t see them anywhere." I asked the general beside while still firing arrows at the enemies.


    "All of them were sent to provide aid to the western border."


    "Are you serious right now!?" I quickly shouted and stopped firing my bow.


    I quickly turned to my side to face the general.


    The general also stopped firing his bow and is now trying to calm me down.


    "Look, my lady. The eastern territory hasn''t seen an invasion for a long time since you were away so the king decided to reinforce the western border instead to defend against the Drowned King."


    I quickly smacked my hands in the embrasure of the battlements in front of me. The tower shook a little bit because of my new tremendous strength.


    All of the soldiers around me stopped firing their bows and crossbows and stared at me.


    "What are you doing? Continue firing!" I said to them and they quickly followed my order.


    My uncle knows how terrifying the phantoms so he is probably not the one who gave that order. It is most likely the prophet.


    How am I going to save the people in the water?


    "Send someone to find fishing vessels that we can borrow to save those soldiers in the water," I said to the general after thinking for a moment.


    "Yes, my lady."


    I can hear the general ordering people and they are now galloping away.


    I hope they can make it in time before the people below got tired of swimming and drowned.


    We tried throwing ropes from the top of the walls to save them but we only managed to save the ones who are close. Most of them are really far away.


    I don''t want to place wooden ladders in the wall since they might be drowned monsters waiting in the water and they might use it to climb up. Most of the soldiers are far away from the wall anyway so the ladders will not be useful.


    Who decided to build this wall anyway? It is only blocking access to the ocean and the nearest port in the kingdom is located in the southeastern border to avoid getting attack by phantoms at sea so it will take time before the fishing ships arrive here.


    This is becoming hopeless.


    Even I save the people who are getting dragged by phantoms, they will still just drop on the ocean. This giant wall surrounding the kingdom that is built to protect us will be the reason for killing my people here.


    A loud shriek suddenly roared in the sky.


    The giant phantom finally makes a move and is now slowly flying downwards.


    I ready my bow and opened my inventory to see what arrows I can use. King Carolus gave me a variety of arrows. I need to find out which one of this I can use to repel that giant monster.


    I decided to use the arrow called ''Explosive Arrow''.


    I nock the arrow on my bow and aim at the giant phantom.


    The giant phantom is still relatively far away but I''m confident I can hit the monster using my ''Extreme Accuracy'' gift.


    After making sure that my aim is correct, I loosed the arrow and watched it fly in the sky.The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    The arrow managed to hit the giant phantom in the head and the arrow quickly exploded.


    The giant phantom stopped flying and is now slowly falling in the ocean. The monster hit the water hard and got dragged deep so quick.


    ''It worked!'' I cheered to myself and everyone around started shouting and celebrating.


    "Don''t celebrate yet! We still have a lot of phantoms to kill!" I shouted at them to make sure they don''t get too overconfident.


    The soldiers started firing arrows back and the favor of the battle is now on our side.


    We managed to kill a couple hundred more phantoms when suddenly the water below started shaking.


    The giant phantom suddenly emerged out of the water near the wall and landed on top of the tower I''m standing.


    I quickly turned around to face the monster.


    The soldiers here quickly ready their melee weapons and charged at the monster. They didn''t get the chance to hit the giant phantom and they are quickly thrown in the water by the monster''s wings.


    It seems the giant phantom''s plan is to gather the people in the water to be picked up by the other phantoms and dragged back to their island.


    I can''t fight this giant monster and save my people at the same time.


    I decided to put away my bow and equipped the diamond dagger in my hand.


    I''m not really an efficient melee fighter but I''m not going down without a fight.


    I was about to charge at the giant phantom when suddenly I can see a green crystal ball flying towards here.


    I remember that one. I believe it is called an ender pearl.


    The ender pearl hits the giant phantom in the face and it quickly breaks into pieces.


    King Carolus suddenly appeared wearing his diamond armor in the place where the ender pearl landed.


    He is now holding a giant diamond hammer in his hands and quickly swing it towards the giant phantom.


    The monster got hit in the face so hard and is now flying back towards the deep ocean.


    I stared at King Carolus while he is slowly walking towards the edge of the tower and stand beside me.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    "What took you so long?" I can hear Rose talking beside me while I''m staring at the water waiting for the giant phantom to appear.


    "Your welcome." I just said to her while wondering what I''m doing with my life.


    I actually ignored the sound of horns that I''ve been hearing in my room and just decided to lie in the bed and sleep.


    I was quickly interrupted by the loud banging in my door and turns out it was Poppy.


    Poppy begged me, pleaded me to help defend the kingdom and save Rose once again.


    I can''t really refuse a sweat and sincere lady who is kindly asking for my help so I quickly run outside the keep and look for my horse.


    I was galloping my way towards the east past the civilian houses when suddenly I can see a lot of phantoms in the sky.


    It seems the people on top of the wall can''t handle the number of phantoms invading.


    I was about to help the people on top of the wall when phantoms started attacking the houses around me.


    I couldn''t really ignore the monsters that were attacking the normal people''s houses so I decided to start killing all of the phantoms with my bow.


    I was suddenly interrupted by an explosion coming from the other side of the wall. There was also cheering and I really don''t know what was happening there.


    I just ignored for now and focused on wiping out the phantoms here.


    I managed to kill all of the phantoms on this side of the wall all by myself.


    I learned that the population of this kingdom was quite big so I wonder why there are only five hundred or so people fighting on top of walls right now? Where are the rest of them?


    My thoughts were suddenly interrupted when I saw a giant phantom on top of a tower.


    I equipped my diamond armor and giant hammer in my hand.


    I threw an ender pearl on the general direction of the giant phantom and managed to teleport in front of the monster and whacked the monster away.


    The giant phantom didn''t emerge in the water for a while so it is safe to assume that I managed to deal huge damage.


    Most of the regular phantoms in the sky suddenly flew downwards towards the people in the water. They started picking them up and are now flying away.


    ''Where are they taking them?'' I asked myself while staring at the soldiers wearing iron armor getting carried towards east.


    Rose started shooting arrows beside me to save the soldiers. I also switch my weapon into a bow and help her kill the phantoms.


    The soldiers we saved still end up in the water but at least they are safe for now.


    I asked Rose if they have ships or something to save them but she just said that they don''t have any right now and she already send someone to borrow some from the fishermen.


    Great. I guess we just have to watch people drown for now.


    I can''t really stomach watching people drown in front of me so I just said to Rose to just continue holding the wall while I save her people. I asked her if I can place ladders on the side of the wall but she quickly protested since they might be other monsters that might climb it and attack this place.


    I just jumped off the tower and landed on the cold water.


    My plan is to craft a ton of boats and threw them in the people who are now struggling to swim.


    I crafted my first boat using the wooden planks in my inventory.


    I quickly placed the boat in front of me and hop on it.


    I crafted more wooden boats, place them in front of me, pick them up then throw them in the distance.


    The soldiers saw the boats hurling in the air and land near them. They quickly ride the boats and is now slowly rowing their way towards the wall.


    Well, you look at that. My plan actually works.


    All of them are finally safe and is now being carried by a rope to the top of the wall.


    I can still hear arrows being fired on top of the wall and towers.


    There are still so many phantoms in the dark sky.


    The giant phantom also decided to show up. The monster suddenly appeared out of the water and is now flying high in the sky.


    I quickly threw an ender pearl to get back on top of the tower.


    The giant monster suddenly shrieks so loud.


    All of the people here covered their ears except for me and Rose.


    Thousands of phantoms decided to ignore us completely and are now flying high past the wall and deeper in the kingdom.


    The soldiers tried to fire arrows at them but they are so far away.


    Damn. I could really use elytra right now to fly.


    We are now helplessly watching thousands of monsters flying towards the castle. They also started to spread out in all directions.


    "No. Poppy." I hear Rose talking beside me.


    She tried to start running towards the stairs when I suddenly stopped her by holding on her shoulder.


    "Let go of me! I need to save my..." Rose screamed at me and she suddenly stopped when she saw an ender pearl in my other hand.


    I threw the ender pearl with all my strength towards the castle and waited for it to land.


    After a moment, I and Rose are now in front of the castle about 15 or so blocks away. I guess I undershot my ender pearl throw.


    It doesn''t matter since we are close anyway.


    I didn''t bother to knock on the door to ask to open the gates and just threw another ender pearl while holding Rose on her hand.


    The ender pearl landed on the battlements in front of the castle and there are now soldiers pointing their weapons at us.


    "All of you better make sure that you killed me otherwise I will have all of you executed." Rose suddenly talked beside me and made everyone shrink back and lower their weapons.


    Okay. Now back to the real problem, how will be able to defend this place with monsters that can fly in the sky?

 Episode 47: Tragedy (2)

    ******* Carolus'' POV *******


    "Let go of my hand already." I can hear Rose talking beside me but I just ignored her and keep on staring at the dark sky.


    There too many of them for Rose and I to handle. We are the only one here that can use a bow powerful enough to reach them.


    Thousands of phantoms circling in the sky probably just waiting for the giant phantom to shriek again. That is probably the giant phantom''s way of giving out orders.


    The giant phantom is not really that big. The monster is only about the size of Queen Arachne but the problem is this one CAN BLOODY FLY. It is really hard to fight an enemy you can barely reach.


    The giant phantom suddenly shrieks after flying for a while.


    Oh, god. What will happen now?


    A lot of regular phantoms started flying straight down towards the houses around us. They are flying down so fast that I''m sure they will not survive the impact.


    The Phantoms went through houses roofs and another wave of phantoms started flying straight down.


    The next wave is different though. They are flying down slow and went through the holes the first wave of phantoms managed to punch through.


    There are now hundreds of citizens being carried in the sky.


    Great. What a crazy world I''m in.


    I can feel Rose pulling her hand out of my grip and preparing her bow to save those people but I quickly stop her.


    "No. They are too high in the sky that the impact on the ground will kill them." I said to Rose.


    "What!? What are we supposed to do? Just watch them get taken?"


    Even with the distance, I can see all of their faces of the people filled with so much fear and hopelessness but my eyes quickly glued on a child.


    I can see the child''s eyes filled with indifference like what is happening right now is inevitable and he already accepted whatever will happen to him.


    I took a few steps back and grabbed a bag of potions in inventory.


    "What are you doing?" Rose asked me.


    "This will not stop until we take care of that giant phantom. I''m going to attack it while you focused on saving those people." I said to her while drinking all the battle potions and other stuff that I think will be useful for aerial battle.


    I then bend my legs and aimed at the general direction of the giant phantom.


    "What are you talking about? How are you supposed to fight a flying..."


    Rose didn''t get the chance to finish her sentence since I jumped so fast and so high in the air.


    The Potions of Leaping VI is really efficient. I haven''t found a use for this potion so this right here is a perfect opportunity.


    I''m heading straight to the giant phantom and it seems it knows my plan.


    The giant phantom quickly maneuvered itself to avoid me but I''m coming in so hot that it didn''t get the chance to evade me.


    I managed to latch on the body of the giant phantom and quickly equipped my spear.


    I thrush my spear on the giant phantom''s chest and the monster shriek so loud.


    After making sure the spear is burry in deep, I threw an ender pearl below and let go of my spear.


    I''m free falling for a moment until I suddenly teleported on the roof of a house.


    I grabbed on the chimney of the house and invoke the Loyalty III enchantment of my spear.


    The force is really great and the chimney was about to get ripped off but it managed to hold on and the giant phantom is now starting to fall in the sky.


    I quickly jumped off on the ground below to avoid getting hit by the giant phantom.


    The giant monster rammed through the house. I hope no one is inside since I didn''t check on it.


    Snow particles started to fill the area and my spear suddenly appeared and it is now flying straight to me.


    I managed to grabbed my spear and put it back in my inventory.


    The giant phantom is now grounded and I want to keep it that way.


    The monster burst through the wreckage and I quickly equipped a bow in my hand.The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement.


    The giant phantom tried to fly but I quickly shot an explosive arrow in its face.


    A loud shriek roared in the air and the snow particles that is obscuring the place is now replaced with smoke.


    After a while, the smoke cleared and the giant phantom still standing while its face is now slowly regenerating.


    Great. Don''t tell me this monster also has the ability to heal itself.


    I decided to use an eye of ender.


    **************


    Name: Giant


    Level: 56 (2 down) 79%


    Race: Legendary Phantom


    Age: 689


    Status: Healthy


    Health:


    ?????????????????????????


    ?????????????????????


    Abilities:


    Phantom Strenght Level 6 (0 up) 41%


    Phantom Speed Level 2 (0 up) 68%


    Heat Resistance Level 10 (Max)


    Cold Resistance Level 10 (Max)


    Poison Resistance Level 10 (Max)


    Ender Dragon''s Gifts:


    Undead Body - cannot age no matter how much time passed.


    Phantom Supreme Leader - can command thousands to tens of thousands of phantoms by his will.


    Daywalker - can walk in the heat of the sunlight.


    Nightwalker - can see in the dark.


    Regeneration - gradually heal itself over time.


    Hunger - Phantom Strenght and Speed level will increase for every being eaten. Speed Level is a third time slower to gain experience from Phantom Strenght. The experience gain for both also varies depending on what type of being is eaten.


    **************


    Interesting. This giant phantom has the same abilities and gifts of the giant zombie as far as I can remember since I was interrupted reading the status window of the giant zombie at the time.


    I also noticed that his level is decreasing. What is going on? Is his level is being used for his healing?


    Damn. It is bad enough that this monster has 50 hearts but he also has 50 or so levels to use to heal itself.


    The giant phantom though has the lowest level I encountered so far. All of the legendary I met and used an eye of ender on has at least over a hundred level. I wonder why this guy is low-leveled.


    I just leave the status window of the giant phantom open to keep track of his health and then prepared for battle.


    ******* Rose''s POV ********


    The battle between the giant phantom and King Carolus is really intense. Most of the houses around them are now destroyed and they still keep on going. The people on those houses are now on the streets running towards the castle.


    I ignored them for now and decided to think about how to save my people.


    There is too many of them in the sky.


    I could use the same tactics that we used to save the soldiers but they are not trained to swim in a cold ocean so they probably freeze to death.


    What to do?


    "Send half of the garrison of the castle outside right now," I ordered to the soldiers who are near me.


    "My lady. The castle only has 500 soldiers defending it. It will be heavily undermanned if we send out half of them." I can hear one of the soldiers talking to me.


    "What? Are you telling me that there are only one thousand soldiers defending the eastern territory?" I faced the soldier and said to him.


    I can see the soldier having a difficult time staring at me.


    He didn''t answer for a moment and I was about to lose my patience.


    "Well, my lady. Most of our soldiers were sent to the southern border." The soldier finally said to me.


    "Why would they be sent there?"


    "To defend the kingdom from the army of Xaerin."


    What? The Kingdom of Xaerin started invading again? The Kingdom of Aezeokar already have enough problems with phantoms and drowned monsters and the Xaerin Kingdom decided to add to those problems.


    I''m so frustrated that kicked the merlon in front of me. The stones broke off the wall and are now flying in the distance.


    I didn''t expect that to happen. It seems I haven''t mastered my new found strength. I have to be careful.


    Everyone around me started to distance from me but I just ignored them.


    We have a much more pressing matter to focus on.


    More and more people are now getting carried away towards the east. The Phantoms are probably taking them back to their island.


    After calming myself down, I quickly formulated a plan.


    I can''t really think of a solution for the people who are already carried away so I just have to focused on saving the others who are still in their houses.


    "Open the gates. Evacuate the people and send them into the castle." I quickly ordered and the soldiers around me bowed and started running.


    The entire fleet of the eastern territory and most of its soldiers are on the other sides of the kingdom so this is the best plan I could come up with.


    We just have to hold out and wait till the sun goes up.


    I closed my eyes and started praying.


    ''Goddess, please help those people who are being carried away. I promise I will save them as long you help them survive in whatever hell they will be facing.''


    ******* Prince Raimer''s POV *******


    The night is still young and the whisper of sorrow can still be heard in the air.


    I''m sitting in the meeting room right now together with all of the nobles and generals who are loyal to me.


    "Prince Raimer. I don''t think inciting a rebellion right now is a good idea. The kingdom is already low on resources and the spoils of war is the only thing that is keeping it alive."


    The words of the man who is talking right now are true.


    The Kingdom of Xaerin is on a brink of destruction but we still have to push on.


    "The only way to end the war that the Xaerin Kingdom started is to cut off the person who planned it," I said after a moment and everyone around me stare at confusion.


    "What are you talking about, your highness?"


    I didn''t answer the person''s question and just started thinking deeply.


    Even we managed to get rid of my father, the amount of pain that we inflicted to the other kingdoms will still be fresh so it will not be easy to find peace.


    The meeting goes on for a while until midnight.


    After the meeting, I was about to get back to my room when I suddenly stopped by the head priest.


    After receiving the gifts of the Goddess, I decided to restore back the church and have the daily preaching return.


    This is my way of paying back to the Goddess but I know this is not enough.


    The Xaerin Kingdom didn''t have any troubles regarding monsters but this is not the same as the other kingdoms. They are suffering from the constant attacks of the vicious beings and they are also suffering from hunger since the Xaerin Kingdom cut off the trade of food.


    The kingdom of Xaerin is located in a flat plane with a warm climate. There are thousands upon thousands of farmlands here and the food is the kingdom''s primary resource.


    We have to sue for peace quickly and have the food distributed again. We also need to provide aid to their troubles regarding monsters.


    "Prince Raimer. I''m sorry for stopping you even though it is already late." The head priest quickly said to me while bowing his head.


    "No. It is nothing. Raise your head. What is it?"


    "Your Highness. I''m happy that you allow the priests and the people to worship the Goddess once again but is this fate really worth rebelling for?"


    I slowly approach the head priest and put my hands on his shoulders.


    "Trust me. This is not only for you, the people here or even me. This is for everybody in this world." I said to him with a smile on my face.


    The head priest eyes are full of admiration and I quickly asked him to rest.


    Tonight will be peaceful but tomorrow and onwards will be different. War will be coming in the capital and I will be the one leading it.

 Episode 48: Tragedy (3)

    ******* Prince Raimer''s POV ********


    "I got to say. I didn''t think you had it in you, Prince Raimer." said the general who I assigned to charge of my army.


    It is still early in the morning and the sun is not even risen in the sky.


    "I''m just doing what needed to be done." I just replied while staring at my army who is assembled outside the castle while I''m on top of a tower.


    "You sure about that? This has nothing to do with your mother or your right eye?"


    I didn''t answer him back and just remain silent.


    My father exiled my mother for crimes she didn''t commit just to exercise his power over the kingdom while I just stood by and done nothing.


    This time will be different.


    I only have about five hundred soldiers to field into battle but I know more people will support my cause.


    "Make sure everything is ready. I will be heading back to the keep." I said to my general while started walking.


    "Yes, your highness."


    All of the people here don''t know what happened in the church when the Goddess granted me gifts. I didn''t tell anyone about it even my family. This is a duty I have to carry on myself and I don''t want anyone to do it for me.


    As I walk inside the keep, I was greeted with my wife who is now wearing her most beautiful outfit and my ten-year-old son beside her.


    "What are you doing standing and walking around. You are still sick." I quickly said to my wife who just smile from my words.


    "I got tired of lying in bed and letting others take care of me and besides, I have a duty to send off my husband."


    I smiled back at her as I walk towards her.


    She suddenly hugs me tight and I just hug her back.


    "I don''t have a lot of time left in this world, Prince Raimer. I know it. I can feel it." She whispered to my ear to make sure that our son will not hear her.


    "Don''t say that, Princess Felicia. I know the Goddess will not forsake you. Just pray and believe." I whispered back in her ear.


    She let go of me and took a step back. Then she started laughing.


    "It is quite funny. What kind of man who didn''t believe in the Goddess since birth turn into a believer overnight?" She said to me and everyone around us, the guards and hand-maidens quickly stared at me.


    "The kind of which who witnessed a miracle," I said to her while turning my gaze to my son.


    "So, my son. Would you mind taking care of things around here while I''m away?" I said to him.


    "Of course, father. I won''t let you down." He replied.


    "I know you won''t."


    I kissed my wife and rubbed my son''s head before riding my horse and leave the castle.


    I can see my wolf who I tamed when I was younger waiting for me in the field. I decided to bring him with me into battle.


    There is no turning back now once I march my army west.


    I just hope my father will yield the throne so they will be fewer blood spills on the ground but I know it is just a foolish thought.


    "Prince Raimer. We are waiting for your orders." said the general beside me.


    "March," I said back to him and he quickly shouted to the entire army to start moving.


    ******* Carolus'' POV ********


    The sun is already up but this giant monster is still alive.


    All of the regulars phantoms already left or probably dead. I can''t see any dead bodies around since all the bodies were incinerated by the sun. Almost forgot that these creatures are undead.


    It is just me, him and all of the soldiers around us.


    I already run of explosive arrows to keep the giant phantom grounded so I''m just relying on whacking him to the ground with a giant hammer.


    **************


    Level: 0 (58 down) 79%


    Health:


    ???


    **************


    He used up all of his levels and only has about three hearts left.


    It is about time to end this.A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    The giant phantom shrieks so loud once again and started charging at me.


    Sorry, buddy. All of your minions already fly off back to wherever they came from. You are all alone now.


    I ready my sword and waited for an opening.


    The giant phantom opened his giant mouth and tried to eat me.


    I just leaped above to avoid him and rammed my sword into his head.


    The giant phantom struggled for a moment but after a while, he falls down on the ground and stopped moving.


    The giant phantom''s status window that I kept open on my side of view suddenly disappeared.


    I pulled my sword out his head and put it back in my inventory.


    The giant phantom is finally dead.


    I jumped off of the dead body and landed on the ground.


    I started observing the surroundings and I was shocked to see the amount of destruction caused by the battle.


    There are a lot of houses in pieces and a portion of the wall is destroyed by my "accidental" shooting of explosive arrow since I tripped while preparing to fire at that time. It was really hard to fire a bow while evading a giant enemy.


    Luckily, no one got hurt by the explosion but there is now a huge opening on the wall that the enemies can use to get through.


    I should help fix that wall quick but I''m really tired right now and I want to sleep.


    I was about to start walking towards the castle when I noticed something came out of the water and is now flying towards me.


    Is that a trident?


    It coming towards me so fast and I quickly equipped my shield.


    I managed to block the trident in time and it is now on the ground in front of me.


    I picked it up and started observing it.


    It is a normal size trident. It is also enchanted and really well-built.


    Who threw this? Is there a drowned monster in the water?


    The weapon suddenly glowed and I can feel that something is pulling it.


    This trident probably has a Loyalty enchantment.


    I equipped my sword in my right hand while holding tight on the trident with my left hand.


    I bury the sword on the ground and started resisting whoever owns this trident.


    ''If he wants this back, he can rip it out of my hand.'' I said to myself while staring at the water waiting for something to come out.


    The tug of war lasted for a while.


    The force suddenly disappeared and I can''t still see anything on the water.


    What just happened? Did he gave up and leave?


    Ah! I no longer care. I just want to sleep.


    I tried putting the trident in my inventory but failed. This is my first time failing to store an item in my inventory. What is happening here? Is there an enchantment or curse that is preventing me to store this?


    I can''t see the enchantments of the Trident if it is not in my inventory so I tried using an eye of ender to it.


    Nothing happened. The eye of ender is still intact.


    Damn. Well, I just have to break it to make sure the owner can no longer use it.


    I hold the trident with both of my hands and use my leg to break it into two. It took quite a lot of strength but I managed to destroy it.


    Now, nobody has a trident.


    I threw the pieces of the trident beside the dead body of the giant phantom and started walking towards the castle.


    A soldier walking while holding a rein of a horse suddenly approached me.


    "Your horse, your majesty." said the soldier while bowing to me and handing the rein.


    Okay. Thank you for that.


    I didn''t say anything back and just took the rein from his hand and mount my horse.


    I am now galloping towards the castle.


    ******** Arthur''s POV ********


    I am now middle of this swamp staring at the burnt house in front of me.


    After the battle with the exploding monster, I quickly turned my attention with the white-robed woman. I have no idea who is she and why she saved me but I''m pretty sure she is not a human.


    The white-robed woman suddenly runs off without saying anything and I didn''t chase her since I''m really tired.


    I don''t know what just happen then and I decided to run back with my guards that is now guarding the villagers in a temporary camp.


    I quickly sort through the people here to see if all of the villagers are safe. Thankfully, none of the civilians got hurt with the invasion but there are still quite a lot of soldiers died in the battle.


    After all of that, I decided to rest for the remaining night.


    The next morning, I ordered my guards to help repair and guard the village and I decided to travel alone. They will only be a hindrance with my mission so it is better if I only do it myself.


    Lots of soldiers died during that invasion but I can''t really stay to mourn for them since I still have someone to save.


    It didn''t take long for me to reach this place since King Carolus gave me a map of the swamp. I don''t really know who made this map but it is pretty useful to use to navigate this place and I managed to get to my destination.


    I''m probably late though.


    The house is burnt to the ground. There is nothing but charcoal and stone pillars here.


    I dismounted on my horse and started walking towards the house.


    I also started investigating the surroundings.


    There was no battle happened here or anything. There were also no corpses.


    There were tracks though indicating someone is traveling on foot towards the southeast.


    The tracks are not fresh and already faded for a bit so it is probably about a few days or maybe more.


    Sisilla should still be alive and I have to find her.


    I don''t know who Sisilla is and what her relationship with King Carolus but he wants her safe so that is what I''m about to do.


    I quickly mounted my horse and started preparing to travel again.


    I noticed another strange thing. No slimes approached this area which is weird. I decided to ignore it and kicked my horse to start traveling.


    ******* Sisilla''s POV *******


    Ah! The pain in my body is still throbbing but I sort of like it.


    I still have four hearts left after the battle.


    I didn''t manage to win against the Skeleton King but I''m pretty sure I''m managed to half is health so it will take a while for him to heal.


    I decided to fall back and start traveling south to find another target.


    There are two options here. There are zombies and giant spiders in this forest. Which one I''m going to chose?


    The white skeletons is still a problem since there are still thousands of them along with their leader but I''m pretty sure I did quite a lot of damage to them so Carolus can swiftly finish them off.


    The rays of the sun that are touching my skin are wonderful and I''m having fun traveling.


    I was quickly interrupted when I noticed something in the distance.


    I halted my horse and began observing from afar.


    A building made out of stones. A castle maybe? I''m not really sure but I do know that they are monsters manning the ramparts and towers.


    I''m also pretty sure those are pigmen and wither skeletons.


    What are they doing here in the overworld? Is there a portal here or something?


    I smiled very wide and started building a temporary house to put the horse and cat in.


    I can''t really use health potion or potion of regeneration right now since I already used them with the battle with Skeleton King and the next set of potions will just turn into poison if I drink them. However, I can use battle potions so they will be very useful.


    I also have a little bit of strength left in me so this will be a piece of cake.


    After equipping my armor and making sure that I''m ready, I then started walking towards the castle.


    ''This will be another wonderful day." I said to myself while starting to pick up the pace.

 Episode 49: Tragedy (4)

    ******** Legendary Creeper''s POV ********


    The preparation is almost complete.


    The invasion against the overworld will soon commence.


    Thousands of pigmen and wither skeletons along with my hundreds of followers are waiting in the giant portal in the nether that is also waiting to be ignited and open.


    With the amount of force that we have, humans won''t be able to stop us. They will all soon perish.


    With the combined armies of pigmen, wither skeletons and my own followers, the creepers, we will scorch the overworld.


    I''m in the basement of the castle right now, planning to head back to the nether.


    I''m suddenly interrupted with noises outside.


    What is happening? Are the pigmen and wither skeletons started bickering and fighting again? I guess I need to stop them once again.


    I started walking outside the keep and was surprised by what I''m seeing.


    There are dead pigmen and pieces of wither skeletons scattered on the ground and more of them are flying out of the top of walls and towers.


    What is going on? It seems there are people attacking this place. I need to stop them.


    I jumped on top of the west wall of the castle to see there were no people who are attacking this place but only noticed one person.


    "What this? You look like a human but you are not, are you?" said the woman wearing a diamond armor while crushing the head of wither skeleton using her hands.


    I didn''t answer her question and just increase my guard while staring at her.


    She doesn''t look like your average human and my instinct is telling me that she is a formidable fighter.


    She kicked the dead bodies in front of her away and started walking towards me.


    She then stops about ten blocks away from me and she started laughing.


    What is there to laugh about?


    "A quiet one, I see. I know another person just like you." said the woman.


    The woman suddenly leaps forward and she is really fast that I didn''t have time to react.


    She punches me with her right hand and I was flying straight to the southern wall.


    I hit the southern wall really hard but the wall is really well-made so it managed to withstand the blow then I hit the ground.


    I quickly get back on my feet to see that the woman is now in front of me.


    Not only she is strong but she is also really fast.


    "Well, you look at that. You are still alive. You are not an ordinary monster, I see." the woman said while holding an item in her hand.


    What is that item? It looks like a crystal ball but with a blazing eye inside of it.


    She pointed the item at me then it suddenly breaks into pieces.


    She started laughing again. What is wrong with her?


    "Legendary Monster. My luck didn''t turn me down. Just so happens I''m looking for one." the woman said while still laughing like a lunatic.


    Arrows and bolts started firing in the walls and towers towards here. Looks like the pigmen and wither skeletons decided to attack.


    Some of the projectiles managed to hit me but I didn''t mind since I''ll just regenerate in a moment but the woman is just standing still letting the arrows and bolts hit her.


    Nothing happened to the woman. She is unharmed.


    Her armor is probably enchanted with the highest level enchantments. I guess I have to kill her myself.


    I concentrated on my hands and charge at her.


    I grab her on the neck and she didn''t bother to evade or counter-attack.


    My hands exploded and smoke filled the area.


    I was about to calm myself down thinking that the woman is finally dead when suddenly I can feel something hitting me in the chest.


    I''m suddenly pinned in the wall and I have no hands to shove away whatever is pinning me.


    "Interesting. So this is your ability. It reminds me of a giant white monster that can fly that I fought a long time ago. I believe he is called a Legendary Ghast. Too bad he is dead now." said the woman while putting more strength in her hands.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    The smoke is now slowly fading away.


    This woman is starting to piss me off.


    My hands took a while to regenerate so I just focused on growing back my right hand.


    My right hand is now back and I quickly concentrated at it while holding on to her.


    The woman quickly picks me up and turn around.


    She then punches me before my right hand exploded.


    I''m flying over the small pond and towards the barn.


    I smack through the empty wooden barn and then hit the keep with my back. My face is now on the ground.


    I didn''t even manage to stand fully on my feet when suddenly the woman appeared in front of me again and raised her fist to punch me.


    I managed to block her attack this time with both of my hands.


    I went through the wall of the stone keep and rolled on the floor inside.


    ***************


    Level: 32 (3 down) 1%


    Health:


    ?????????????????????????


    ???????????????


    ***************


    This is not good. I''m receiving more damage than I can heal. I also don''t have plenty of levels to spend on healing.


    I don''t know what she is or why she is too strong but I don''t want to run away. My ''Hatred'' gift is telling me that she is human and I want her dead.


    ''Fall back for now.''


    A whisper suddenly brushed my ears.


    My thoughts suddenly cleared up.


    The Ender Dragon is right. I can''t win this battle with the way my enemy fights. I have to return to the nether for now.


    I quickly kneeled on the floor.


    I put my right hand on the floor then concentrated.


    "Hmm. What are you doing?" the woman said to me and she is now slowly walking through the hole in the wall.


    I just ignored her and my right hand exploded.


    There a giant hole in the floor right now and I''m falling towards the basement.


    The portal room is right beneath me so this is the quickest way.


    I was about to run towards the portal with suddenly I got hit with a bottle of some kind on my back.


    A liquid spread through my body and my movements become slower.


    What was that? My body feels so heavy and I''m having trouble walking.


    "Ah. Ah. Ah. No running away."


    The woman hopped from the first floor into the basement and she is now slowly walking towards me.


    What to do? The portal is really close and is right behind me.


    I concentrated on my legs and my right hand.


    Another bottle hits me but this time my body is starting to feel so much pain.


    I endured the pain for now and waited for my legs to explode.


    A great explosion occurred and I''m now flying towards the portal leaving the woman behind me.


    After passing through the portal, I also exploded my right hand to close the portal.


    Luckily, I rebuilt the portal on the nether side so the woman can''t reignite it and follow me here. I guess my idea of securing the portal came in handy.


    After regenerating my legs, I quickly stand on my feet staring at the closed portal.


    Who was that woman? It doesn''t matter. Even is she build a portal on the other side and chase me here, I will be long gone.


    I remembered that there are a hundred pigmen and a hundred wither skeletons left in the castle though I don''t know how many are still left alive. They are stuck there now.


    They can''t defeat that woman even if they tried.


    ''Their sacrifices will be remembered.'' I said to myself while starting to walk away from the portal.


    ******** Rose''s POV ********


    The meeting room is gloomy and I can totally understand the people here.


    I immediately called a meeting while King Carolus is resting in his room.


    "Do we have a final tally of the missing people?" I asked the people here.


    "No, my lady but we have a rough estimate of the number of people that got taken." answered the man who is sitting on the right side of the table.


    "How many?"


    "Six hundred to seven hundred, my lady."


    I quickly close my eyes and began praying.


    How am I going to save those people? I don''t even know if they are still alive.


    No. They are alive and I will save them.


    "News from the capital about our reinforcements?" I just asked while opening my eyes.


    "Nothing, my lady. Our messenger still isn''t back."


    What is going on with this kingdom? My uncle will never ignore my messages so something else is happening here.


    "Send another messenger. Tell the king that if he won''t send my armies and my fleet back, the entire eastern territory will revolt against the throne."


    All of the people in the room suddenly gasp and stare at me.


    I just ignored all of them. There is no time to waste here and I need my ships back to save my people.


    "Uhm. Sister. I don''t think sending a strong message to the king is a great idea. We should stay calm for now." Poppy said to me on the left side of the table.


    "No. The longer we wait, the less chance to save our people." I replied.


    The door of the room suddenly opened and a soldier steps in.


    It is the messenger I sent to the capital.


    "Pardon for the interruption. I have returned, my lady." said the soldier while bowing.


    "Speak. Are our reinforcements arrive from the capital?" I said to him.


    "No, my lady but I brought people with me that is entrust to give you orders from the king."


    "What orders?"


    Before the messenger can answer my question, three people walked inside the room. Two of them are soldiers and the other one is a priest.


    "It is a great honor to finally meet you, Lady Rose." the priest said to me while bowing.


    "Cut the pleasantries and just tell me why does the king didn''t send any reinforcements here instead he send a priest."


    "Well, the king heard the news that your mission was successful and he wants to meet the ''Lost Hero'' immediately."


    I smacked both my hands on the table making the entire room shake.


    The silence began to fill the room while I stand on my chair and started walking towards the priest.


    I equipped a dagger on my hand and grab the priest''s robe. I then pointed my dagger on his throat.


    My guards also pointed their weapons to the other two soldiers that came with the priest.


    The priest is still calm and I can''t see any emotions in his eyes.


    "More than six hundred of my people just got taken by phantoms and you are telling me that it is more important to have the ''Lost Hero'' travel to the capital," I said to him while staring close at his eyes.


    "It is the order of the king. I have the letter with me to prove it." said the priest while holding a paper in his hand.


    I just ignored him and press my dagger on his throat deeper.


    "Rose! Stop!"


    I can hear someone screamed behind me. It is Poppy.


    I loosened the dagger on the priest''s throat and there is a little bit of blood flowing out on his neck.


    "You can''t ignore the orders of the king, Rose. Look. I will find a way to save our people while you go to the capital." said Poppy.


    I''m still holding the robe of the priest while I''m starting to think what just Poppy said.


    After thinking for a while, I just let go of the priest''s robe and grabbed the letter on his hands.


    I opened the letter and was shocked to know that it is the handwriting of my uncle.


    I read the letter for a moment then threw it on the table for others to see it.


    I see. Fine. I''ll just have to travel to the capital and demand my armies and ships back personally.


    I don''t know what is going here and what happened to this kingdom while I was away but if I want to find answers, I guess I have to go to the capital.

 Episode 50: Tragedy (5)

    ******** Carolus'' POV ********


    I''m sleeping comfortably in my bed when I was woken up with a loud banging on my door.


    God! I already told the flower sisters that I needed to rest.


    I look at my inventory to see the clock. It is somewhere one or two o''clock in the afternoon.


    I only managed to sleep for about six to seven hours. I guess that is a good thing considering how cruel this world is.


    I quickly changed my clothing to royalty-ish then opened the door.


    There is a man wearing a purple robe standing in front of me. I remember that type of clothing in the game. It is what a priest villager wear.


    The priest quickly bowed to me.


    "I apologize for disturbing your rest, your majesty." said the priest.


    I didn''t bother to say anything back to him and just turn around and sit on the chair.


    "Sit. What do you want?" I said to him to quickly get to the point since I want to go back to bed and rest.


    "Thank you, your majesty."


    The priest quickly walked inside the room, close the door and grab a chair to sit.


    "First, let me introduce myself. My name is Hektor and I''m one of the closest aides of the Prophet."


    Okay. That is interesting.


    I just remained silent while letting Hektor talk.


    "I am tasked to tell you that you are forgiven for your sins of abandoning mankind and to urge you to finally face the destiny that the Goddess has given to you."


    Great. Here we go again with the saving the world fiasco and why on earth is this guy talking about destiny? I don''t even know why I am here in this world.


    I just let the man talk and talk while his words come in my left ear and go out on the other side. All the things this guy is talking don''t make sense or I don''t really care so I just let him bark his way.


    After a while, I''m starting to get bored listening to this guy and was about to order him to get out when suddenly he says words that make me want to punch him.


    "That is why your majesty. We need to move right away to the capital so you can meet with the Prophet."


    His head is fragile-looking that I only need to use a little bit of my strength to crush it.


    I quickly calmed myself down.


    I really want to get back to my own world as soon as possible so this right here is a great opportunity.


    I quickly send Hektor outside to prepare myself for the travel when suddenly another person is knocking on my door.


    Who is it now?


    I opened the door to see that it is Poppy. She tried to bow to me but I quickly stop her and ushered her inside the room and sit her on the chair.


    This is the only person on this side of the world that I can talk to comfortably.


    "How can I help you, Lady Poppy?" I said her while eating a carrot since I started to get hungry.


    I offered food and beverage to her but she just kindly refused.


    "Poppy is fine, your majesty. It seems the priest already told you about the king''s invitation."


    Invitation? It is more like a demand to me.


    "Also, I need to talk about my sister, Rose." Poppy continued.


    Okay. This is a conversation I didn''t expect to come up.


    "She probably gave you a hard time but I just want you to know that she didn''t mean it. She had... uhm... a rough road in life and just maintain a brave image. I hope you can understand her." Poppy said.


    I didn''t say anything back and nodded my head.


    "Rose became responsible with so many people lives as such a young age when our mother passed away. She was only 16 at that time." Poppy continued and I just listen to her.


    Damn. I know vaguely the tragic story of Rose''s father but I didn''t know that her mother is also dead. She also apparently inherited the title and position in the eastern territory that she quickly adapted and reform the place.


    Rose tried to strengthen the eastern territory by building battleships and recruiting more soldiers. I guess you could say she really cares about her people''s safety though I wonder where are those said ships and army since I didn''t see any of them and the castle and wall are barely manned by soldiers.Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    Well, those are not my problems and Rose is back now so she can handle it herself.


    After Poppy talking stories about her sister, Rose, she was about to leave when suddenly she stops and stare at me.


    "I almost forgot. There is something I need to ask of you, King Carolus." Poppy said after a moment.


    "What is it?"


    "Rose is love in the eastern territory but she is hated in the capital and other places in the kingdom. They are jealous of her successes and wants to get rid of her. I hope you understand what I''m saying."


    I don''t understand what she is saying. Why would they hate Rose? She is quite snarky and rude but she is reliable and strong. I guess politics also exist in this world and is just as complicated.


    I just nodded my head to Poppy and then she left the room.


    Poppy said that Rose and the priest are preparing for the journey to the capital so I also made preparations of my own.


    It didn''t take long for me to get ready to travel and I quickly head outside to breathe some fresh air.


    I was quickly greeted by gloomy people and so much destruction.


    I''m walking outside the castle and decided to travel around on foot.


    It is so bloody cold but I just endured it.


    Houses are being rebuilt and soldiers are patrolling the areas.


    The sun is already down and it is nighttime so I don''t really think traveling right now is a good idea. I should suggest traveling tomorrow morning.


    "You are awake."


    I have suddenly greeted a voice behind me.


    ******* Rose''s POV ********


    "You are awake," I said to King Carolus while riding my horse.


    I was giving orders to the people here before handing the matters to my sister, Poppy.


    I made sure to rebuilt every house that was destroyed from the recent invasion and assured the remaining people here that I will definitely save their families from the phantoms. I just need to travel to the capital first to talk with the king.


    There is also about the hole in the wall. I don''t really want to fix that damn wall since it is nothing but problems to the eastern territory but when I heard the news about a powerful drowned attacking King Carolus, I decided to order to fix it since it is useful to repelling drowned attacks.


    "I was woken up." King Carolus replied while didn''t bother to turn around and face me.


    I dismounted my horse and give the reins to my guard.


    I then walked and stand beside him.


    He was looking at the destruction and people faces.


    I don''t know what he is thinking right now but I do know that he recently defeated a giant phantom that plague this world for centuries.


    If King Carolus can defeat those kinds of monsters alone, why did he decide to just hide? Did something happen to him in the past that made him turn his back on this world?


    Now I think about it, I don''t know anything about him. He is a quiet person and so mysterious. I guess will find out once we meet with the Prophet.


    "You need to prepare for our travel to the capital. We will start traveling shortly." I said to him.


    "I already finish preparing but it seems we can''t travel tonight." King Carolus said while staring at the sky.


    "What are you talking about?" I said to him while also staring at the sky.


    It didn''t take a while for me notice something.


    The sun is already down and I can see the stars in the sky.


    I can also see hundreds of phantoms flying.


    "Rose. I have a question for you. What happens when you kill the leader of the monsters?" King Carolus casually asked me.


    What? The leader of monsters?


    Realization quickly came to me.


    King Carolus just killed the leader of the phantoms. There will no one leading the Phantoms now.


    I quickly turned around and face my guards.


    "Sound the horns and prepare an evacuation!" I quickly ordered them and they quickly followed my orders.


    After a moment, the sound of horns is now roaring in the air and people are frantically running towards the castle.


    I equipped my bow in my hand and prepare for battle.


    King Carolus also equipped a bow on his hand.


    I haven''t sleep yet since the last invasion and I never thought that I will be fighting monsters once again.


    ******** Arthur''s POV ********


    Night has already come but we yet to finish cleaning the castle of King Carolus.


    Lamps are already lit all around the walls and towers and the keep is light up with glowstones.


    I managed to track down Sisilla and meet her here. I pushed my horse so hard and said to myself that I can''t face King Carolus if ever I failed on protecting her but this woman doesn''t need my protection. She is as powerful as King Carolus.


    I was shocked to see that the castle is taken over by monsters that I don''t know.


    I saw someone fighting on the walls and decided to help whoever it was. Turns out it is Sisilla. The woman who I was looking for.


    I quickly helped Sisilla kill all of them and after a while, bodies of walking pigs and black skeletons lay all over the castle.


    "Done. That was easy. It has been a while since I''ve place blocks."


    I can hear Sisilla voice coming from the side of the keep.


    I quickly walk towards her and see that the wall of the keep is indeed fixed but it is not the same as I could remember.


    I look at Sisilla and she also looks at me.


    "What? I''m not a builder. Carolus can just fix this once he returns from his travels." said Sisilla.


    King Carolus will not be happy once he found out about the destruction of his beautiful castle. The walls are still intact though and the keep is still standing so I guess we still have good news to tell King Carolus.


    I decided to ignore Sisilla and continue picking up dead bodies and tossing them on a giant hole I made outside the wall.


    Sisilla also helped with the cleaning of the dead bodies and we are having a conversation while doing it. Even though we just recently met, I can feel a certain connection to her that makes me comfortable and quickly trust her.


    "So, you are not the King of Astikuviel?" asked Sisilla while carrying a monster that she called pigman.


    "No. Why would think of that?" I replied to her while also carrying pieces of the black skeleton that is called wither skeleton.


    "Well, you said that you have the gifts of the Goddess so I figured you are one of the next generations of heroes."


    "What? Next generation of heroes? What are you talking about?" I asked a series of questions while I stop walking.


    Sisilla also stops walking and stares at me.


    She then started laughing. This is one of the things that I have to endure from her.


    "Hahaha. Did you really think the Goddess will just pick random people to grant gifts to save this world?"


    I didn''t answer her question and just remained silent.


    I don''t know what to say to her. I don''t even know what she is talking about.


    "I''m not a king and don''t have a lineage to the throne. I am the Lord and protector of the western territory of Astikuviel." I said to her after thinking for a moment.


    "Sorry to disappoint you, pretty boy, but believe it or not you have the blood of a king flowing in your body."


    I decided to just ignore Sisilla and return back to getting rid of the bodies.


    The Kingdom of Astikuviel already has a ruler. A queen that I''m loyal to. I''m not going to dispute that fact just because the Goddess finally answered my prayers.


    "We have to finish this quick so I can start building a portal." Sisilla suddenly talks while we throw bodies on the hole.


    "Why?"


    "I can feel something weird is happening on the nether."


    I stared at Sisilla for a moment then started walking back towards the castle.

 Episode 51: The Capital of Aezeokar (1)

    ******* Queen Thea''s POV ********


    "Is the northern border still holding up against the phantoms?" I asked everyone in the meeting room.


    "Yes, my queen." answered the great general of my kingdom.


    These past few days the phantoms just started attacking the kingdom for no reason. I tried asking King Carolus about this, turns out he killed the leader of the flying monsters so it makes sense the way they behave now.


    Even with the successful defense against the uncoordinated invasion of phantoms, I''m still worried about the other information King Carolus has been sending me. Information about monsters that live in another dimension.


    Pigmen and wither skeletons, King Carolus name them. I don''t know what to do with this information considering the Kingdom of Astikuviel already have enough problems with skeletons, giant spiders, zombies, slimes and pirates. There are also new monsters who adds to the problems, the phantoms.


    I quickly dismissed the meeting after hearing about my people''s reports.


    I head down to the deepest part of the castle in the underground.


    I went through 2 floors with guards at each door and stairs.


    I''m standing in front of the most secure place in this castle. More secure than my personal room or the treasury.


    The room where I put the ender chest King Carolus gave me.


    "My queen." Two guards said to me while kneeling on the floor.


    "Open the door," I said to them.


    They quickly rose to their feet and open the door.


    I can see in the middle of the lit room the ender chest.


    I step inside and the door behind me closes.


    I opened the chest to see any updates to King Carolus or Sisilla.


    Apparently, there is another person who has access to this magical chest aside me and King Carolus. Her name is Sisilla.


    Sisilla is an unknown character to me but Arthur is with her and both of them are in a place called ''Nether''. The place of fire and lava as Arthur once told me.


    Sisilla and Arthur are apparently chasing something and Sisilla is really annoying about the details that I''m about the send someone to chase after them to stop whatever they are doing but managed to stop myself.


    No new letters. I guess King Carolus is finally on the capital of Aezeokar and Sisilla and Arthur are doing whatever they are planning to do.


    I closed the ender chest and left the room.


    If what they are saying is true, there is a coming invasion and I need to fortify once again the borders of the kingdom.


    ********* Arthur''s POV ********


    Another enderman disappeared in front of me but I know where this monster will appear.


    I quickly turned around and thrust my spear forward.


    My spear went through the chest of the enderman who just teleported behind me and he quickly died.


    "How many times do I have to tell you, my boy? Not in the chest. There is no point in hunting endermen if you destroy their ender pearls." said Sisilla beside me and I''m starting to lose my patience.


    We have been traveling in this desolate dimension of fire and lava for about a few days and I''m not really sure about the exact time since there is no way to track time here.


    "What are we doing, Sisilla? Why are hunting endermen instead of stopping a giant army of monsters?" I asked Sisilla while pulling my spear out and tossing the dead body.


    "Hey. If you want to attack thousands of monsters all by yourself, I will not stop you."


    I didn''t respond to her and just keep on staring.


    "Look. We know absolutely nothing about their plans. We need to be careful about this and just maintain a safe distance for now." Sisilla said.


    I''m really annoyed by her since she is not wearing any armor right now while I''m fully geared up to protect myself from monsters and the intense heat of this place.


    "There is also too many of them. Way too many for us to handle even with our gifts. Believe me, Arthur, this is the best thing we can do right now. Collect resources for the future battle." Sisilla said to me.


    I''m starting to worry right now since I didn''t think this woman who laughs a lot for no reason is starting to make sense.The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    I decided to trust Sisilla for now and continued hunting ghasts, endermen and blazes.


    ******* Carolus'' POV *********


    So this is the capital city of Aezeokar.


    It is really big. Way bigger than the eastern territory and way crowded.


    We managed to reach this place in less than a day.


    We quickly traveled from the eastern territory after making sure the border can handle the phantoms attacks on their own.


    The phantoms were relatively easy to dispatch since there was no coordination and just a head-on assault.


    It took a couple of days to sort the situation but Rose and I managed to take care of it and we are now slowly traveling inside the walls of the capital city and into the great citadel of Aezeokar.


    This ginormous stone structure is the biggest thing I have ever seen in this world so far. Why on earth would they spend so much resources building this place when it is already enough to have strong walls and trained soldiers to defend the people?


    Well, it is not my place to judge them so I decided to ignore it for now.


    The giant gate of the citadel opens wide in front of us. The gate is made out of iron and makes me wonder once again where this kingdom gets its tons of supply of iron.


    The people in front of me and Rose dismounted in their horses so I also dismounted in mine.


    I step inside the citadel and greeted with people who are wearing a priest robe and soldiers equipped with iron armor and weapon. In the middle of them, there are three men who stand out. Two men wearing royalty clothes and an old priest who is creepily smiling straight at me.


    Great. Who is this old man?


    "Uncle!" exclaimed Rose while running straight at one of the royalties who is older.


    "Rose! It is good to see you." the old royalty hugged Rose tight and I''m just awkwardly standing here staring at them.


    "Why would you ignored my call of reinforcements and ordered my ships and soldiers away from the eastern territory?" Rose asked her uncle who I believe is the King while releasing her hug and taking a step back.


    "What? What are you talking about, Rose? I don''t know anything about you asking for help and did you just say you needed reinforcements? Why?" King asked her.


    Wait. What? The King doesn''t know about the phantom invasion in his own kingdom?


    "It is good to see you again, Lady Rose, but how about we continue the conversation after you settle down on your rooms and rest from your travels." The old priest quickly interrupted.


    Both the king and Rose stare at the old priest.


    "The Prophet is right. Both of you needed to rest. We can continue our conversation later. Guards! Escort my niece and the other guest to their rooms." The king said.


    Right. This interaction alone can give me clues that there is something strange going on here and I''m not the only one who noticed it. Rose face is filled with so much confusion while she was staring at me.


    I nodded my head once to Rose indicating that we have the same thoughts.


    The guards ushered us to our respective rooms.


    I''m alone in my really beautiful, warm and royalty-ish room.


    I decided to ignore the strange signs around me since I''m finally here and the only guy in this world who has access to the Goddess is within my reach.


    I''m finally going back to my own world.


    ******* Prince Raimer''s POV ********


    "Put more strength into it!" my general beside me shouted to the soldiers who are carrying a battering ram.


    We are finally in the last stretch of this cruel journey.


    The rebellion is so successful and it only took a single day to have the King hole up in the throne room of the citadel along with his personal guards for a final stand.


    "Prince Raimer. I can take care of this. You should rest." the general said to me.


    "No. I have a duty to see this to the end." I said to him.


    "You do know what will happen once that door breaks down, your highness?"


    "The brutal killing of the soldiers loyal to the throne and possibly the death of my father," I said to my general with a straight face.


    The general stares at me and his face are filled with indifference.


    I already know how to end this cruel story.


    The gate of the throne room stood strong and it is not showing any signs of breaking.


    "Step away all of you. I will take care of that door." I said to everyone in front of me and they quickly listened.


    I walked in front of the gate and raised my giant hammer.


    ''Goddess. I hope you can forgive for what I''m about to do.'' I prayed for forgiveness since I know this is not the reason the Goddess granted me gifts but my father needed to stop.


    I bring the hammer down with all my strength and broke the gate down.


    I saw about two hundred soldiers in the throne room and all of them quickly fire their bows.


    Hundreds of arrows are flying towards the gate but my soldiers quickly rushed forward and raise their shields to protect me and themselves.


    A great battle between my army and the king''s guards commence.


    It didn''t take long for my father''s soldiers to overwhelmed and defeated since I have a thousand in my command while they only have two hundred on their side.


    Hundreds of dead bodies are littered in the throne room.


    My father is now alone standing in front of me and right behind him is the throne of the Kingdom of Xaerin.


    "Aah!"


    My father charges at me with his sword on his hand but I just parried his attack with little effort and push him to the floor.


    He began coughing blood.


    "Yield the throne, father. This doesn''t need to end like this." I said to him.


    "Ha! Did you really think convincing me would work, you spoiled brat!?"


    I stared at my father while holding the giant hammer with my left hand.


    Blood is dripping in my hammer. I also noticed that the floor of the room is covered with so much blood.


    "There is only one way to end this, boy. The question is, do you have have the guts to do it?" father said.


    I could just imprison him but that only solidifies my father''s point of me being a usurper and not a liberator.


    There is a truth that can''t be disputed in this world and that is there can only be one king ruling a kingdom.


    My father began laughing while staring at me.


    He didn''t even bother to get back on his feet or grab his sword and just continue staring at me.


    I raised my giant hammer and my father stop laughing.


    He didn''t bother to close his eyes and face his death with open arms.


    I bring the hammer down and the room shakes with the blow of the hammer.


    I didn''t notice how much strength I put in my swing.


    My father is now beyond recognition that I''m having trouble staring at him but I didn''t look away. No matter what kind of a man he is, he is still my father.


    I''m started walking towards the throne and stand in front of it.


    I sit on the throne and started looking around the room.


    Hundreds of dead bodies are on the floor. Loyal soldiers to the throne and loyal soldiers to the cause.


    Is the price that I just paid really worth the chair I''m sitting on?


    I guess it doesn''t matter now.


    The rebellion is finally over but I can''t stop remembering all the people who died in battle. They died believing in me so I have to make sure not to let them down.


    I closed my eyes and lean my back on the throne.


    At least the dead are happy now since they''re the only ones who have seen the end of the war.

 Episode 52: The Capital of Aezeokar (2)

    ******* Rose''s POV ********


    Rest? I can''t really rest from the strange things going on in this kingdom.


    Why do I feel like someone else is ruling this kingdom and not my uncle, the king?


    I need to get to the bottom of this.


    I opened the door of my room and tried to march towards the room my uncle is staying.


    I noticed that there are two soldiers guarding my room. They quickly bow to me the moment they see me and block my way.


    "My lady. Where are you going at this time of the day? Aren''t you suppose to be resting?" one of the soldiers talk to me.


    "I need to speak with my uncle. Get out of my way." I said to the soldiers since they are blocking my way.


    "That won''t be possible, my lady. The king ordered us to make sure to stay in your room so you can rest."


    I glare at both of them and they flinch a little bit.


    "I see. If you don''t get out of way after me counting to three, I''ll make sure both of you will be executed or better yet, I promise to hurt you both severely." I said to them after a moment.


    Both of them are still blocking my way and I''m starting to lose my patience.


    "One." I began counting making both of them panic.


    "My lady. I urge you to please calm down. We are just following the king''s order."


    "Two."


    They quickly ready their spears and shields.


    "This is your last chance," I said to them.


    They still remain in their battle stance and not showing signs of moving away.


    "Fine. Three."


    "Guar...!" One of the soldiers tried to call for reinforcements but I quickly grabbed their heads and pulled them inside my room.


    I smacked my head to the soldier''s head that I''m holding in my right hand making him unconscious. Even with his helmet on, it was quite easy.


    The other soldier on the left tried to scream but I quickly covered his mouth with my hand and stare closely at his eyes.


    I let go of the unconscious soldier and he is now laying flat on the floor.


    I drag the remaining soldier with me towards the door so I can close it.


    After making sure that it is only me and him, I grabbed a chair and forcibly sit the soldier.


    My hand is still in his mouth and equipped my dagger in my right hand.


    "If you start screaming or make any sudden movements when I let go of my hand, I will kill you. Do you understand?" I said to him and he quickly nods his head.


    I removed my hand on his mouth and grabbed another chair to sit while interrogating this soldier.


    "Now, I''m going to start asking you questions and you better make sure to answer them with honesty. Who ordered you to imprison me in my own room?" I asked the soldier and his eyes are filled with so much fear.


    "The king, my lady."


    "That is a lie!" I quickly place my dagger on his throat making him panic and he suddenly starts crying.


    "I swear in the name of the Goddess that I''m telling you the truth, my lady."


    Why would my uncle lock me in my room?


    The soldier''s eyes are sort of pure when I stare at them which means he is either a good liar or he is telling the truth. Whichever the case, I need to ask my uncle about this.


    I put away my dagger and start dragging the soldier in his shoulder. I am dragging him like he weighed nothing.


    I''m really angry right now so I just kick the door down of my room and started walking.


    There is a woman who is wearing a maid uniform standing beside the broken door.


    She saw that I''m dragging a soldier in my hand while there is another one who is unconscious inside the room.


    The maid tried to run away but I quickly grab her in her shoulder.


    I transferred about twenty emeralds in her inventory. That is enough money to feed her for an entire week or so.If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "Open your inventory." I quickly ordered the maid.


    She is staring at the black space in front of her so she is probably looking at her inventory like I ordered her to.


    The woman''s eyes opened wide and then she looks at me.


    "Take care of that soldier inside," I said to her while releasing my hand on her shoulder.


    I didn''t bother to check whether she followed my orders or not and just started walking.


    The soldier I''m dragging started to wiggle in my grip and I quickly glare at him. He cowered at gaze and I started walking again.


    Lots of people started to notice me but I didn''t care.


    I''m about to reach my uncle''s room when another man is blocking my way.


    "What are you doing, cousin?" said the son of the king wearing in his iron armor.


    "Move." I just said to him while still slowly walking towards the room of the king.


    "No. Tell me what is going..."


    He didn''t get to finish his sentence when I threw the soldier I''m dragging towards him.


    Both of them broke through the iron door of my uncle''s room.


    The soldiers that are following me behind and the ones guarding the door quickly pointed their weapons at me.


    "What is happening here?" I can hear the voice of my uncle inside the room.


    My uncle then slowly steps out of his room and saw that quite a lot of soldiers are pointing their weapons at me.


    "Put away your weapons." The king ordered and of the soldiers quickly followed.


    "What is going here, uncle?" I asked him.


    "I''m the one who is supposed to ask that question, Rose."


    "You ordered soldiers to lock me in my room," I said to him while pointing my hand behind him towards the soldier who is now standing beside my cousin.


    "What? You know what, come inside my room so we can discuss this and could someone please fix my door."


    I quickly followed him inside his room while someone just placed a new iron door behind us.


    "Leave us." the king ordered the soldier that I just threw.


    "No. Stay." I quickly intervened making the soldier confused about whose order he is going to follow.


    "My body hurts, cousin." said the son of the king.


    "Shut up, Ancelot." I just said to him making him gasped and took a step back.


    "What is this extreme animosity of yours, Rose?" said my uncle.


    "''Extreme animosity''! Are you kidding me! First, you stole away my ships and my troops! Second, you ignore my call for reinforcements and lastly, you just said you don''t know anything about it and lock me in my room!"


    I could no longer contain my wrath. I lose so many innocent people and I''m wasting time here screaming at my uncle.


    "Look, Rose. You need to calm down alright. I did order to transfer of the entire eastern fleet to the western ocean and call most of your soldiers but that is for the protection of the kingdom." the king started explaining.


    "Protection? Protection from what?" I ask him.


    "The drowned monsters are too quiet. I believe there are planning something. I know it." my uncle said.


    "The Phantoms are too quiet too until they decided to invade and took more than six hundred innocent people," I said to him.


    "What is this phantom invasion you keep talking about? I didn''t know anything about it." my uncle said while trying to find a chair to sit on.


    Before he can sit in his chair, I quickly walk towards him making everyone in the room raise their guards.


    I then stand so close to the face of the king of the Aezeokar.


    Ancelot tried to approach so he can stop me but I just pointed my dagger to him. He quickly cowered at my weapon.


    "I don''t know what is going here but all I know is that ''I. Need. My. Ships. And. Troops. Back.''" I said to my uncle.


    My uncle sighed and grab his chair to sit.


    "You are just like your mother when she was alive. Fierce, stubborn and most importantly, reckless. The qualities of a woman my brother likes. Look. I know you are in a hurry, Rose, but let talk for a moment alright so we can straighten this misunderstanding."


    I decided to grab a chair to sit on so we can start talking when suddenly the door of the room burst open and a soldier steps in.


    "I apologized for not knocking, your majesty, but there is an emergency." The soldier quickly said.


    "What is it?" my uncle asked.


    "There are people attacking King Carolus in his room." the soldier answered.


    My uncle was shocked by this news and quickly ordered to send soldiers to protect King Carolus but I know that is not necessary. I haven''t seen a being yet that can harm that man.


    ******* Carolus'' POV ********


    I can hear some commotion outside my room. I also hear the name Rose or something but I decided to ignore it and just lie on my bed to sleep early.


    I''m not really tired from the journey but with damn cold weather, it makes me want to laze around and just lie in bed all day.


    I was about to close my eyes and sleep when I noticed footsteps inside the room.


    That is weird. I''m sure that I locked the door and I''m alone in the room.


    The footsteps are barely audible but I can still hear it.


    Ten, no, about twenty people are in the room right now but I can''t see anyone since it is too dark in the room. Someone just blew the light of the lanterns.


    Great. What is going here?


    I can hear someone swinging something at me and I quickly grabbed whoever it was. I grabbed the head of the person and twist it. His neck made a cracking sound and I let go of that person.


    I leaped out of the bed and rolled on the floor.


    I can feel that I''m surrounded.


    I threw a bottle of Night Vision VI on the floor and I can now see the room perfectly clear but I still can''t see my attackers.


    Super great. They are probably using Invisibility potions.


    It doesn''t matter. If they want to show their potions abilities, I will also show mine.


    I grab two bottles in my inventory.


    I drop the one in my left hand and bottle breaks. Smoke is starting to fill the room and I can hear people coughing and trashing on the floor.


    I opened the other bottle in my right hand and quickly drink it.


    The first bottle was a failure from one of my experiments that I decided to keep it in case I can find a use for it in the future. The second one that I drank was milk and this holy water that came from my cows can heal and protect you from any poison and status changes.


    All of my attackers'' invisibility is starting to wear off for some reason. I can see all of them now.


    They are wearing matching clothes and I was shocked to see this. I believe this is what illagers wear in the game.


    What are the illagers want with me? I don''t remember pissing any of them off as far as I can remember.


    The illagers are still poisoned but they still charge at me.


    Okay. I didn''t want to dirty my room with blood so I decided to fight them with my bare hands.


    I started snapping their necks and punching them.


    It didn''t take long for all of them to die except one.


    This guy I''m holding right now is almost dead but he still wants to keep on fighting.


    I raise him close to my face and asks: "What do you want from me?".


    He started laughing for some reason.


    "The ender dragon has a message for you." said the man.


    "What message?" I asked.


    "You will never get back home. Hahaha."


    Rage quickly filled my body. I really want to squeeze this guy head.


    I''m so focused on my anger to this guy when I didn''t notice a bolt hitting in this guy''s head. The guy is dead now.


    What? Who shot that bolt?


    I quickly turn my gaze towards the door and noticed soldiers holding lanterns just standing not doing anything but my attention is on a single person.


    A priest holding a crossbow.

 Episode 53: The Capital of Aezeokar (3)

    ******** Prophet''s POV ********


    The ''Lost Hero'' is finally here.


    All my sacrifices will not be for naught. The crimes I committed in the name of the Goddess and the lies will finally stop once the Lost Hero will slay the ender dragon.


    "Prophet? Are you listening? What should we do next?"


    I can hear someone talking to me in the room. We are having a meeting in the church right to discuss what to do next.


    It appears that I lost focus on my objective. I must stay alert since King Carolus must never know what we are hiding beneath this church.


    "Just make sure to let King Carolus dark to what we are doing and add more guards to the church just in case," I said to them.


    "What about Lady Rose? We didn''t account for her to come with King Carolus. She will be a problem once we start convincing King Carolus to the Goddess'' plans." said one of the priest in the room.


    "Just lock her in her room and don''t let her out. Make sure to say that it is the king''s order." I answered.


    "There was an invasion of phantoms these last few days in the eastern territory. Shouldn''t we return the troops and ships that we borrowed from them?" asked the other priest.


    "No. We need every soldier we can muster for the final battle. We are finally close to end our suffering." I answered him.


    The meeting continued for a while until I finally dismissed them and head to my room.


    I am busy reading books and planning for the coming conversation with King Carolus. I need to be ready and able to convince him to my plans.


    I noticed that there is a commotion outside.


    What is going on?


    I opened the door of my room and quickly head to the direction where people are gathering.


    It is Lady Rose and she is dragging someone on her hand. She is dragging the soldier with relative ease.


    So this is the gifts of the Goddess that my informants are talking about. They witnessed Lady Rose performing incredible things during the invasion of phantoms in the eastern territory.


    Two priests are following behind me while I also follow Lady Rose to wherever she is going.


    She looks really angry. She is probably not happy that I ordered to lock her in her room.


    She suddenly threw the soldier towards the crown prince making both of them slammed into the iron door of the king''s room and breaking the door down.


    What tremendous strength Lady Rose possessed. Maybe I should include her in my plans instead of having only King Carolus participate in it.


    Lady Rose will definitely find out that it is not the king who ordered to imprison her in her room so I have to think of an excuse to make this incident pin on someone else.


    I was busy formulating a plan in my head when suddenly there is someone shouting coming from the direction of the room where King Carolus is staying.


    Lots of soldiers are running towards the room of King Carolus and so am I and the two priests who came with me.


    To everyone surprised, the room of King Carolus is filled with dead illagers.


    The lanterns of the soldiers here are barely lighting the room but everyone can still see the slaughter.


    So this is the capabilities of a man who is destined to save this world.


    He is holding an illager in his hands. It seems like there is still one of them alive.


    "What do you want from me?" asked King Carolus to the illager.


    "The ender dragon has a message for you." answered the illager.


    What? So the point of this attack is to deliver a message? How did they even get inside the citadel? We have thousands of soldiers guarding this place and a thousand more guarding the walls. It has been years since I saw an illager. None of them are able to step on this kingdom.


    "What message?" King Carolus asked.


    The illager suddenly started laughing and King Carolus is still calm.


    "You will never get back home. Hahaha." answered the illager to King Carolus question.


    King Carolus calm face quickly turned into anger.The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    What is that illager talking about? Home?


    No, I can''t let them get through King Carolus. We still need him. The world still needs him.


    "You," I said to one of the priests who is standing beside me.


    "Yes, Prophet." he quickly replied.


    "Load a crossbow and kill that man," I ordered and he quickly followed my order without question.


    The priest equipped a crossbow in his hands and aimed at the illager.


    He fired the crossbow and hit the illager on the head killing him in an instant.


    King Carolus quickly turned his head towards us and his eyes are full of hatred. Everyone is really scared right now like King Carolus'' eyes alone can kill a human being.


    ******* Carolus'' POV ********


    Who is that bloody crossbow-wielding priest?


    Why did he suddenly killed this person? I still need to ask him some question like how did he know that I''m not from this world. No, he said it was the message of the ender dragon so ender dragon is the one who knows that I''m not from around here.


    I drop the dead body on the floor and started walking towards the priest who killed the illager.


    I''m really angry right now and it seems that it is showing in my face since most of the soldiers are afraid of me and are slowly walking backward except for priest and other two people.


    I was about to grab the neck of the priest when suddenly an old man put his hand on my shoulder.


    "King Carolus. Please. I need you to stay calm for a moment. He has a reason for doing it. His family got killed from illager raids. I hope you can forgive him." the old man said but I''m still full of fury.


    I closed my eyes and took a deep breath.


    My yoga skills are now in effect.


    After exhaling a huge air and opening my eyes, I become calm and steady.


    "Thank you, your majesty." the old man said to me.


    The old man turned around and face the soldiers.


    "Soldiers. Can you please clean King Carolus room and increase the security of the citadel. Also, start checking the city for any more illagers who managed to get inside." the old man ordered the soldiers.


    The soldiers bowed to the old man while walking past him and they also bowed to me.


    "King Carolus. It is unfortunate that this incident ruined your rest. It will take a while for them to clean the bodies. May I offer you a cup of hot water in my room while waiting for them to finish." said the old man.


    I didn''t say anything and just nodded my head.


    We started walking in the hallway when suddenly I can see Rose in front of me.


    I just ignored Rose and just walked past her.


    I''m not in the mood right now for any conversation. My head is so jumbled up and I need to sort my thoughts out.


    We managed to reach the old man''s room and we quickly sit on the chairs.


    The old man places a cup of hot water in the table in front of me and I quickly grab it and started drinking.


    Whoa! That did the trick. My chest is so hot right now and my head is starting to feel better.


    "I remember that I still haven''t introduced myself to you. My name is Terrick but you can call me ''Prophet''." said the old man.


    "Carolus Rex."


    "I know your name, your majesty. You''re the only one the Goddess keeps talking about." The old man said this with a huge smile on his face.


    Okay. I didn''t know that I have a celestial being who is keeping an eye on me.


    I don''t really know how to proceed with this conversation. I really want to ask him to ask the Goddess the question ''What am I doing in this world?''.


    I was about to say something when the Prophet started talking.


    "It is great to finally have you with us, your majesty. I don''t know your reason for hiding for this long but I know that you probably have a valid reason for it so I can totally understand."


    Oh no. Don''t tell me this guy will start talking about destiny.


    "It is finally time for you to face your destiny."


    I freaking knew it.


    I don''t know how to react to this. Every time someone brought up the destiny thing, I just ignore them but this time I can''t do that since I need this guy to be able to communicate with the Goddess.


    The Prophet started babbling about some things I don''t really care and I just listen to him without interrupting.


    He also started laying a map on the table saying things like I need to get here and grab a thing to open the thing in the other side of the map so I can fight the ender dragon but none of his information managed to stay on my head since all I can think about is my home.


    I was about to fall asleep when suddenly, for the first time, the words of the Prophet managed to catch my attention.


    "You need to trust me, your majesty. For this plan, victory will be assured."


    Okay. Enough with this conversation.


    I quickly stand on my chair and excuse myself. My room is probably clean right now so I quickly told the Prophet that I needed to rest since it is already late and started walking back to my room.


    Luckily, my room is finally free from dead bodies and they even change every sheets, carpets, and curtain in the room. It is a bit excessive but I didn''t mind since I can finally sleep.


    I hop on the bed and close my eyes.


    I cleared my thoughts and covered myself with the blanket.


    ''The problem of tomorrow is tomorrow''s problem.'' I said to myself to make me fall asleep.


    ******* Rose''s POV ********


    How did the illagers get here in this citadel and most importantly, where King Carolus is going and why he is with the Prophet?


    King Carolus just past me and didn''t even said a single word or spare another glance. He is still calm even with all the things that just happened. I don''t really know what is going on with that man''s mind.


    But I can let this chance go. The Prophet will absolutely say some things to King Carolus which means I need to know what it is.


    I quickly run back to my room, ignoring my uncle and my cousin. The matter about my uncle''s order to imprison me will have to wait until later or tomorrow.


    I managed to reach my room and quickly get inside.


    "Rose. Ahck! Rose."


    I can hear my parrot saying my name while sitting on the table.


    I quickly approached him and grab him and make him sit on my shoulder.


    "Jack. I need to listen to me. I have an important job for you."


    "Job. Ahck! Job."


    "Yes, job."


    I started walking towards the bookshelf place on the side of the wall of the room.


    I move the bookshelves out of the way and was surprised to see that the entrance to the secret passage is still here.


    I guess with all the changes that happened to the kingdom while I''m away, they didn''t change the hidden passageways in the citadel.


    I grab a lantern in my inventory and quickly walk inside the tunnels and navigate to the nearest place where I think is the room of the Prophet.


    I managed to reach the place and I think beyond this stone wall is the room of the Prophet.


    "Jack. I need you to listen to the conversation behind that wall and repeat everything you hear to me. Do you understand?" I said to him.


    "Ahck! Understood."


    This parrot of mine is special since I trained him myself to be able to hear voices and sound behind thick walls and far away distances and also be able to say it back.


    It didn''t take long for Jack to start talking.


    Jack speak in the voice of the Prophet and King Carolus but mostly the Prophet. King Carolus is a quiet type of person so it makes sense


    I just listen to Jack while sitting and leaning my back again the wall since I got tired of standing around.


    I''m surprised by the information I just heard.

 Episode 54: The Capital of Aezeokar (4)

    ******** Carolus'' POV ********


    Ah. Finally going to sleep.


    My eyes are closed and my head is all cleared up.


    Nothing will stop me from sleeping.


    As I''m about to fall asleep, I noticed footsteps inside my room.


    Ah! Not again! Is there another assassin? How many are there and why are they so persistent in killing me when I didn''t do anything to them?


    I''m tired of this so let''s finish this quick and get back to bed.


    I was about to shove away the blanket and face my enemy when I noticed something strange.


    I know that pattern of footsteps. It is Rose''s footsteps. I know it anywhere since we traveled together for quite a period of time.


    I didn''t get up on my bed and still have my eyes closed since I know it is not an enemy.


    "What are you doing in here so late, Rose?" I asked.


    "How did you know it was me?" She quickly asked while slowly walking towards me.


    "Just answer the question and how did you get in here?"


    Now, I think about it, I didn''t actually know how the illagers managed to get inside my room.


    "There are secret passageways in this citadel that only the royal family know. You can access a lot of places using those tunnels. That is also probably how the illagers managed to get inside this room and attack you." Rose said.


    Great. Now it makes sense. I need to cover up those tunnels if I want some privacy in this place.


    "You need to get up. We need to talk." Rose said while pulling my blanket away and throwing it on the floor.


    God. What did she want now? It is already late and I want to sleep. Can''t this wait until morning?


    I just get up on my bed and prepared myself since I figured this will take a while.


    I sit on the chair and grab a bottle of fresh water in my inventory and started drinking.


    "I heard your conversation with the Prophet," Rose said.


    Wait, what? She was listening to my conversation with the Prophet?


    "I know what you are thinking. ''How did I know that?'' My parrot here is unique and able to..."


    Rose didn''t get to finish her sentence since I quickly raise my hand to interrupt her.


    "What do you want?" I quickly asked her to get to the point.


    "What are doing agreeing to a suicide mission?"


    "Suicide mission?" I didn''t answer her question and just asked since I have no idea what she is talking about.


    I can''t really remember the conversation with Prophet since I stop paying attention after him saying the word "Destiny".


    Rose place a map on the table and it is really crudely made but still passable for this world standard. Why do maps on this world are like hand-drawn? Wait. I remember that you need a redstone dust to create a magic map so they probably run out of it since this world is also run out of diamond.


    I should give away some of my empty magic maps for them to use since they are really useful. I probably think about later.


    "Here on this side of the deep ocean lies the ocean monument. This is where some of the pieces of the end portal are stored. It is guarded by three..."


    "Elder Guardians." I finished Rose sentence since I remember that one in the game.


    "You know about them? Then you know attacking that place is suicide and the Prophet even plan to use the entire fleet of the kingdom and most of its soldiers, especially the army of the eastern territory, to attack that place."


    I see. So from what I can understand, there is an ocean monument in the west of Aezeokar but what does it have to do with me? Wait, she said that the pieces of end portal are stored there. I don''t even know that end portal blocks can be mined or crafted but I guess it is different in this world.


    I didn''t say anything and just stared at Rose since I don''t really know what to say.


    "And the Prophet even said that after getting the pieces of the end portal, you will immediately travel towards the Phantom Island and attack the Woodland Mansion located in the middle of that island to be able to rebuild the portal there and attack the ender dragon." Rose continued.This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    Okay. Now my conversation with the Prophet is coming back to me.


    "If that plan isn''t stupid then I don''t know what stupidity is and this is the part when you say SOMETHING!" Rose suddenly slam her hand on the table making me surprised but I still managed to remain still and calm.


    Damn. I didn''t know that the Prophet was talking about a full-scale attack with me on the helm. I should have paid attention at that time.


    "Look. I don''t know why you agreed with this plan but I''m not letting more of my people suffer for a plan that I''m pretty sure it is not from the Goddess since that Prophet is a manipulative and cunning old man." Rose said.


    "What are you proposing?" I asked since I noticed that I''m too quiet with this conversation.


    "I''m going to the church and tell the Prophet that he is crazy and I will not let him do this."


    "How about to table this discussion for now and sleep since it is already late," I said to her and I made sure to keep my tone soft to make sure I can convince this hot-headed lady.


    "What? No. I am going to tell that old man right now and you are coming with me."


    And that is how my night got ruined. Again.


    Rose sort of convince me to come with her to the tunnels to get to the church.


    I actually asked her why not used the regular path to the church like a normal human being would do but she just replied that it is much faster to travel here and no one would be able to stop us.


    The tunnels are really dark and the only light source we have are lanterns.


    Rose asked me if we can use a Night Vision potion but I quickly replied that it is a waste of resource since we are just going to talk to the Prophet.


    I was about to complain that this is madness even for Rose standard but I remembered clearly what Prophet said to me.


    ''You need to trust me.''


    Those are the words that caught my attention and raise suspicion.


    When someone asked me to trust them, I don''t freaking trust them especially from a person I just met.


    After walking for a while, Rose''s parrot suddenly started making noises that I didn''t think I would hear in this world.


    "What is that, Jack? What noises are you making?" Rose asked her parrot sitting in her right shoulder.


    "Iron Golem," I said without noticing that I voice my thoughts.


    "What?" Rose suddenly turned around and face me.


    Right. I didn''t actually expect to meet any optional mobs in this world like the iron golem and snow golem since I tried creating them but ultimately failed so I just assumed they don''t exist in this world.


    You can summon an iron golem in the game using 4 blocks of iron place in a T formation and a carved pumpkin on top. I tried doing that back in my castle in the forest so I can have guards protecting me or a companion since I got lonely living alone but nothing happened.


    I also recently tried summoning a snow golem in the eastern territory of Aezeokar using 2 blocks of snow and a carved pumpkin but nothing also happened so I just assumed that there are no optional mobs in this world.


    I began explaining the iron golem to Rose and she just listened carefully to every word I said.


    "Wait. A creature made out of iron? How is that possible and why no one in this world knows about them?" Rose asked after hearing my explanations.


    ''I don''t also know, lady.'' I said in my head but didn''t voice out since I don''t want to anger her.


    I just started tapping on the wall on the side of the tunnel where I believe the parrot heard the iron golem.


    Hmm. I don''t know how thick this wall is but I''m really curious about this iron golem.


    I equipped a diamond pickaxe in my hand.


    "What are you planning to do?" Rose asked.


    I just ignored her and started mining the stones in the wall.


    It didn''t take long for me to get into the other side of the wall since my diamond pickaxe is enchanted with Efficiency V. I can also make the process of breaking blocks go faster if I drink a Strenght potion or have a Haste II beacon but I don''t want to waste my potion supply and I don''t have any beacon in my inventory.


    "We are probably beneath the church judging from the distance we traveled but I don''t remember the church having a basement," Rose said while observing the area.


    We are standing in the middle of a really dark hallway and I don''t know which way to take.


    I look at Rose and was about to ask what to do next when I noticed the parrot head is pointing to the right.


    Okay. Right, it is.


    We started walking in the hallway until we managed to reach a door with two soldiers guarding it.


    Rose quickly blew the light of our lanterns.


    What is she doing? Aren''t we supposed to talk with the Prophet? We can just ask the soldiers that we need an appointment with the Prophet.


    "I will take care of this." Rose suddenly whispered.


    What? What is she talking about?


    Before I can even ask Rose a question, she whispered something to her parrot and the parrot suddenly started flying towards the guards and started distracting them.


    "Where did this bird come from and how did it get inside?" one of the guards said while trying to drive away the bird.


    Rose started running towards the guard on the right and I don''t really know what she is planning.


    She is really fast and managed to grab the soldier in the head and slammed it on the door rendering the soldier unconscious.


    Okay. This is not what I was hoping for. I thought we only came to this church to talk to the Prophet. Well, I can''t really complain considering that I just mined my way through to this place out of curiosity about the iron golem.


    The other soldier noticed her and tried to defend himself but was too late when Rose charged at him and he got grabbed. Rose quickly smacked her head to the soldier''s head also making him passed out.


    Wow. How hard is Rose''s head to be able to knock a man unconscious who is wearing an iron helmet with a headbutt?


    Rose motioned me to move forward.


    Ah! Fine! I''m really curious about the iron golem so I guess I have to follow Rose for now even with her craziness.


    Rose tried to turn the knob of the iron door but it is locked.


    "Do you know how to lockpick a door?" Rose suddenly asked.


    I didn''t answer her question and just kicked the door down.


    Rose already attacked two innocent soldiers who are just guarding a door so there is no point in covering our tracks.


    "I guess that works too," Rose said while staring at the broken iron door on the floor.


    We slowly stepped inside the room and was shocked at how massive this room is. The room is also filled with lanterns so it is well-lit.


    "What is that?" Rose suddenly asked a question while staring something in front of her.


    No. That is impossible.


    What is this thing doing in this world? I thought this will only exist in the game. I didn''t even know that you can actually build this here. Building this thing didn''t even cross my mind because of how cruel and immoral to make this thing to work in this world but here it is. It is right in front of me.


    I''m sure I''m not mistaken since I built quite a lot of this when I was playing the game.


    The thing I''m staring right now is an "Iron Farm".

 Totally not April Fools Day Episode

    "Princess. We should fall back. There are too many of them." One of the officers said to the Princess.


    "No. We will hold our ground until the end." The Princess replied with a stoic and unwavering tone.


    Thousands of Goblins are in the field right now planning to attack the small town near the border of the kingdom but the Princess'' army managed to get here in time.


    The Princess'' army only has around five hundred soldiers but they are fully equipped and well-trained. Most of them are mounted too so they have a certain advantage in the battle.


    The Princess stands in the very front of her army, on foot and wearing only the armor she has been wearing when she started fighting a long time ago. She is killing everything that dares to approach her. Her sword is like wind every time she swings it. Nobody in the world will ever believe that this eighteen-year woman can fight in a strength equivalent to a hundred soldiers.


    A Giant Goblin suddenly pushed his way in the battlefield so he can face the Princess. He is about twice the height of an average human. He is carrying a mace in his hands.


    The Princess saw the coming monster but she remained calm and waited for it to come to her. She remembered that the monster is called a hobgoblin. A slightly different species of goblin but still as cruel and merciless.


    The Hobgoblin quickly swings his mace towards the Princess but she quickly evades it and rolls near the feet of the monster.


    The Princess quickly stab her sword in the crotch of the Hobgoblin and the monster screams and drop on his knees. She took this chance to finish off the Hobgoblin and swings her sword to cut the monster''s head.


    After killing the Hobgoblin, the Princess quickly turned her attention on the battlefield. She saw that her army is starting to get overwhelmed but she also knows that they the only ones standing between the town full of innocent people and thousands of savage monsters.


    "Horse!" The Princess shouted and one of the mounted soldiers quickly approached her and gave his mount.


    The Princess hopped on the horse''s back and quickly shouted "Personal Guards and all the mounted soldiers! With me!". She knows that the battle is hopeless but she has a plan.


    The Princess started gathering her elite cavalry with her and most of her army''s mounted soldiers. They are in battle formation and just waiting for the Princess'' order.


    "We will lose this battle if we keep on doing this but don''t fret because I have a plan!" The Princess shouted to her army.


    The Princess maneuvered her horse so it is facing in the goblin''s army center. Everyone around her already knows what the Princess is thinking.


    "We will kill the Goblin Lord! Now, who''s with me!?" The Princess shouted and everyone quickly cheered while raising their weapons in the air.


    After a moment, the Princess kicked her horse to move it forward and ordered to her troops to charge.


    There are only about two hundred soldiers charging towards the sea of Goblins but the assault is unhindered and unstoppable because morale is really high and the Princess herself is leading the charge.


    They cut down every Goblin in their path and it didn''t take long for them to reach the headquarters of the Goblin Lord.


    The Goblin Lord sees this foolish struggles of the humans and didn''t even tried to stop them to reach him. He is now surrounded and he is facing the famed Princess of the Human Kingdom.


    The Princess quickly dismounted in her horse since she is proficient fighting on foot rather on horseback. She readied her sword on her left hand and adjusted her helmet so she can see perfectly what is in front of her. She started walking towards the Goblin Lord.


    The Goblin Lord sends two of his best Hobgoblin Personal Guards to stop the Princess but they are swiftly killed in a single sword slash.


    The Goblin Lord stares at the Princess and he is full of shock. He didn''t believe any of the rumors about her and just told himself that no humans possessed that kind of strength. He sends more of his Personal Guards towards her but they are quickly killed with little effort.


    "You monster! What are you?" The Goblin Lord shouted at the Princess and he quickly rose in his makeshift movable throne.


    "You are the monster here." The Princess replied with an indifferent tone.


    The Goblin Lord readies his club while the Princess readies her sword.


    There is a moment of silence between them while there is a raging battle around.


    The Goblin Lord makes the first move by charging forward and quickly swinging his club down.


    The Princess didn''t bother to evade and just raise her sword to block the attack.This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source.


    The blow of the Goblin Lord was so great that the ground beneath them cracked and shook for awhile.


    The Princess managed to withstand the attack of a giant monster with ease using only her left hand. The Goblin Lord is so shocked about this and he quickly pulled his club and jumps back to distance himself with the Princess.


    "Is that the best you can do?" The Princess taunted the Goblin Lord while she is swinging her sword around to condition herself to fight the monster.


    The Goblin Lord didn''t take the bait and remained calm. He stares at the Princess who is just standing around waiting for him to make a move.


    "Well, if you won''t attack then I guess I''ll just have to charge." The Princess said in a casual tone while preparing herself to fight.


    The Goblin Lord quickly prepared himself for the coming attack but he didn''t anticipate for the Princess to move so fast.


    The Princess leaped forward and managed to get close to the Goblin Lord so quick. She swings her sword towards the giant monster but he managed to block the attack.


    The Goblin Lord managed to protect himself but his hands were about to give up because of the amount of force he just blocked. Before he can reorient himself, the Princess raised her right hand and punch the giant monster on his stomach.


    All of the air quickly leaves out of the lungs of the Goblin Lord. He was about to curl his body in pain but the Princess quickly swings her sword again, cutting his right arm who is holding the club.


    The arm of the Goblin Lord drops on the ground and the monster screamed so loud. He tries to grab his right hand to put it back in place since he can use his ability to regenerate but the Princess just kicked it off and sends it flying in the distance.


    "You bit...!" The Goblin Lord tried to scream at the Princess but she just swings her sword cutting the Goblin Lord''s head.


    The Princess'' army cheered for this victory but the cheering didn''t last long.


    The leader of the Goblin army is dead but the horde of monsters are still fighting furiously.


    The Princess knows that killing the leader of the monster is not enough to stop the onslaught. She quickly heads back to her mount and screamed: "Target the smalls ones and leave the giant monsters to me!".


    The battle between humans and goblins rage on for the whole day.


    When the sun is about to go down, thousands of dead goblins lay in the field outside the border. There are also about half of the Princess'' army lay dead in the battlefield.


    Not a single monster tried to run away or beg for their life. They fought with everything they got but all of them still got slaughtered in the hands of the Princess'' army since they got no coordination because their leader was dead.


    The Princess herself managed to kill a hundred or so enemies, maybe even more since she lost count of how many she slew in the battle. She moved her horse in the battlefield to see her soldiers, that she trained herself, lay dead on the ground.


    "Burn the dead bodies before the moon rises on top of our heads." The Princess ordered to her soldiers.


    "Even our soldiers, your highness?" one of the soldiers asked.


    "Are they considered ''dead bodies''?" The Princess said while she turned her head around to face the soldier.


    The soldiers flinched at the indifferent tone of the Princess but all of them knew that they can''t leave the dead bodies since they might be Necromancers around lurking in the surroundings and they might take advantage of this situation.


    They quickly followed the Princess orders and started piling the dead bodies. They also started cutting down trees in the nearby forest for the bonfire.


    The Princess watches of what is left of her army work then she quickly turned around to head towards the town to check on them if they are alright.


    She is with around twenty of her best guards and they are galloping towards the town.


    The sun is already gone but the people standing on top the wall of the town and saw the coming cavalry, They quickly ready themselves to defend the town but saw that the flags carrying by the coming soldiers are the Princess'' flag.


    The town militias quickly opened its gates for the Princess.


    The Princess was greeted with loud cheering and applause but she can''t really feel that she won the battle. She lost half of her army and will probably lose even more since she received a report about another horde of monsters attacking the Kingdom. This time it is the Snakemen tribes of the marshlands.


    It seems that the Snakemen heard about the Goblin''s invasion and is planning to take advantage of this to take lands from the Human Kingdom but the Princess will never let that happen.


    After parading in the town, ignoring the cheering and applause of the town''s people, the Princess quickly heads to the room that was given to her by the Lord of this town.


    The room is really beautiful and it fits for the Royal Princess but the Princess didn''t care about this sort of thing.


    The Princess is still soaked in so much blood of the goblins but she just ignored it and opened the map of the Human Kingdom in the table.


    There is still a week or so before the Snakemen reaches the border of the Kingdom so they still have enough time to rest and prepare for another battle.


    "Pardon the intrusion, Princess, but don''t you think it is about time you take a rest."


    The Princess heard a voice behind her and she didn''t even notice that someone just barge in her room without knocking. She cursed herself for being too careless but that is probably because she is a little bit tired from the recent battle.


    "I''m fine. We still have another horde of monsters to deal with." The Princess said to the man who is now walking towards the table the Princess is planning for the next battle.


    The Princess turns her head towards the man who just came in her room and stares at him. She knows this old man from her childhood. He is the one who taught her how to lift a sword and how to fight.


    "How many legions the kingdom still have?" The Princess asked her trusted old general.


    "Ten, your highness. Two guarding each of the borders in the north, east, south, and west and another two guarding the capital." The General replied.


    ''Around fifty thousand soldiers.'' The Princess thought to herself.


    The Princess knows that the number of soldiers defending each border is barely enough to defend the kingdom so she can''t call for any reinforcement which means she just has to deal with the invasion of the Snakemen with what little army she has.


    Both the Princess and the General started planning for the coming invasion and after a while, she sends him away so she can finally rest.


    The Princess takes off her armor, exposing her well-built body which she accumulated for fighting in the front lines for a long time.


    As she was about to strip so she can clean herself, she suddenly stares at the map one more time and remembered how vast this world is.


    Monsters, Elves, Dwarfs and even Dragons live in this world and the weakest among them, the Humans.


    The Princess thought to herself that the humans will never bow down to anyone. She will have to die first before allowing that to happen.


    ''Just wait and see. All of them will know the true capabilities of the humans and most importantly they will know me, no, I will make sure that they will never forget about me.'' The Princess thought to herself while clenching her fist on the table.


    ''I am Princess Alexandria Beatrice Celestria Destefani and I''m going to leave a huge mark in this world.''

 Episode 55: The Capital of Aezeokar (5)

    ******* Carolus'' POV ********


    "You know what it is?" Rose asked me from beside but I ignored her and just keep on staring at the Iron Farm.


    Who built this? Is there another person like me in this world that got stuck here and why on earth would they build this sort of thing?


    Multiple questions soared in my brain that I''m starting to lose my mind.


    I started running forward and quickly hopped to get on top of the Iron Farm.


    I landed near the stone edge of the build and I can see one Iron Golem walking inside the stone cage.


    The Iron Golem looks up and stares at me. He then started charging towards me and he really wants me dead but can''t do anything since the wall of the cage is quite high.


    I don''t see any contraption in the build to kill the Iron Golem so they probably do it manually. How many Iron Golems can this build summon in a single day?


    I can hear someone ripping something below and multiples scream echoed in the room.


    "What is this? Why are there children locked in this compartment?" I can hear Rose asked no one in particular.


    I quickly jumped off the Iron Farm and landed on the floor behind Rose. She is standing in front of the opening where the door is once placed. I can see the iron door that got ripped off in the distance.


    Rose noticed me and she quickly steps away in the doorway.


    I held the lantern in my hand towards the room and I can see quite a lot of really scared children.


    I was shocked about the things I''m seeing but I managed to make myself calm.


    "Come on out. We won''t hurt you, I promise." I said to the children.


    They didn''t move in their places and just continue staring at us and shaking.


    They are really dirty and looks malnourish. How long are they trapped in this room?


    I opened my inventory and grabbed an apple in my left hand. I then raised it so the children can see.


    Their eyes turned wide like they haven''t seen any food for a while.


    "It''s alright. Come on here. I will give you lots of food." I said to them and this time they slowly walk out of their prison.


    One by one, they slowly walk towards me and I handed each one of them an apple and a bottle of water.


    They eat in silence and I can see so much happiness in their eyes.


    They are 12 of them. They are really young and some of them are probably the same age as the next-door kid back in my own world.


    Who would do something like this? Trapping innocent children so they can harvest iron. My God.


    "What is going on here, Rose? Do you know about this?" I suddenly asked her after tending the children.


    "I don''t even know what that thing is." She replied.


    I was about to ask Rose another question when there suddenly a loud banging that came in the Iron Farm. The children quickly covered their ears and close their eyes. They started shaking again.


    "It''s alright. It just the Iron Golem. He is trapped so won''t be able to hurt you." I said to them and they quickly calm down.


    Well, I''m hoping that cage can withstand the blows of the Iron Golem otherwise I have to kill it to protect these children. I don''t know if that Iron Golem is hostile or not but I''m not taking any chances.


    I suddenly can hear multiple footsteps coming from the hallway.


    "What? What is it?" Rose quickly asked me since I turned around and face the door.


    "Footsteps. People wearing armor running towards here. They are close. They are about 20 or so of them and I can still hear more." I said to her.


    "How do you know that?" Rose asked me but I just turned around and face the children.


    "Kids. Quick. Get back inside." I said to them.


    None of the children dared to move a step and even some of them are shaking their heads in disapproval.


    I kneeled on the floor and face them eye to eye.This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.


    "Look. I know you don''t want to get back in there but it is the only safe place here." I said to the children but still didn''t budge in their places.


    "Just picked them up and shove them inside," Rose said beside me.


    I can see Rose is holding a bow in her hand now and she is ready for battle. She is also wearing her iron armor.


    I ignored Rose''s proposal and just opened my inventory to see what I can use to convince these kids to listen to me.


    I held a compass in my hand and all of the children''s attention quickly glued to what I''m holding.


    "This is a compass. See. This thing always points North." I said to them while shaking the compass and waiting for it to point North again.


    I hand over the compass to the nearest boy in the group.


    "How about all of you play with that while I and this lady here deal with some people," I said to them while slowly ushering them inside their prison room.


    I also handed them my lantern since it is quite dark inside the room.


    I noticed that this room doesn''t have any heating, whatsoever, so I place a furnace inside and chuck coal blocks from my inventory. I fired up the furnace and the room is starting to heat up.


    "I''m going to place an iron door to keep safe," I said to the kids after making sure they are sort of alright and their faces quickly turned sour.


    "No. No. No. Don''t worry. I won''t lock the door. This is just a safety precaution." I quickly explained to them and luckily, they seem to trust me.


    After making sure the children are safe, I then turned around to see that they are now soldiers slowly walking inside the room.


    They are pointing their weapons at us and it is making me pissed since they are children behind me. Thankfully, there are an iron door and stone walls protecting the children so they will probably be alright.


    "What is the meaning of this? Don''t you know who I am? I''m Rose Cromwell. Lady of the Eastern Border. Protector of the Eastern Territory and niece of King Raimer." Rose shouted and she made sure everyone in the room can hear her.


    None of the soldiers flinched at Rose''s words like whatever she was saying don''t matter to them.


    The soldiers stood their ground and I have no idea how to deal with this situation.


    I''m still armorless and weaponless since I decided to solve this matter peacefully but Rose suddenly raised her weapon and nocked an arrow.


    "Fine. Have it your way." Rose said to them while loosing an arrow and hitting a soldier in the shoulder.


    The soldier that got hit with an arrow quickly fall on the floor and struggled to get back up. Thankfully it is not a fatal shot. It seems that Rose doesn''t want unnecessary killing.


    Rose started firing arrows at extreme speed that every single one of the soldiers here didn''t get the chance to fight back or defend themselves.


    After a while, they are now about 30 wounded soldiers in the room and more and more of them are still pouring in.


    "That is enough!" A shout suddenly roared coming from outside the room.


    The soldiers make way for the person who just shouted and Rose and I can see the person who we are supposed to talk to when we came in this place.


    The Prophet.


    "What is the meaning of this? What are you both doing in here? None of you are supposed to here." Prophet said to us and Rose just ignored him and pointed her bow towards the old man.


    I started walking towards the Prophet without any protection or weapon.


    The soldiers quickly turned their attention to me but I don''t really care about anything else right now.


    I want answers and I want them now.


    "King Carolus. Let me explain what..."


    The Prophet didn''t get the chance to finish what he was saying since I put my hand on his neck and started dragging him towards the wall beside the door.


    The soldiers around tried to stop me but they just get hit by arrows coming from Rose.


    I slammed the Prophet so hard on the wall that he made a coughing sound.


    "Do you know what is that thing behind me?" I asked while loosening my grip on the Prophet''s neck so he can talk.


    "Yes. An Iron Farm."


    "Who built it?"


    "I''m the one who designed it and I let my followers build it."


    I tighten my grip on his neck and he is now slowly losing color on his face.


    "King Carolus...!" Rose tried to approach here and stop me but I quickly equipped a spear in my other hand and pointed at her.


    It seems that Rose managed to incapacitate all the soldiers here and there is only me, the Prophet and Rose left standing.


    I loosened my grip on the Prophet''s neck once again and he started coughing and gasping for air. I also lowered my spear.


    "You have no idea how desperate I am to save this kingdom." The Prophet said after a while.


    "I''m only a beggar for food when I was young but my fate towards the Goddess is strong. I prayed and prayed to be saved until one day, the Goddess whispered something in my ears. ''I will answer your prayers but you also have to help me save this world''." He continued.


    I let go of him and he falls on the floor.


    The Prophet is rubbing his neck and he then gets back up on his feet.


    "The very first thing the Goddess asked of me was to write a letter in a language that I don''t know and keep it until the right time comes to give it to the right person. I was having difficulty at that time following the Goddess'' order since paper is expensive and I don''t even know how to write." The Prophet said.


    The Prophet started walking towards the Iron Farm and I was about to stop him by grabbing his neck once again but Rose suddenly intervened. He is facing the Iron Farm and started staring at it.


    "Then I turned into a grown man. I was granted a gift from the Goddess to be able to see things, not from this world and I used that gift to help the Kingdom of Aezeokar to get back on its feet." The Prophet said without turning around and still staring at the Iron Farm.


    "I learned the secrets on how to produce enough food so the kingdom won''t no longer be dependent on Xaerin to survive. I saw people using diamond tools and building towering structures that is touching the skies. I don''t know who those people are but they can build things way beyond this world comprehension." The Prophet said while turning around and face us.


    Is he talking about the people who are playing the game? He also said that he has a gift from the Goddess.


    I opened my inventory and held an eye of ender in my hand.


    I pointed the eye of ender to him but nothing happened. What is going here?


    "That won''t work, King Carolus. The eye of ender can able to see the truth of any being except me. When the Goddess found out about my plans to create the thing that is behind me, she quickly took away the gift she gave me. She also took away my name, age, everything. I''m basically nothing." The Prophet said while slowly walking back towards us. He is careful not to step on the soldiers who are withing in pain on the floor.


    "But my sacrifices will not be for naught since you are here now. We have five thousand well-equipped soldiers and enough ships to carry them. With you leading this entire force, we will be able to end this world nightmare." He said and his hand was about to touch me but I quickly shove them away.


    Damn. I realized that this old man is crazier than Rose.